McDATA Sphereon 4400 Fabric Switch Installation and Service Manual

McDATA

®

Sphereon™ 4400 Fabric Switch

Installation and Service Manual

P/N 53-1000925-01

Record of Revisions and Updates

Revision

620-000238-000

620-000238-010

620-000238-020

53-1000925-01

Date

7/2005

3/2006

8/2006

3/2008

Description

General availability (GA) release of the manual. Describes Release 8.7 of the Enterprise Fabric Connectivity

Manager application.

Upodated for ROHs changes.

Describes Release 9.0 of the Enterprise Fabric Connectivity Manager application.

Added Japanese power cord statement.

Copyright © 2005, 2006 McDATA Corporation. All rights reserved.

Printed March 2008

Fourth Edition

With the exception of downloading a copy of this publication for the customer's own use, no part of this publication may be reproduced or distributed except as authorized under the terms of the

"McDATA Corporation License to Copy Machine Readable Documentation."

The information contained in this document is subject to change without notice. McDATA

Corporation assumes no responsibility for any errors that may appear.

All computer software programs, including but not limited to microcode, described in this document are furnished under a license, and may be used or copied only in accordance with the terms of such license. McDATA either owns or has the right to license the computer software programs described in this document. In addition, McDATA Corporation retains all rights, title and interest in the computer software programs.

ii McDATA Sphereon 4400 Fabric Switch Installation and Service Manual

Figures

1-5

1-6

1-7

1-8

1-1

1-2

1-3

1-4

Sphereon 4400 Fabric Switch (Front View) ............................................... 1-3

Sphereon 4400 Fabric Switch (Rear View) ................................................ 1-3

Management Server ................................................................................... 1-10

24-Port Ethernet Hub ................................................................................. 1-12

Door Key ...................................................................................................... 1-14

Loopback Plug ............................................................................................ 1-14

Fiber-Optic Protective Plug ....................................................................... 1-15

Null Modem Cable ..................................................................................... 1-15

2-5

2-6

2-7

2-8

2-1

2-2

2-3

2-4

Patch Cable and MDI Selector Configuration .......................................... 2-7

Mounting Bracket Installation (Ethernet Hub) ........................................ 2-8

Hardware View .......................................................................................... 2-13

Identification View ..................................................................................... 2-14

Date Time View .......................................................................................... 2-15

Parameters View ......................................................................................... 2-16

Fabric Parameters View ............................................................................. 2-18

Network View ............................................................................................. 2-20

2-9 Basic Information View ............................................................................. 2-21

2-10 SNMP View ................................................................................................. 2-23

2-11 SSH Configuration ..................................................................................... 2-24

2-12 OSMS View .................................................................................................. 2-25

2-13 SSL View ...................................................................................................... 2-26

2-14 Maintenance Feature Installation View .................................................. 2-28

2-15

2-16

Connection Description Dialog Box ........................................................ 2-33

1U Management Server Connections ...................................................... 2-36

2-17

2-18

Identification Changes Dialog Box .......................................................... 2-42

Internet Protocol (TCP/IP) Properties Dialog Box ................................ 2-43

2-19 Add New User Wizard .............................................................................. 2-45

2-20 Properties Dialog Box (General Tab) ....................................................... 2-46

Figures iii

Figures

2-21

2-22

Date/Time Properties Dialog Box (Time Zone Tab) .............................. 2-47

Date/Time Properties Dialog Box (Date & Time Tab) .......................... 2-48

2-23 Add User Dialog Box .................................................................................. 2-50

2-24 Address Properties Dialog Box (IP Address Page) ................................ 2-51

2-25 Hardware View ........................................................................................... 2-54

2-26 New Feature Key Dialog Box .................................................................... 2-56

2-27 Configure Date and Time Dialog Box ...................................................... 2-58

2-28 Identification View ...................................................................................... 2-60

2-29 Configure Switch Parameters Dialog Box ............................................... 2-61

2-30 Configure Fabric Parameters Dialog Box ................................................ 2-63

2-31 Configure Ports Dialog Box ....................................................................... 2-65

2-32 Configure SNMP Dialog Box .................................................................... 2-67

2-33

2-34

New Threshold Alert Dialog Box ............................................................. 2-68

Email Event Notification Setup Dialog Box ............................................ 2-71

2-35 InCD Icon (Unformatted CD) .................................................................... 2-75

2-36 McDATA Filecenter Home Page .............................................................. 2-81

3-1 Daisy-Chained Ethernet Hubs .................................................................. 3-18

4-5

4-6

4-7

4-8

4-1

4-2

4-3

4-4

Clean Fiber-Optic Components .................................................................. 4-6

McDATA Filecenter Home Page ................................................................ 4-7

Port List View .............................................................................................. 4-14

Diagnostics View ......................................................................................... 4-18

System Files View ....................................................................................... 4-21

Switch View ................................................................................................. 4-22

Basic Information View .............................................................................. 4-23

Firmware Upgrade View ........................................................................... 4-24

4-9

4-10

Backup Configuration View ...................................................................... 4-26

Restore Configuration View ...................................................................... 4-27

4-11 Port List View .............................................................................................. 4-35

4-12 Port Properties Dialog Box ........................................................................ 4-39

4-13

4-14

4-15

4-16

Port Technology Dialog Box ...................................................................... 4-40

Port Diagnostics Dialog Box ...................................................................... 4-42

Swap Ports Dialog Box ............................................................................... 4-44

Save Data Collection Dialog Box .............................................................. 4-45

4-17

4-18

4-19

4-20

Set Online State Dialog Box ....................................................................... 4-47

Firmware Library Dialog Box .................................................................... 4-48

Backup and Restore Configuration Dialog Box ...................................... 4-51

Reset Configuration Dialog Box ................................................................ 4-53

4-21 Discover Setup Dialog Box ........................................................................ 4-54

4-22 Address Properties Dialog Box ................................................................. 4-54

4-23 InstallShield Wizard Dialog Box ............................................................... 4-56

iv McDATA Sphereon 4400 Fabric Switch Installation and Service Manual

Figures

5-1

5-2

6-1

6-2

6-3

6-4

SFP Optical Transceiver Removal and Replacement .............................. 5-4

Redundant Power Supply Removal and Replacement ........................... 5-8

Front-Accessible FRUs ................................................................................. 6-2

Rear-Accessible FRUs .................................................................................. 6-3

Miscellaneous Parts ...................................................................................... 6-4

Power Cords and Receptacles .................................................................... 6-5

B-1 InstallShield Wizard Dialog Box ................................................................ B-4

Figures v

Figures vi McDATA Sphereon 4400 Fabric Switch Installation and Service Manual

Tables

2-1

2-2

2-3

2-4

4-1

4-2

4-3

4-4

4-5

4-6

Factory-Set Defaults (Product) ................................................................... 2-1

Factory-Set Defaults (Management Server) .............................................. 2-2

Installation Task Summary ......................................................................... 2-2

Operational States and Symbols ............................................................... 2-53

3-5

3-6

3-7

3-8

3-1

3-2

3-3

3-4

Factory-Set Defaults ..................................................................................... 3-1

MAP Summary ............................................................................................. 3-2

Event Codes versus Maintenance Action ................................................. 3-2

MAP 100 Event Codes ............................................................................... 3-11

MAP 200 Event Codes ............................................................................... 3-13

MAP 200 Byte 0 FRU Codes ...................................................................... 3-13

MAP 300 Error Messages .......................................................................... 3-17

MAP 400 Event Codes ............................................................................... 3-25

3-9 MAP 500 Event Codes ............................................................................... 3-27

3-10 Link Incident Messages ............................................................................. 3-27

3-11

3-12

Invalid Attachment Reasons and Actions ............................................... 3-29

Inactive Port Reasons and Actions ........................................................... 3-34

3-13 MAP 600 Event Codes ............................................................................... 3-39

3-14 E_Port Segmentation Reasons and Actions ............................................ 3-41

3-15 Port Fence Codes and Actions .................................................................. 3-46

3-16 Fabric Merge Failure Reasons and Actions ............................................ 3-50

Port Operational States ................................................................................ 4-8

Port List Table ............................................................................................. 4-14

Inspect Port Properties Table .................................................................... 4-15

POM Data Table ......................................................................................... 4-16

Inspect Port Transceiver Technology Table ............................................ 4-16

Performance View Table ........................................................................... 4-17

Tables vii

Tables

4-7

4-8

4-9

5-1

6-1

6-2

6-3

6-4

Statistical Information in Performance View .......................................... 4-36

Port Properties Table .................................................................................. 4-37

Port Technology Table ................................................................................ 4-40

Concurrent FRUs ........................................................................................... 5-2

Front-Accessible FRU Parts List .................................................................. 6-2

Rear-Accessible FRU Parts List ................................................................... 6-3

Miscellaneous Parts List ............................................................................... 6-4

Power Cord and Receptacle List ................................................................. 6-6

viii McDATA Sphereon 4400 Fabric Switch Installation and Service Manual

Contents

Preface

.............................................................................................................................xv

Chapter 1

Chapter 2

General Information

Switch Description............................................................................1-1

Field-Replaceable Units ............................................................1-2

SFP Transceiver..........................................................................1-3

Power Supply Assembly ..........................................................1-4

Controls, Connectors, and Indicators ............................................1-5

RESET Button .............................................................................1-5

Ethernet LAN Connector..........................................................1-5

Power and System Error LEDs ................................................1-6

FRU Status LEDs........................................................................1-6

Maintenance Port.......................................................................1-6

Chassis Ground Connector ......................................................1-6

Switch Specifications ........................................................................1-6

Maintenance Approach....................................................................1-8

Switch Management .........................................................................1-9

Management Server ..................................................................1-9

Management Server Specifications .......................................1-10

Ethernet Hub (Optional).........................................................1-11

Error-Detection, Reporting, and Serviceability Features ..........1-12

Tools and Test Equipment.............................................................1-14

Tools Supplied with the Product...........................................1-14

Tools Supplied by Service Personnel....................................1-15

Installation Tasks

Factory Defaults ................................................................................2-1

Installation Task Summary..............................................................2-2

Contents ix

Contents x

Task 1: Verify Installation Requirements ......................................2-4

Task 2: Unpack, Inspect, and Install the Ethernet Hub (Optional)

2-5

Unpack and Inspect Ethernet Hub .........................................2-5

Desktop Installation ..................................................................2-6

Rack-Mount Installation ...........................................................2-7

Task 3: Unpack, Inspect, and Install the Product.........................2-9

Unpack and Inspect Switch......................................................2-9

Desktop Installation ..................................................................2-9

Rack-Mount Installation .........................................................2-11

Task 4: Configure Product at the EFCM Basic Edition Interface

(Optional).........................................................................................2-12

Configure Product Identification ..........................................2-14

Configure Date and Time.......................................................2-15

Configure Parameters .............................................................2-16

Configure Fabric Parameters .................................................2-17

Configure Network Information...........................................2-19

Configure Basic Port Information .........................................2-21

Configure Port BB_Credit ......................................................2-22

Configure Port NPIV...............................................................2-22

Configure SNMP .....................................................................2-23

Enable CLI ................................................................................2-24

Enable or Disable the CLI for SSH ........................................2-24

Enable or Disable Host Control.............................................2-25

Configure SSL Encryption......................................................2-25

Installing PFE Keys (Optional) ..............................................2-27

Configure Security...................................................................2-29

Configure Interswitch Links ..................................................2-30

Task 5: Configure Product Network Information (Optional) ..2-32

Task 6: Unpack, Inspect, and Install the Management Server .2-35

Task 7: Configure Server Password and Network Addresses .2-38

Configure Password................................................................2-38

Configure Private LAN Addresses .......................................2-39

Configure Public LAN Addresses (Optional) .....................2-39

Task 8: Configure Management Server Information.................2-40

Access the Management Server Desktop.............................2-40

Configure Management Server Names................................2-41

Configure Gateway and DNS Server Addresses ................2-42

Task 9: Configure Windows Operating System Users..............2-44

Change Default Administrator Password ...........................2-44

Add a New User ......................................................................2-44

Change User Properties..........................................................2-45

Task 10: Set Management Server Date and Time.......................2-46

McDATA Sphereon 4400 Fabric Switch Installation and Service Manual

Contents

Chapter 3

Chapter 4

Task 11: Configure the Call-Home Feature (Optional)............. 2-48

Task 12: Assign User Names and Passwords ............................ 2-49

Task 13: Configure the Product to the Management Application ..

2-51

Task 14: Record or Verify Server Restore Information ............. 2-52

Task 15: Verify Product-to-Server Communication.................. 2-53

Task 16: Configure PFE Key (Optional)...................................... 2-55

Task 17: Configure Management Server (Optional) ................. 2-56

Task 18: Set Product Date and Time............................................ 2-57

Task 19: Configure the Element Manager Application ............ 2-59

Configure Product Identification.......................................... 2-59

Configure Product Parameters ............................................. 2-61

Configure Fabric Parameters................................................. 2-62

Configure Ports ....................................................................... 2-64

Configure SNMP..................................................................... 2-66

Configure Threshold Alerts................................................... 2-68

Enable EFCM Basic Edition and Telnet Access .................. 2-70

Configure, Enable, and Test E-mail Notification ............... 2-70

Configure and Enable Ethernet Events................................ 2-72

Configure, Enable, and Test Call-Home Event Notification ....

2-72

Configure Security .................................................................. 2-73

Configure Interswitch Links.................................................. 2-74

Task 20: Back Up Configuration Data......................................... 2-75

Task 21: Cable Fibre Channel Ports ............................................. 2-77

Task 22: Configure Zoning (Optional) ........................................ 2-78

Task 23: Connect Product to a Fabric Element (Optional) ....... 2-79

Task 24: Register with the McDATA Filecenter......................... 2-80

Maintenance Analysis Procedures

Factory Defaults ............................................................................... 3-1

Quick Start......................................................................................... 3-2

MAP 0000: Start MAP...................................................................... 3-5

MAP 0100: Power Distribution Analysis.................................... 3-10

MAP 0200: POST Failure Analysis .............................................. 3-13

MAP 0300: Loss of Server Communication................................ 3-14

MAP 0400: FRU Failure Analysis ................................................ 3-24

MAP 0500: Port Failure or Link Incident Analysis ................... 3-26

MAP 0600: Fabric or ISL Problem Analysis ............................... 3-38

Repair Information

Contents xi

Contents

Chapter 5

Chapter 6

Procedural Notes ..............................................................................4-2

Power On Switch ..............................................................................4-2

Power Off Switch..............................................................................4-3

IML or Reset Switch .........................................................................4-3

IML ..............................................................................................4-4

Reset ............................................................................................4-4

Clean Fiber-Optic Components ......................................................4-5

Download Firmware or Software from the Filecenter ................4-6

Port LED Diagnostics .......................................................................4-8

Repair Procedures - EFCM Basic Edition....................................4-10

Obtaining Log Information ....................................................4-10

Performing Port Diagnostics..................................................4-13

Collecting Maintenance Data.................................................4-20

Setting Online State .................................................................4-21

Blocking or Unblocking a Port ..............................................4-22

Upgrading Firmware ..............................................................4-23

Managing Configuration Data ..............................................4-25

Repair Procedures - SAN Management Application ................4-28

Obtaining Fabric Log Information ........................................4-29

Obtaining Switch Log Information .......................................4-30

Performing Port Diagnostics..................................................4-35

Collecting Maintenance Data.................................................4-45

Setting Online State .................................................................4-46

Blocking or Unblocking a Port ..............................................4-47

Upgrading Firmware ..............................................................4-48

Managing Configuration Data ..............................................4-51

Installing or Upgrading Software .........................................4-55

Removal and Replacement Procedures

Procedural Notes ..............................................................................5-1

ESD Procedures.................................................................................5-2

Field-Replaceable Units ...................................................................5-2

RRP 1: SFP Optical Transceiver ......................................................5-3

RRP 2: Redundant Power Supply ..................................................5-7

Illustrated Parts Breakdown

RoHS Information.............................................................................6-1

Front-Accessible FRUs .....................................................................6-2

Rear-Accessible FRUs.......................................................................6-3

Miscellaneous Parts ..........................................................................6-4

Power Cords and Receptacles.........................................................6-5

xii McDATA Sphereon 4400 Fabric Switch Installation and Service Manual

Contents

Power Cords (Japan, Denan)................................................... 6-8

Appendix A Event Code Tables

System Events (000 through 199) ................................................. A-2

Power Supply Events (200 through 299) ................................... A-24

Fan Events (300 through 399) ..................................................... A-28

CTP Card Events (400 through 499) .......................................... A-35

Port Events (500 through 599) .................................................... A-39

Appendix B Restore Management Server

Requirements ...................................................................................B-1

Restore Management Server Procedure ......................................B-2

Index

...............................................................................................................................I-1

Contents xiii

Contents xiv McDATA Sphereon 4400 Fabric Switch Installation and Service Manual

Preface

Who Should Use this

Manual

Organization of this

Manual

This publication is part of a documentation suite that supports the

McDATA ® Sphereon 4400 Fabric Switch.

Use this publication if you are a trained installation and service representative experienced with the product, storage area network

(SAN) technology, and Fibre Channel technology.

The product contains no customer-serviceable parts that require internal access to the product during normal operation or prescribed maintenance conditions. In addition, refer to this manual for instructions prior to performing any maintenance action.

This publication includes six chapters and two appendices organized as follows:

Chapter 1 , General Information - This chapter describes the switch,

including field-replaceable units (FRUs), controls, connectors, and indicators, and switch specifications. The chapter also describes the maintenance approach, error detection and reporting features, serviceability features, software diagnostic features, and tools and test equipment.

Chapter 2 , Installation Tasks - This chapter describes tasks to

install, configure, and verify operation of the switch, optional

Ethernet hub, and rack-mount management server.

Chapter 3 , Maintenance Analysis Procedures - This chapter

describes maintenance analysis procedures (MAPs) to fault isolate a switch problem to an individual FRU.

Preface xv

Preface

Related Publications

Chapter 4 , Repair Information - This chapter describes

supplementary diagnostic and repair procedures for a failed switch. The chapter includes procedures to display and use log information, perform port diagnostics, manage configuration data, collect maintenance data, power-on, power-off, and reset the switch, set the switch online or offline, block ports, manage switch firmware, clean fiber optics, and install or upgrade management server software.

Chapter 5 , Removal and Replacement Procedures - This chapter

describes procedures to remove and replace switch FRUs.

Chapter 6 , Illustrated Parts Breakdown - This chapter illustrates,

describes, and shows the location of switch FRUs. In addition, switch FRUs are cross-referenced to corresponding part numbers.

Appendix A , Event Code Tables - This appendix provides an

explanation of event codes that appear at the EFCM Basic Edition interface or Element Manager application. The event severity and a recommended course of action in response to each event are also provided.

Appendix B , Restore Management Server

- This appendix provides the instructions to restore all required switch applications to the management server in case of a hard drive failure.

An

Index is also provided.

Other publications that provide additional information about the switch include:

• McDATA Products in a SAN Environment - Planning Manual

(620-000124).

• McDATA Sphereon 4400 Fabric Switch Element Manager User

Manual (620-000241).

• McDATA Product Safety Notices (620-000247).

• EFC Manager Software Release 8.7 User Manual (620-000170).

• McDATA EFCM Basic Edition User Manual (620-000240).

• McDATA SNMP Support Manual (620-000131).

• McDATA E/OS Command Line Interface User Manual (620-000134).

xvi McDATA Sphereon 4400 Fabric Switch Installation and Service Manual

Preface

Ordering Printed

Manuals

Where to Get Help

• McDATA EFCM Lite Installation Instructions (958-000171).

• 1U Server Rack-Mount Kit Installation Instructions (958-000310).

• McDATA FC-512 Fabricenter Equipment Cabinet Installation and

Service Manual (620-000100).

To order a copy of this publication, submit a purchase order as described in Ordering McDATA Documentation Instructions at http://www.mcdata.com

or contact your McDATA sales representative.

For technical support, McDATA end-user customers should call the phone number located on the service label attached to the front or rear of the hardware product.

McDATA’s “Best in Class” Technical Support Center and Network

Operations Center (NOC) provide single points of contact for customers seeking help. These centers will research, explore, and resolve inquiries or service requests regarding McDATA products and services. The centers are staffed 24 hours a day, 7 days a week, including holidays.

To expedite warranty entitlement, please have your product serial number available.

McDATA Corporation

11802 Ridge Parkway

Broomfield, CO 80021

For SAN Router issues, contact the Network Operations Center

(NOC) at:

(800) 752-8061 or (763) 268-6600.

For all other products, contact the Technical Support Center at:

(800) 752-4572 or (720) 558-3910.

E-mail: [email protected]

Forwarding

Publication

Comments

Please send comments to the McDATA technical support center by telephone, or e-mail. The numbers and e-mail address are listed above. Please identify the page numbers and details.

Preface xvii

Preface

Trademarks

Laser Compliance

Statement

Federal

Communications

Commission (FCC)

Statement

The following terms, indicated by a registered trademark symbol

(®) or trademark symbol (™) on first use in this publication, are trademarks of McDATA Corporation in the United States or other countries or both:

Registered Trademarks

Fabricenter ®

HotCAT ®

McDATA ®

Multi-Capable Storage

Network Solutions ®

Trademarks

EON™

OPENconnectors™

Sphereon™

Networking the World’s

Business Data ®

OPENready ®

SANtegrity ®

All other trademarked terms, indicated by a registered trademark symbol (®) or trademark symbol (™) on first use in this publication, are trademarks of their respective owners in the United States or other countries or both.

Product laser transceivers are tested and certified in the United States to conform to Title 21 of the Code of Federal Regulations (CFR),

Subchapter J, Parts 1040.10 and 1040.11 for Class 1 laser products.

Transceivers are tested and certified to be compliant with

International Electrotechnical Commission IEC825-1 and European

Norm EN60825-1 and EN60825-2 regulations for Class 1 laser products. Class 1 laser products are not considered hazardous. The transceivers are designed to prevent human access to laser radiation above a Class 1 level during normal operation or prescribed maintenance conditions.

Products generate, use, and can radiate radio frequency energy, and if not installed and used in accordance with instructions provided, may cause interference to radio communications. Products are tested and found to comply with the limits for Class A and Class B computing devices pursuant to Subpart B of Part 15 of the FCC Rules, which are designed to provide reasonable protection against such interference in a residential environment. Any modification or change made to a product without explicit approval from McDATA, by means of a written endorsement or through published literature, xviii McDATA Sphereon 4400 Fabric Switch Installation and Service Manual

Preface

Canadian EMC

Statements invalidates the service contract and voids the warranty agreement with McDATA.

The statements below indicate product compliance with Interference

Causing Equipment Standard (ICES) and Norme sur le Matériel

Brouiller (NMB) electromagnetic compatibility (EMC) requirements as set forth in ICES/NMB-003, Issue 4.

• This Class A or Class B digital apparatus complies with

Canadian ICES-003.

• Cet appareil numérique de la classe A et classe B est conforme à la norme NMB-003 du Canada.

Preface xix

Preface

United States and

Canada UL

Certification

The C-UL-US mark on a product indicates compliance with

American National Standards Institute (ANSI) and Standards

Council of Canada (SCC) safety requirements as tested, evaluated, and certified by Underwriters Laboratories Inc. (UL) and

Underwriters Laboratories of Canada (ULC).

International Safety

Conformity

Declaration (CB

Scheme)

A certification bodies (CB) test report supporting a product indicates safety compliance with the International Electrotechnical

Commission (IEC) system for conformity testing and certification of electrical equipment (IECEE) CB scheme. The scheme is a multilateral agreement among participating countries and certification organizations that accepts test reports certifying the safety of electrical and electronic products.

European Union

Conformity

Declarations and

Directives (CE Mark)

The CE mark on a product indicates compliance with the following regulatory requirements as set forth by European Norms (ENs) and relevant international standards for commercial and light industrial information technology equipment (ITE):

• EN55022: 1998 - ITE-generic radio frequency interference (RFI) emission standard for domestic, commercial, and light industrial environments, including electrical business equipment.

• EN55024-1: 1998 - ITE-generic electromagnetic immunity standard for domestic, commercial, and light industrial environments, including electrical business equipment.

• EN60950/A11:1997 - ITE-generic electrical and fire safety standard for domestic, commercial, and light industrial environments, including electrical business equipment.

• EN61000-3-2:1995 - ITE-generic harmonic current emissions standard for domestic, commercial, and light industrial environments (equipment with rated current less than or equal to 16 amperes per phase).

• EN61000-3-3:1995 - ITE-generic voltage fluctuation and flicker standard (low-voltage power supply systems) for domestic, commercial, and light industrial environments (equipment with rated current less than or equal to 16 amperes per phase).

xx McDATA Sphereon 4400 Fabric Switch Installation and Service Manual

Preface

European Union EMC and Safety

Declaration (N-Mark)

In addition, the European Union (EU) Council has implemented a series of directives that define product safety standards for member countries. The following directives apply:

• Products conform with all protection requirements of EU directive 89/336/EEC (Electromagnetic Compatibility Directive) in accordance with the laws of the member countries relating to

EMC emissions and immunity.

• Products conform with all protection requirements of EU directive 73/23/EEC (Low-Voltage Directive) in accordance with the laws of the member countries relating to electrical safety.

• Products conform with all protection requirements of EU directive 93/68/EEC (Machinery Directive) in accordance with the laws of the member countries relating to safe electrical and mechanical operation of the equipment.

McDATA does not accept responsibility for any failure to satisfy the protection requirements of any of these directives resulting from a non-recommended or non-authorized modification to a product.

The N-mark on a product indicates compliance with European Union

EMC and safety requirements as tested, evaluated, and certified by the Norwegian Board for Testing and Approval of Electrical

Equipment (Norges Elektriske Materiellkontroll or NEMKO) laboratory or a NEMKO-authorized laboratory.

Argentina UL

Certification

The UL Argentina plus S mark (UL-AR-S mark) on a product indicates compliance with Direccion Nacional de Comercio Interior

(DNCI) Resolution Number 92/98, Phase III (for information technology equipment safety). The mark is certified by UL de

Argentina, S.R.L., and accredited by the Argentine Accreditation

Organization (OAA).

Australia and New

Zealand C-Tick Mark

The Australia and New Zealand regulatory compliance mark

(C-tick mark) on a product indicates compliance with regulatory requirements for EMC (for information technology equipment) as set forth by the Australian Communications Authority (ACA) and the

Radio Spectrum Management Group (RSM) of New Zealand.

Preface xxi

Preface

People’s Republic of

China CCC Mark

The China Compulsory Certification mark (CCC mark) on a product indicates compliance with People’s Republic of China regulatory requirements for safety and EMC (for information technology equipment) as set forth by the National Regulatory Commission for

Certification and Accreditation.

Chinese National

Standards Statement

The Taiwanese Bureau of Standards, Metrology, and Inspection mark

(BSMI mark) and the Chinese National Standards (CNS) statement below indicate product compliance with Taiwanese regulatory requirements. The statement indicates in a domestic environment the product may cause radio interference, in which case the user is required to take corrective actions.

German GS Mark The Geprüfte Sicherheit mark (GS mark) on a product indicates compliance with the German Safety of Equipment Act as tested by

Underwriters Laboratories International Demko A/S, and accredited by the Central Office of Safety of the German Länder (Zentralstelle der Länder für Sicherheitstechnik or ZLS).

Japanese VCCI

Statement

The Voluntary Control Council for Interference (VCCI) statement below applies to information technology equipment, and indicates product compliance with Japanese regulatory requirements. The statement indicates a product is a Class A or Class B product, and in a domestic environment may cause radio interference, in which case the user is required to take corrective actions.

xxii McDATA Sphereon 4400 Fabric Switch Installation and Service Manual

Korean MIC Mark The Korean Ministry of Information and Communications mark

(MIC mark) on a product indicates compliance with regulatory requirements for safety and EMC (for information technology equipment) as authorized and certified by the Korean Radio

Research Institute (RRI).

Mexican NOM Mark

NOM

The Official Mexican Standard (Normas Oficiales Mexicanas or

NOM) mark on a product indicates compliance with regulatory requirements for safety (for information technology equipment) as authorized and accredited by the National System of Accreditation of

Testing Laboratories (Sistema Nacional de Acreditamieno de

Laboratorios de Pruebas or SINALP).

Preface

Russian GOST

Certification

The Russian Gosudarstvennyi Standart (GOST) mark on a product indicates compliance with regulatory requirements for safety and

EMC (for information technology equipment) as authorized and accredited by the State Committee for Standardization, Metrology and Certification.

South African SABS

Certification

The South African Bureau of Standards (SABS) mark on a product indicates compliance with regulatory requirements for safety and

EMC (for information technology equipment) as authorized and accredited by the Independent Communications Authority of South

Africa (ICASA).

European Union Waste

Managment

Information

Do not discard a product. European Union Directive 2002/96/EC requires a product to be recycled at the end of its useful life. Follow all waste management actions defined by this directive. Directive requirements may be superseded by EU member nation law. Perform the following to identify pertinent information:

1. Review the original purchase contract to determine a contact regarding waste management of a product, or

2. Contact the company from which a product was procured.

Preface xxiii

Preface

Danger and Attention

Statements

The following DANGER statements appear in this publication and describe safety practices that must be observed while installing or servicing the product. A DANGER statement provides essential information or instructions for which disregard or noncompliance may result in death or severe personal injury.

DANGER statements have a numerical ID (displayed in parentheses) at the end of each statement. Use the numerical ID to locate translated statements in the McDATA Product Safety Notices (620-000247) manual delivered with the product.

DANGER

Use the supplied power cords. Ensure the facility power receptacle is the correct type, supplies the required voltage, and is properly grounded. (D004)

DANGER

Disconnect the power cords. (D005)

The following ATTENTION statements appear in this publication and describe practices that must be observed while installing or servicing a product. An ATTENTION statement provides essential information or instructions for which disregard or noncompliance may result in equipment damage or loss of data.

ATTENTION ! Prior to servicing a product, management server, or customer-supplied server, determine the Ethernet LAN configuration.

Installation of products and servers on a public customer intranet can complicate problem determination and fault isolation.

ATTENTION ! Activating a preferred path can result in receipt of out-of- order frames if the preferred path differs from the current path, if input and output (I/O) is active from the source port, and if congestions is present on the current path.

ATTENTION ! Do not remove a power supply unless a replacement FRU is immediately available. To avoid product overheating, a removed power supply must be replaced within five minutes.

xxiv McDATA Sphereon 4400 Fabric Switch Installation and Service Manual

Preface

ATTENTION ! A reset should only be performed if a CTP card failure is indicated. Do not reset a managed product unless directed to do so by a procedural step or the next level of support.

ATTENTION ! This procedure deletes all data from the C: hard drive partition.

ATTENTION ! Contents of the data directory are backed up to the management server’s CD-RW drive when directory contents change. To ensure trouble-free backups, always leave a CD in the drive. Ensure data is not being written to or read from the CD-RW drive before removing the

CD. Removing the CD during a backup or restore operation can corrupt data.

General Precautions

ESD Precautions

When installing or servicing the product, follow these practices:

• Always use correct tools.

• Always use correct replacement parts.

• Keep all paperwork up to date, complete, and accurate.

Follow these electrostatic discharge (ESD) procedures:

• If the product is connected to facility power (grounded), wear an

ESD wrist strap and grounding cable connected to the product chassis.

• If the product is not connected to facility power (not grounded), wear an ESD wrist strap and grounding cable connected to an approved bench grounding point.

• Touch the product chassis once before performing a procedure, and once each minute during the procedure.

• Store ESD-sensitive FRUs in antistatic packaging.

Preface xxv

Preface xxvi McDATA Sphereon 4400 Fabric Switch Installation and Service Manual

1

General Information

The McDATA ® Sphereon™ 4400 Fabric Switch provides 16 ports of low-cost and high-performance dynamic Fibre Channel connectivity for switched fabric or arbitrated loop devices. This function allows low-cost, low-bandwidth workgroup (edge) devices to communicate with mainframe servers, mass storage devices, or other peripherals, and ultimately be incorporated into an enterprise storage area network (SAN) environment. This chapter describes:

• The switch, including field-replaceable units (FRUs), controls, connectors, indicators, and specifications.

• Maintenance approach.

• Switch management.

• Error detection, reporting, and serviceability features.

• Tools and test equipment.

Switch Description

The switch provides Fibre Channel connectivity through generic mixed ports (GX_Ports). Ports operate at 1.0625, 2.1250, or 4.2500 gigabits per second (Gbps), and can be configured as:

• Fabric ports (F_Ports) to provide direct connectivity for switched fabric devices.

Switch Description 1-1

1

General Information

Field-Replaceable

Units

• Expansion ports (E_Ports) to provide interswitch link (ISL) connectivity to fabric directors and switches.

• Fabric loop ports (FL_Ports) to provide connectivity and fabric attachment for Fibre Channel arbitrated loop (FC-AL) devices.

The switch is installed on a table or desktop, mounted in an FC-512

Fabricenter ® equipment cabinet, or mounted in any standard 19-inch equipment rack.

Operators with a browser-capable PC and Internet connectivity can manage the switch through a firmware-resident Enterprise Fabric

Connectivity Manager (EFCM) Basic Edition interface. The interface manages only a single switch, and provides a graphical user interface

(GUI) that supports configuration, statistics monitoring, operation, and maintenance. The interface is opened from a web browser running Netscape Navigator ® 4.6 (or higher) or Microsoft ® Internet

Explorer 4.0 (or higher).

As an option, the switch is managed through a one-unit (1U) high, rack-mount management server running a Java™-based SAN management application ( EFCM 8.7 or later) and the switch Element

Manager application.

Multiple switches and the 1U server communicate on a local area network (LAN) through one or more 10/100 Base-T Ethernet hubs.

The 24-port Ethernet hubs are optional and ordered with the switch.

Up to three hubs are daisy-chained as required to provide additional

Ethernet connections as more switches (or other managed products) are installed on a network.

The switch provides a modular design that enables quick removal and replacement of FRUs, including small form factor pluggable

(SFP) optical transceivers and power supply assemblies. Figure 1-1

illustrates the front of the switch and shows the:

1. RESET button.

2. Ethernet LAN connector.

3. Green power (PWR) light-emitting diode (LED).

4. Amber system error (ERR) LED.

5. SFP optical transceivers (16).

6. Chassis ground (GND) connector.

1-2 McDATA Sphereon 4400 Fabric Switch Installation and Service Manual

General Information

1

Figure 1-1 Sphereon 4400 Fabric Switch (Front View)

Figure 1-2 illustrates the rear of the switch and shows the:

1. RS-232 maintenance port.

2. External power supply connectors (2).

Figure 1-2 Sphereon 4400 Fabric Switch (Rear View)

SFP Transceiver

Multimode fiber-optic cables attach to switch ports through SFP transceivers with duplex LC ® connectors, and can be detached from switch ports (through a 10-pin interface) for easy replacement.

Tri-rate (1.0625, 2.1250, or 4.2500 Gbps) shortwave laser transceivers

(850 nm) provide connectivity:

Switch Description 1-3

1

General Information

Power Supply

Assembly

• At 500 meters (1.0625 Gbps) through 50-micron multimode fiber-optic cable.

• At 300 meters (2.1250 Gbps) through 50-micron multimode fiber-optic cable.

• At 150 meters (4.2500 Gbps) through 50-micron multimode fiber-optic cable.

• At 300 meters (1.0625 Gbps) through 62.5-micron multimode fiber-optic cable.

• At 150 meters (2.1250 Gbps) through 62.5-micron multimode fiber-optic cable.

• At 70 meters (4.2500 Gbps) through 62.5-micron multimode fiber-optic cable.

Tri-rate longwave laser (1.0625, 2.1250, or 4.2500 Gbps) are also available. Longwave laser transceivers provide connectivity at 4 kilometers and 10 kilometers through singlemode fiber-optic cable.

(Additional distances will be available in the future. 2Gb LW optics are currently available for 10, 20, 35 and 80 kilometers.)

The switch also provides a predictive optics monitoring (POM) feature that monitors operation of SFP optical transceivers. Digital diagnostics-enabled optical transceivers report temperature, voltage current, transceiver power, and receiver power to product firmware.

Optical transceivers also provide vendor-specific threshold values for these parameters.

The switch is delivered with one external power supply assembly.

The power supply steps down and rectifies facility input power to provide 12 volts direct current (VDC) to the control processor (CTP) card. The power supply also provides input filtering, overvoltage protection, and overcurrent protection. The power supply is input rated at 100 to 240 volts alternating current (VAC).

A second power supply can be installed as an option. When a second power supply is detected, the switch automatically enables high availability (HA) mode. With HA mode enabled, either power supply can be replaced while the switch is operational. Each power supply has a separate connection to the CTP card to allow for independent

AC power sources.

Three internal cooling fans provide airflow for the CTP card, as well as redundancy for continued operation if a single fan fails.

1-4 McDATA Sphereon 4400 Fabric Switch Installation and Service Manual

General Information

1

Controls, Connectors, and Indicators

Controls, connectors, and indicators for the switch include the:

• RESET button.

• Ethernet LAN connector.

• Green PWR and amber ERR LEDs.

• Green and amber status LEDs associated with FRUs.

• RS-232 maintenance port.

• Chassis ground (GND) connector.

RESET Button

Ethernet LAN

Connector

When the RESET button is pressed, held for three seconds, and released, the switch performs an initial machine load (IML) that reloads the firmware from FLASH memory. This operation is not disruptive to Fibre Channel traffic. When the RESET button is pressed and held for ten seconds, the switch performs a reset. After three seconds, the ERR LED blinks at twice the unit beaconing rate. A reset is disruptive to Fibre Channel traffic and resets the:

• Microprocessor and functional logic for the CTP card and reloads the firmware from FLASH memory.

• Ethernet LAN interface, causing the connection to the management server to drop momentarily until the connection automatically recovers.

• Ports, causing all Fibre Channel connections to drop momentarily until the connections automatically recover. This causes attached devices to log out and log back in, therefore data frames lost during switch reset must be retransmitted.

Perform a reset only if a CTP card failure is indicated. The button is flush mounted to protect against inadvertent activation.

The front panel has a 10/100 megabit per second (Mbps) RJ-45 twisted-pair connector that attaches to an Ethernet LAN to provide communication with a management server or simple network management protocol (SNMP) workstation.

The connector provides two green LEDs. The left LED illuminates to indicate LAN operation at 10 Mbps. The right LED illuminates to indicate operation at 100 Mbps.

Controls, Connectors, and Indicators 1-5

1

General Information

Power and System

Error LEDs

FRU Status LEDs

Maintenance Port

Chassis Ground

Connector

The PWR LED illuminates when the switch is connected to facility

AC power and is operational (the product does not have a power switch). If the LED extinguishes, a facility power source, power cord, or power distribution failure is indicated.

The ERR LED illuminates when the switch detects an event requiring operator attention, such as a FRU failure. The LED illuminates as long as an event is active. The LED extinguishes when Clear System

Error Light is selected from the EFCM Basic Edition interface or

Element Manager application. The ERR LED also blinks if unit beaconing is enabled. An illuminated LED (indicating a failure) takes precedence over unit beaconing.

Amber and green LEDs associated with switch FRUs provide status information as follows:

• Fibre Channel ports - LEDs above or below each port illuminate, extinguish, or blink to indicate port status and speed. The amber

LED illuminates if the port fails. The green LED illuminates to indicate 1.0625, 2.1250, or 4.2500 Gbps port operation.

• Power supply assembly - A green LED on each external assembly illuminates when the FRU is operational.

The rear panel has a 9-pin DSUB maintenance port that provides a connection for a local terminal or dial-in connection for a remote terminal. The port is typically used only by maintenance personnel, however operators can use the port to configure network addresses.

The front panel has a chassis ground connector for an electrostatic discharge (ESD) wrist strap and grounding cable. Plug the grounding cable into the connector when performing a maintenance action with the switch connected to facility power (grounded).

Switch Specifications

This section lists physical characteristics, storage and shipping environment, operating environment, and service clearances.

1-6 McDATA Sphereon 4400 Fabric Switch Installation and Service Manual

General Information

1

Physical

Characteristics

Storage and Shipping

Environment

Dimensions:

Height: 4.1 centimeters (1.6 inches) or 1 rack unit

Width: 19.9 centimeters (7.8 inches)

Depth: 33.3 centimeters (13.1 inches), plus 6.1 centimeters

(2.4 inches) for external power supplies

Weight: 4.0 kilograms (8.8 pounds)

Power requirements:

Input voltage: 100 to 240 VAC

Input current: 3.5 amps at 208 VAC

Input frequency: 50 to 60 Hz

Heat dissipation:

42 watts (143 BTUs/hr)

Cooling airflow clearances (switch chassis):

Right and left side: 1.3 centimeters (0.5 inches)

Front and rear: 7.6 centimeters (3.0 inches)

Top and bottom: No clearance required

Shock and vibration tolerance:

60 Gs for 10 milliseconds without nonrecoverable errors

Acoustical noise:

70 dB “A” scale

Inclination:

10 0 maximum

Protective packaging must be provided to protect the switch under all shipping methods (domestic and international).

Shipping temperature:

-40 0 F to 140 0 F (-40 0 C to 60 0 C)

Storage temperature:

34 0 F to 140 0 F (1 0 C to 60 0 C)

Switch Specifications 1-7

1

General Information

Operating

Environment

Shipping relative humidity:

5% to 100%

Storage relative humidity:

5% to 80%

Maximum wet-bulb temperature:

84 0 F (29 0 C)

Altitude:

40,000 feet (12,192 meters)

Temperature:

40 0 F to 104 0 F (4 0 C to 40 0 C)

Relative humidity:

8% to 80%

Maximum wet-bulb temperature:

81 0 F (27 0 C)

Altitude:

10,000 feet (3,048 meters)

Maintenance Approach

The maintenance approach instructs service personnel to perform fault isolation and repair procedures without degrading or interrupting product operation or associated applications. Fault isolation begins when one or more of the following occur:

• Event information displays at a browser-capable PC communicating with the product through the EFCM Basic

Edition interface.

• Event information displays at a LAN-connected PC or workstation communicating with the rack-mount management server running a SAN management application.

• LEDs on the product front panel or FRUs illuminate to indicate a hardware malfunction.

1-8 McDATA Sphereon 4400 Fabric Switch Installation and Service Manual

General Information

1

• An unsolicited SNMP trap message is received at a management workstation, indicating an operational state change or failure.

• Event notification is received at a designated support center through an e-mail message or the call-home feature.

Fault isolation and repair information is provided through maintenance analysis procedures (MAPs). MAPs are step-by-step procedures that provide information to interpret events, isolate a failure to a FRU, remove and replace the FRU, and verify product

operation. Fault isolation begins with MAP 0000: Start MAP

.

Switch Management

The switch is managed and controlled through a:

• Customer-supplied PC platform with Internet communication to the product-resident EFCM Basic Edition interface.

The interface allows service personnel to perform configuration tasks, view system alerts and related log information, and monitor switch status, port status, and performance. FRU status and system alert information are highly visible.

• Optional 1U management server (running a SAN management application) that provides a central point of control for up to 48 switches or managed products.

The management server is delivered with server and client SAN management applications and the Element Manager application installed. A customer-supplied PC or workstation (with client applications installed) communicates with the server through a through a corporate intranet.

• Customer-supplied PC or UNIX-based platform with the server and client SAN management and Element Manager applications installed.

Management

Server

The management server is a 1U, rack-mount unit that provides a central point of control for up to 48 connected switches or other managed products. Server applications are accessed through a

LAN-attached PC or workstation with client software installed.

Figure 1-3 illustrates the server with attached liquid crystal display

(LCD) panel.

Switch Management 1-9

1

General Information

Figure 1-3 Management Server

The server is rack mounted in the McDATA-supplied FC-512

Fabricenter equipment cabinet. A SANpilot interface or management server is required to install, configure, and manage the switch.

The server provides two auto-detecting 10/100 Mbps Ethernet LAN connectors (RJ-45 adapters). The first adapter (LAN 1) attaches

(optionally) to a public customer intranet to allow access from remote user workstations. The second adapter (LAN 2) attaches to a private

LAN segment containing switches or managed products.

Management

Server

Specifications

Minimum

Specifications

This section summarizes minimum and recommended hardware specifications for the rack-mount management server. Servers may ship with more enhanced hardware, such as a faster processor, additional random-access memory (RAM), or a higher-capacity hard drive.

Minimum server specifications are:

• 1U rack-mount server running the Intel ® Pentium ® 4 processor with a 2 gigahertz (GHz) or greater clock speed, using the

Microsoft Windows 2000 Professional (with service pack 4),

Windows XP Professional (with service pack 2), or Windows

Server 2003 operating system (Enterprise Edition with service pack 1) operating system.

• TightVNC™ Viewer Version 1.2.7 client-server software control package that provides remote network access (through a web browser) to the management server desktop.

• 1,024 megabyte (MB) RAM.

• 40 gigabyte (GB) internal hard drive.

• 1.44 MB 3.5-inch slim-type disk drive.

1-10 McDATA Sphereon 4400 Fabric Switch Installation and Service Manual

General Information

1

Recommended

Specifications

• 24X read speed slim-type compact disk-rewritable (CD-RW) and 8X read speed digital video disk (DVD) combination drive, data only.

• 56K peripheral component interconnect (PCI) internal data and fax modem, using the V .92 dial-up specification.

• 16 MB graphics card.

• Network interface card (NIC) with two 10/100 Mbps Ethernet adapters using RJ-45 connectors.

Recommended server specifications are:

• 1U rack-mount server running the Intel Pentium 4 processor with a 3 GHz or greater clock speed, using an 800 megahertz (MHz) front side bus, using the Microsoft Windows Server 2003 operating system (Enterprise Edition with service pack 1).

• TightVNC™ Viewer Version 1.2.7 client-server software control package that provides remote network access (through a web browser) to the management server desktop.

• 2,048 MB (or greater) double data-rate synchronous dynamic random access memory (SDRAM).

• 40 GB (or greater) internal hard drive, with advanced technology attachment (ATA-100) integrated drive electronics interface operating at 7,200 rpm.

• 1.44 MB 3.5-inch slim-type disk drive.

• 48X read speed slim-type CD-RW and 32X read speed DVD combination drive, data only.

• 56K PCI internal data and fax modem, using the V .92 dial-up specification.

• Video graphics array (VGA) capable 32 MB graphics card.

• NIC with two 10/100 Mbps Ethernet adapters using RJ-45 connectors.

Ethernet Hub

(Optional)

The management server and managed switches connect through a

10/100 Base-T Ethernet hub. Figure 1-4 illustrates the 24-port hub.

Switch Management 1-11

1

General Information

.

Figure 1-4 24-Port Ethernet Hub

Hubs can be daisy-chained to provide additional connections as more switches (or other McDATA managed products) are installed on a network. Multiple hubs are daisy-chained by attaching RJ-45

Ethernet patch cables and configuring each hub through a medium- dependent interface (MDI) switch.

Error-Detection, Reporting, and Serviceability Features

The switch provides the following error detection, reporting, and serviceability features:

• LEDs on switch FRUs and adjacent to Fibre Channel ports that provide visual indicators of hardware status or malfunctions.

• Redundant FRUs (SFP transceivers and power supply assemblies) that are removed or replaced without disrupting switch or Fibre Channel link operation.

• A modular design that enables quick removal and replacement of

FRUs without the use of tools or equipment.

• System alerts and logs that display switch, Ethernet link, and

Fibre Channel link status at the EFCM Basic Edition interface, client communicating with the management server, or customer- supplied server (running a SAN management application).

• Diagnostic software that performs power-on self-tests (POSTs) and port diagnostics (loopback tests).

1-12 McDATA Sphereon 4400 Fabric Switch Installation and Service Manual

General Information

1

• An RS-232 maintenance port at the rear of the switch (port access is password protected) that enables installation or service personnel to change the switch’s IP address, subnet mask, and gateway address.

These parameters can also be changed through a Telnet session, access for which is provided through a local or remote PC with an

Internet connection to the switch.

• Data collection through the EFCM Basic Edition interface or

Element Manager application to help isolate system problems.

The data includes a memory dump file and audit, hardware, and engineering logs.

• Beaconing to assist service personnel in locating a specific port or switch. When port beaconing is enabled, the amber LED associated with the port flashes. When unit beaconing is enabled, the system error indicator on the front panel flashes. Beaconing does not affect port or switch operation.

• An internal modem for use by support personnel to dial-in to the management server (optional) for event notification and to perform remote diagnostics.

• Automatic notification of significant system events (to support personnel or administrators) through e-mail messages or the call-home feature.

NOTE: The call-home feature is not available through the EFCM Basic

Edition. The call-home feature may not be available if the EFCM Lite application is installed on a customer-supplied platform.

• SNMP management using the Fibre Channel Fabric Element MIB,

Transmission Control Protocol/Internet Protocol (TCP/IP)

MIB-II definition (RFC 1157), or a product-specific private enterprise MIB that runs on the switch. Up to six authorized management workstations can be configured through the EFCM

Basic Edition interface or Element Manager application to receive unsolicited SNMP trap messages. The trap messages indicate product operational state changes and failure conditions.

• Optional SNMP management using the Fibre Alliance MIB that runs on the management server. Up to 12 authorized management workstations can be configured through the SAN

Error-Detection, Reporting, and Serviceability Features 1-13

1

General Information management application to receive unsolicited SNMP trap messages. The trap messages indicate operational state changes and failure conditions.

Tools and Test Equipment

This section describes tools and test equipment that may be required to install, test, service, and verify operation of the product and attached management server. These tools are supplied with the product or must be supplied by service personnel.

Tools Supplied with the Product

The following tools are supplied with the product:

• Door key - A door key with 5/16-inch socket (

Figure 1-5 ) is

required to open front and rear doors of the Fabricenter

Equipment Cabinet. A 5/16-inch socket wrench may also be used.

Figure 1-5 Door Key

• Loopback plug - A multimode (shortwave laser) loopback plug

(

Figure 1-6 ) is required to perform port diagnostic tests.

Loopback plugs are shipped with the product, depending on the types of port transceivers installed.

Figure 1-6 Loopback Plug

1-14 McDATA Sphereon 4400 Fabric Switch Installation and Service Manual

General Information

1

• Fiber-optic protective plug - For safety and port transceiver protection, fiber-optic protective plugs (

Figure 1-7 ) are inserted in

all product ports without fiber-optic cables attached. Products are shipped with protective plugs installed.

Figure 1-7 Fiber-Optic Protective Plug

• Null modem cable - An asynchronous RS-232 null modem cable

(

Figure 1-8 ) is required to configure product network addresses

and acquire event log information through the product’s serial port. The cable has nine conductors and DB-9 female connectors.

Figure 1-8 Null Modem Cable

Tools Supplied by

Service Personnel

The following tools should be supplied by service personnel:

• Scissors or pocket knife - A sharp cutting edge (scissors or knife blade) is required to cut protective strapping when unpacking replacement FRUs.

• Flat-tip and cross-tip (Phillips) screwdrivers - Screwdrivers are required to remove, replace, adjust, or tighten FRUs, chassis, or cabinet components.

Tools and Test Equipment 1-15

1

General Information

• T10 Torx ® tool - The tool is required to rack-mount products or to remove, replace, adjust, or tighten chassis or cabinet components.

• ESD grounding cable and wrist strap - An ESD wrist strap is required when working with ESD-sensitive FRUs, including optical transceivers.

• Maintenance terminal - A desktop or notebook PC is required to configure product network addresses and acquire event log information through the maintenance port. The PC must have:

— The Microsoft® Windows® 98, Windows® 2000, Windows®

2003, Windows® XP, or Windows® ME operating system installed.

— RS-232 serial communication software (such as ProComm

Plus™ or HyperTerminal) installed. HyperTerminal is provided with Windows operating systems.

• Fiber-optic cleaning kit - The kit contains tools and instructions to clean fiber-optic cables, connectors, loopback plugs, and protective plugs.

1-16 McDATA Sphereon 4400 Fabric Switch Installation and Service Manual

2

Installation Tasks

This chapter describes tasks to install, configure, and verify operation of the Sphereon 4400 Fabric Switch using the EFCM Basic Edition interface or storage area network (SAN) management application.

The product can be installed on a table top, mounted in a Fabricenter equipment cabinet, or mounted in any standard 19-inch equipment rack.

Factory Defaults

Table 2-1

lists factory-set defaults for the product.

Table 2-1 Factory-Set Defaults (Product)

Item

EFCM Basic Edition interface user name (case sensitive)

EFCM Basic Edition interface password (case sensitive)

Customer-level password (maintenance port access)

Maintenance-level password (maintenance port access)

IP address

Subnet mask

Gateway address

Default

Administrator password password level-2

10.1.1.10

255.0.0.0

0.0.0.0

Factory Defaults 2-1

2

Installation Tasks

Table 2-2

lists factory-set defaults for the rack-mount management server (running a SAN management application).

Table 2-2 Factory-Set Defaults (Management Server)

Item

Liquid crystal display (LCD) front panel

Windows operating system user name (case sensitive)

Windows operating system password (case sensitive)

SAN management application user name (case sensitive)

SAN management application password (case sensitive)

LAN 1 (public interface) IP address

LAN 2 (private interface)

Subnet mask

Gateway address

IP address

Subnet mask

Gateway address

Default

9999

Administrator password

Administrator password

192.168.0.1

255.0.0.0

0.0.0.0

10.1.1.1

255.0.0.0

0.0.0.0

Installation Task Summary

Table 2-3

summarizes installation tasks for the product, optional management server, and optional Ethernet hub. The table describes each task, states if the task is optional, and lists the page reference.

Table 2-3 Installation Task Summary

Task Number and Description

Task 1: Verify Installation Requirements

Task 2: Unpack, Inspect, and Install the Ethernet Hub

(Optional)

Task 3: Unpack, Inspect, and Install the Product

Task 4: Configure Product at the EFCM Basic Edition

Interface (Optional)

Required or Optional

Required.

Perform task if hub is required to connect switch and management interface.

Required.

Perform task if switch is managed through the EFCM

Basic Edition interface.

Page

2-4

2-5

2-9

2-12

2-2 McDATA Sphereon 4400 Fabric Switch Installation and Service Manual

Installation Tasks

2

Table 2-3 Installation Task Summary (continued)

Task Number and Description

Task 5: Configure Product Network Information (Optional)

Task 6: Unpack, Inspect, and Install the Management Server

Required if management server is used.

Task 7: Configure Server Password and Network Addresses

Required if management server is used.

Task 8: Configure Management Server Information

Task 9: Configure Windows Operating System Users

Required if management server is used.

Required if management server is used.

Task 10: Set Management Server Date and Time

Task 11: Configure the Call-Home Feature (Optional)

Task 12: Assign User Names and Passwords

Task 13: Configure the Product to the Management

Application

Required or Optional

Configure if connecting multiple switches or connecting switch and management server to a public LAN.

Page

2-32

Required if management server is used.

Configure if specified by customer and telephone connection is provided.

Required if management server is used.

Required if management server is used.

2-35

2-38

2-40

2-44

2-46

2-48

2-49

2-51

Task 14: Record or Verify Server Restore Information

Task 15: Verify Product-to-Server Communication

Task 16: Configure PFE Key (Optional)

Task 17: Configure Management Server (Optional)

Task 18: Set Product Date and Time

Task 19: Configure the Element Manager Application

Task 20: Back Up Configuration Data

Task 21: Cable Fibre Channel Ports

Task 22: Configure Zoning (Optional)

Task 23: Connect Product to a Fabric Element (Optional)

Task 24: Register with the McDATA Filecenter

Required if management server is used.

Required if management server is used.

2-52

2-53

2-55

Configure if product feature enablement (PFE) key is ordered.

Configure for open-systems host control of switch.

Required if management server is used.

Required if management server is used.

Required if management server is used.

Required.

2-56

2-57

2-59

2-75

2-77

Perform task to configure zoning.

2-78

Perform task to connect switch to a Fibre channel fabric.

2-79

Required.

2-80

Installation Task Summary 2-3

2

Installation Tasks

Task 1: Verify Installation Requirements

Ensure that the following requirements are met prior to product and management interface installation. Ensure:

• A site plan is prepared, configuration planning tasks are complete, planning considerations are evaluated, and related planning checklists are complete. Refer to McDATA Products in a

SAN Environment - Planning Manual (620-000124) for information.

• Fibre Channel SAN design and director, fabric switch, and SAN router device connectivity are evaluated, and the related planning worksheet is complete. Refer to the McDATA Products in a SAN Environment - Planning Manual (620-000124) for information.

• Support is available for one of the following product management methods:

— A browser-capable PC and Internet connectivity to support the product-resident EFCM Basic Edition interface, or

— A rack-mount management server or browser-capable PC and

LAN segment connectivity to support operation of SAN management and Element Manager applications.

• Support equipment and technical personnel are available for the installation.

• The required number and type of fiber-optic jumper cables are delivered and available. Ensure that the cables are of the correct length and have the required connectors.

• A Fabricenter cabinet or customer-supplied 19-inch equipment rack and associated hardware are available (optional).

• Remote workstations or simple network management protocol

(SNMP) workstations are available (optional).

• Workstations are customer-supplied and connected through a public or dedicated LAN segment.

2-4 McDATA Sphereon 4400 Fabric Switch Installation and Service Manual

Installation Tasks

2

Task 2: Unpack, Inspect, and Install the Ethernet Hub (Optional)

This section describes how to unpack, inspect and install the theernet hub.

The product is managed through either:

• An Internet connection to a browser-capable PC (EFCM Basic

Edition interface). Connection of a LAN segment with multiple switches to the Internet may require installation of a 24-port

Ethernet hub.

• A 10/100 megabit per second (Mbps) LAN connection to a management server. Connectivity may require installation of a

24-port Ethernet hub. A combination of up to 48 products can be configured and managed on one network, therefore multiple, daisy-chained hubs may be required to provide sufficient port connections.

The following paragraphs provide instructions to unpack, inspect, and install one or more Ethernet hubs.

• If the existing Ethernet LAN segment is adequate for connectivity

and a hub is not delivered, this task is not required. Go to Task 3:

Unpack, Inspect, and Install the Product .

• If the hub is delivered in a Fabricenter equipment cabinet, go to

Task 5: Configure Product Network Information (Optional)

.

Unpack and Inspect

Ethernet Hub

To unpack and inspect Ethernet hub(s) use the following steps:

1. Inspect shipping container(s) for damage. Ensure a freight carrier representative is present when the container is opened. Unpack shipping container(s) and inspect each item for damage. Ensure that the packaged items correspond to items listed on the enclosed bill of materials.

2. Contact the solution center if items are damaged or missing,:

Phone: (800) 752-4572 or (720) 558-3910

Fax: (720) 558-3851

E-mail: [email protected]

Task 2: Unpack, Inspect, and Install the Ethernet Hub (Optional) 2-5

2

Installation Tasks

Desktop Installation

To install and configure up to three Ethernet hubs on a desktop, use the following steps:

1. Remove the backing from the four adhesive rubber pads and apply the pads to the underside of each hub. Ensure that the pads are aligned with the scribed circles at each corner.

2. Position the first hub on a table or desktop as directed by the customer.

3. Stack the remaining hubs on top of the first hub. Ensure that the adhesive rubber pads on the underside of a hub align with the recesses on the top of the hub below.

4. Daisy-chain (connect) the hubs using the following steps: a. Connect the top and middle stacked hubs, connect an RJ-45 patch cable to port 24 of the top hub, then connect the cable to port 12 of the middle hub.

b. Connect the bottom and middle stacked hubs, connect a second RJ-45 patch cable to port 24 of the middle hub, then connect the cable to port 12 of the bottom hub.

c. Use a pointed instrument to set the medium-dependent interface (MDI) switch on the top and middle hubs to MDI

(in) as shown in

Figure 2-1 (1 and 2).

d. Set the medium-dependant interface (MDI) switch on the

bottom hub to MDIX (out) as shown in Figure 2-1

(3).

NOTE: To connect two hubs, use

step b and

step c

(middle and bottom hub instructions only).

2-6 McDATA Sphereon 4400 Fabric Switch Installation and Service Manual

Installation Tasks

2

Rack-Mount

Installation

Figure 2-1 Patch Cable and MDI Selector Configuration

5. Connect a power cord to an AC power strip and the receptacle at the rear of each hub. Use an extension cord if required.

6. Connect the AC power strip to facility power. Power for each hub switches on when the strip is connected to facility AC power.

7. Inspect the front panel of each hub. Ensure that each green Power light-emitting diode (LED) illuminates.

You will need a pointed instrument (pencil tip or bent paper clip), #2

Phillips screwdriver, and 1/8-inch Allen wrench for this procedure.

To install and configure up to three Ethernet hubs in a Fabricenter cabinet or customer-supplied 19-inch equipment rack, use the following steps

1. Secure one mounting bracket to each side of the first hub as shown in

Figure 2-2 . Use the two brackets and four pan-head

Phillips screws (8/32 x 0.5-inch) provided.

Task 2: Unpack, Inspect, and Install the Ethernet Hub (Optional) 2-7

2

Installation Tasks

Figure 2-2 Mounting Bracket Installation (Ethernet Hub)

2. Position the hub as directed by the customer. Align screw holes in the mounting brackets with screw holes in the rack-mount standards.

3. Secure both sides of the hub to the rack-mount standards. Use the

1/8-inch Allen wrench and four Allen-head mounting screws

(10/32 x 0.5-inch) provided.

4. Repeat step 1

through step 3

for the remaining hubs.

5. Daisy-chain (connect) the hubs using the following procedure: a. Connect the top and middle stacked hubs, connect an RJ-45 patch cable to port 24 of the top hub, then connect the cable to port 12 of the middle hub.

b. Connect the bottom and middle stacked hubs, connect a second RJ-45 patch cable to port 24 of the middle hub, then connect the cable to port 12 of the bottom hub.

c. Use a pointed instrument

Figure 2-1 (1 and 2), to set the

medium-dependent interface (MDI) switch on the top and

middle hubs to MDI (in). As shown in Figure 2-1

(3), set the

MDI switch on the bottom hub to MDIX (out).

NOTE: To connect two hubs follow the middle and bottom hub instructions only.

6. Connect a power cord to a rack power strip and the receptacle at the rear of each hub. Power for each hub switches on when the hub (and equipment rack) are connected to facility AC power.

2-8 McDATA Sphereon 4400 Fabric Switch Installation and Service Manual

Installation Tasks

2

NOTE: Ensure each hub is connected to a separate rack power strip.

7. Inspect the front panel of each hub. Ensure each green Power

LED illuminates.

Task 3: Unpack, Inspect, and Install the Product

Follow the procedures in this section to unpack, inspect, and install one or more switches. If the switch is delivered in a Fabricenter equipment cabinet, go to

Task 5: Configure Product Network Information

(Optional)

.

Unpack and Inspect

Switch

To unpack and inspect switch(es), use the following steps:

1. Inspect shipping container(s) for damage. Ensure that a freight carrier representative is present when the container is opened.

Unpack shipping container(s) and inspect each item for damage.

Ensure that the packaged items correspond to items listed on the enclosed bill of materials.

2. Contact the technical support center if any tems are damaged or missing,:

Phone: (800) 752-4572 or (720) 558-3910

Fax: (720) 558-3851

E-mail: [email protected]

Desktop Installation

To install a switch on a desktop, use the following steps:

1. Remove the backing from the three adhesive rubber pads and apply the pads to the underside of the switch. Ensure pads are aligned with the scribed circles.

2. Position the switch on a table or desktop as directed by the customer. Ensure:

— Grounded AC electrical outlets are available.

— Adequate ventilation is present, and areas with excessive heat, dust, or moisture are avoided.

Task 3: Unpack, Inspect, and Install the Product 2-9

2

Installation Tasks

— All planning considerations are met. Refer to McDATA

Products in a SAN Environment - Planning Manual (620-000124) for information.

3. Ensure that all field-replaceable units (FRUs) are installed as ordered.

4. Connect power supply adapter cords to threaded output jacks at the rear of the chassis (second external power supply is optional).

Twist the cord clockwise to lock and secure the connection.

5. Connect AC power cords to connectors on each external power supply and to separate (for redundancy) facility power sources that provide single-phase, 100 to 240 volt alternating current

(VAC) current.

When the first power cord is connected, the switch powers on and performs power-on self-tests (POSTs). During POSTs: a. The green power (PWR) LED on the front panel illuminates.

b. The amber system error (ERR) LED on the front panel blinks momentarily while the switch is tested.

c. The green LED associated with the Ethernet port blinks momentarily while the port is tested.

d. LEDs associated with Fibre Channel ports blink momentarily while the ports are tested.

After successful POST completion, the PWR LED remains illuminated and all other front panel LEDs extinguish.

If a POST error or other malfunction occurs, go to

MAP 0000: Start

MAP to isolate the problem.

6. Perform one of the following:

— If the switch is to be managed through the EFCM Basic Edition

interface, go to Task 4: Configure Product at the EFCM Basic

Edition Interface (Optional) .

— If the switch is to be managed through a management or customer-supplied server, go to

Task 5: Configure Product

Network Information (Optional)

.

2-10 McDATA Sphereon 4400 Fabric Switch Installation and Service Manual

Rack-Mount

Installation

Installation Tasks

2

You will need an optional rack-mount kit, T10 Torx tool, and #2

Phillips screwdriver for this procedure.

To install and configure the switch in a Fabricenter cabinet or a customer-supplied equipment rack, use the following steps:

1. Locate the rack-mount position as directed by the customer. The switch is 1.75 inches, or 1U high.

2. Ensure that all FRUs are installed as ordered.

3. Open the rack-mount kit and inspect the contents. Refer to the enclosed bill of materials and verify all parts are delivered.

4. Install the switch and optional slide tray (holds two switches) in the equipment cabinet. Refer to McDATA Sphereon 4400 Switch

Rack-Mount Kit Installation Instructions (958-000480) for guidance.

5. Connect power supply adapter cords to threaded output jacks at the rear of the chassis (second external power supply is optional).

Twist the cord clockwise to lock and secure the connection.

6. Connect AC power cords to connectors on each external power supply and to separate (for redundancy) rack power strips connected to a facility power source that provides single-phase,

100 to 240 VAC current.

When the first power cord is connected, the switch powers on and performs POSTs. During POSTs: a. The green power (PWR) LED on the front panel illuminates.

b. The amber system error (ERR) LED on the front panel blinks momentarily while the switch is tested.

c. The green LED associated with the Ethernet port blinks momentarily while the port is tested.

d. LEDs associated with Fibre Channel ports blink momentarily while the ports are tested.

After successful POST completion, the PWR LED remains illuminated and all other front panel LEDs extinguish.

If a POST error or other malfunction occurs, go to

MAP 0000: Start

MAP to isolate the problem.

7. Perform one of the following:

Task 3: Unpack, Inspect, and Install the Product 2-11

2

Installation Tasks

— If the switch is to be managed through the EFCM Basic Edition

interface, go to Task 4: Configure Product at the EFCM Basic

Edition Interface (Optional) .

— If the switch is to be managed through a management or customer-supplied server, go to

Task 5: Configure Product

Network Information (Optional)

.

Task 4: Configure Product at the EFCM Basic Edition Interface

(Optional)

Follow the procedures in this section to configure the product from the EFCM Basic Edition interface. A browser-capable PC with

Internet or Ethernet LAN access is required. To open the interface, use the following steps:

1. Connect the Ethernet patch cable (supplied with the product) to the RJ-45 connector (labelled 10/100) at the front panel.

2. Connect the remaining end of the Ethernet cable to the Internet or

LAN segment as directed by the customer. If the hub installed in

Task 2: Unpack, Inspect, and Install the Ethernet Hub (Optional)

provides connectivity, connect the cable to any available hub port.

3. Open the browser application (Netscape Navigator or Internet

Explorer).

4. Enter the default Internet Protocol (IP) address of the switch

(10.1.1.10). The Enter Network Password dialog box appears.

5. Type the case-sensitive default user name (Administrator) and password (password) and click OK. The First Time Login View appears.

6. Type customer-specified values in the User Name, New Password, and Confirm Password fields, then click Activate. The Topology View appears with status information about each fabric element, including the product to be configured.

7. Click Switch Details. The Hardware View appears ( Figure 2-3 ).

2-12 McDATA Sphereon 4400 Fabric Switch Installation and Service Manual

Installation Tasks

2

Figure 2-3 Hardware View

8. S electively perform the following tasks to configure the product from the EFCM Basic Edition interface, according to customer requirements:

Product

Ports

Management

• Identification

• Date and time

• Parameters

• Fabric parameters

• Network addresses.

• Basic information

• Buffer-to-buffer credits (BB_Credits)

• N_Port identifier virtualization (NPIV).

• SNMP trap message recipients

• Command line interface (CLI)

• Open systems management server (OSMS)

• Secure socket layer (SSL) encryption.

Task 4: Configure Product at the EFCM Basic Edition Interface (Optional) 2-13

2

Installation Tasks

Options

Security

Interswitch Links

Product feature enablement (PFE) keys.

• SANtegrity authentication (settings, access control list, and remote authentication dial-in user service (RADIUS) server support),

• Enterprise Fabric Mode

• SANtegrity binding (fabric, switch, and port binding

• OpenTrunking

• Preferred path, and

• Interswitch link (ISL) port fencing

Configure Product

Identification

Follow the procedures in this section to configure the product identification.

NOTE: The Name, Location, and Contact variables correspond respectively to the SNMP variables sysName, sysLocation, and sysContact, and are used by management workstations when obtaining product data.

1. Select Identification from the Configure menu

(Configure>Switch>Identification). The Identification View appears

(

Figure 2-4 ).

Figure 2-4 Identification View a. Type a unique product name of 24 alphanumeric characters or less in the Name field. If installed on a public LAN, the name should reflect the product’s Ethernet network domain name system (DNS) host name.

2-14 McDATA Sphereon 4400 Fabric Switch Installation and Service Manual

Installation Tasks

2 b. Type a product description of 255 alphanumeric characters or less in the Description field.

c. Type the product’s physical location (255 alphanumeric characters or less) in the Location field.

d. Type the name of a contact person (255 alphanumeric characters or less) in the Contact field.

2. Click OK to save and activate changes.

Configure Date and

Time

To configure product date and time, use the following steps:

1. Select Date & Time from the Configure menu

(Configure>Switch>Date & Time). The Date Time View appears

(

Figure 2-5 ).

Figure 2-5 Date Time View a. Configure the Date using the Date field:

• Month (MM): 1 - 12.

• Day (DD): 1 - 31.

• Year (YYYY): greater than 1980.

b. Configure the Time using the Date field:

• Hour (HH): 0 -23.

• Minute (MM): 0 - 59.

• Second (SS): 0 - 59.

2. Click OK to save and activate changes.

Task 4: Configure Product at the EFCM Basic Edition Interface (Optional) 2-15

2

Installation Tasks

Configure

Parameters

To configure product operating parameters, use the following steps:

1. Set the product offline. Refer to

Setting Online State for

instructions.

2. Select Parameters from the Configure menu

(Configure>Switch>Parameters). The Parameters View appears

(

Figure 2-6 ).

a. Select the Domain ID Offset value from the drop-down list.

Values available in the drop-down list are 0, 32, 64, 96

(default), 128, 160, and 192. Domain IDs minus the offset are still in the 1-31 range.

Figure 2-6 Parameters View b. Type a value (1-31) in the Preferred Domain ID field. c. Enable (check) the Insistent Domain ID field if you want the

Preferred Domain ID to become the active domain ID when the fabric initializes.

d. Enable (check) the Rerouting Delay field if you want the traffic to be delayed through the fabric by the error detect time out value (E_D_TOV). This delay ensures that the Fibre Channel frames are delivered to their destination in order.

2-16 McDATA Sphereon 4400 Fabric Switch Installation and Service Manual

Configure Fabric

Parameters

Installation Tasks

2 e. Enable (check) the Domain RSCN field, if you want the attached devices to register and receive notification when other devices change state.

f. Enable (check) the Suppress RSCN on Zone Set Activations if you do not want the RSCNs to be transmitted when a zone set is activated.

g. Enable (check) the Isolate on zone activations field if you want only devices that require RSCN notification due to a zoning configuration change to receive RSCNs. Do not enable this option if Suppress on zone set activations is enabled because

RSCNs will not be sent to attached devices.

h. Enable (check) the Limited Fabric RSCN field if you do not want the RSCNs to be transmitted after a switch initial program load (IPL).

i. Enable (check) the Node port virtualization to assign multiple

Fibre Channel addresses to a single N_Port port.

3. Click OK to save and activate changes.

4. Set the product online. Refer to

Setting Online State for

instructions.

To configure fabric operating parameters, use the following steps.

1. Set the product offline. Refer to

Setting Online State for

instructions.

2. Select Fabric Parameters from the Configure menu

(Configure>Switch>Fabric Parameters). The Fabric Parameters View

appears ( Figure 2-7

).

Task 4: Configure Product at the EFCM Basic Edition Interface (Optional) 2-17

2

Installation Tasks

Figure 2-7 Fabric Parameters View a. Type a value between 10 - 1200 tenths of a second (1 - 120 seconds) in the R_A_TOV field. Ten seconds (100) is the recommended value. The R_A_TOV value must exceed the

E_D_TOV value.

b. Type a value between 2 - 600 tenths of a second (0.2 - 60 seconds) at the E_D_TOV field. Two seconds (20) is the recommended value.

NOTE: Fabric elements must be set to the same R_A_TOV and

E_D_TOV values. An ISL between fabric elements with different values segments and prevents communication.

c. Select from the Switch Priority drop-down list to designate the fabric’s principal switch. The principal switch is assigned a priority of 1 and controls the allocation and distribution of domain IDs for all fabric elements (including itself). Available selections are Default, Principal, and Never Principal.

Principal is the highest priority setting, Default is next, and

Never Principal is the lowest. At least one switch in a fabric must be set as Principal or Default. If all switches are set to

Never Principal , all ISLs segment.

d. Select from the Interop Mode drop-down list to set the product operating mode. This setting affects the management mode and does not affect port operation. Available selections are:

2-18 McDATA Sphereon 4400 Fabric Switch Installation and Service Manual

Installation Tasks

2

Configure Network

Information

• McDATA Fabric 1.0 - Select this option if the product is fabric-attached only to other McDATA directors or switches operating in McDATA fabric mode.

• Open Fabric 1.0 - Select this option (default) for managing heterogeneous fabrics and if the product is fabric-attached to McDATA directors or switches and other open-fabric compliant switches.

NOTE: With Open Fabric 1.0 enabled, the default zone set is disabled.

e. Select from the ISL Cost Configuration drop-down list, to select

By Port Speed or Ignore Port Speed to calculate fabric shortest path first (FSPF) cost.

3. Click OK to save and activate changes.

4. Set the product online. Refer to

Setting Online State for

instructions.

Follow the procedure in this section to configure the network information.

Ensure the LAN installation with the network administrator:

• If one product is installed on a dedicated LAN, network information (IP address, subnet mask, and gateway address) does not require any change.

• Multiple products are installed or a public LAN segment is used, network information must be changed to conform to the LAN addressing scheme.

To change product network information, use the following steps:

1. Select Network from the Configure menu

(Configure>Switch>Network). The Network View appears

(

Figure 2-8 ).

Task 4: Configure Product at the EFCM Basic Edition Interface (Optional) 2-19

2

Installation Tasks

Figure 2-8 Network View a. Type a value in the IP Address field (default is 10.1.1.10).

b. Type a value in the Subnet Mask field (default is 255.0.0.0).

c. Type a value in the Gateway Address field (default is 0.0.0.0).

2. Click OK to save and activate changes.

An acknowledgement message appears, indicating the browser

PC must be directed to the new IP address.

3. Update the address resolution protocol (ARP) table for the browser PC.

a. Close the EFCM Basic Edition interface and all browser applications.

b. Open the command prompt (DOS) on your Windows desktop.

c. Delete the switch’s old IP address from the ARP table. At the command (C:\) prompt, type arp -d xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx, where xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx

is the old IP address for the switch.

d. Close the command prompt window and return to the

Windows desktop.

4. Perform a power-on reset (POR) (

IML or Reset Switch

).

5. Open the browser (Internet Explorer or Netscape Navigator) on your PC. Enter the new IP address of the product as the URL. The

Enter Network Password dialog box appears.

2-20 McDATA Sphereon 4400 Fabric Switch Installation and Service Manual

Installation Tasks

2

6. Type the case-sensitive user name and password and click OK.

The EFCM Basic Edition interface appears with the Topology View displaying the status information about each fabric element.

Configure Basic Port

Information

To configure basic port information, use the following steps:

1. Select Basic Info from the Configure menu (Configure>Ports>Basic

Info

). The Basic Information View appears( Figure 2-9 ).

a. Type a port name (24 alphanumeric characters or less) for each port to be configured in the Name field. The port name should characterize the device to which the port is attached.

b. Enable the check box in the Blocked column if you want to block a port (default is unblocked). c. Disable the check box in the Fabric Address Notify column if you want to disable the feature (default is enabled). When enabled, an FL_Port transmits FAN frames after loop initialization to ensure that FC-AL devices are still logged in.

Figure 2-9 Basic Information View

Task 4: Configure Product at the EFCM Basic Edition Interface (Optional) 2-21

2

Installation Tasks

Configure Port

BB_Credit

Configure Port NPIV

d. Select an option from the drop-down list in the Port Type column to configure the port type. The available options are fabric port (F), expansion port (E), generic port (G), generic mixed port (GX), and fabric mixed port (FX). e. Select an option from the drop-down list in the Speed (Gb/s) column to configure the port transmission rate. The available options are auto-negotiate between speeds (Negotiate), 1.0625 gigabit per second (Gbps) operation (1 Gb/sec), 2.1250 Gbps operation (2 Gb/sec), and 4.2500 Gbps operation (4 Gb/sec).

2. Click OK to save and activate changes.

Follow the procedure in this section to configure a port to receive

BB_Credit.

The switch provides a port buffer pool of 150 receive BB_Credits.

Each port can be assigned between two and 120 credits, provided the total credits allocated to all ports does not exceed 150. The default value is six credits per port.

To configure ports to receive BB_Credit, use the following steps:

1. Set all or a subset of user-specified ports offline. Refer to Setting

Online State or

Blocking or Unblocking a Port for instructions.

2. Select Ports and RX BB_Credit from the Configure menu at any view. The RX BB_Credit View appears.

3. Perform one of the following:

— To set all offline ports to default values, click Default.

— To set an offline port to a user-specified value, type the desired value in the RX BB_Credit column.

4. Click OK to save and activate changes.

5. Set ports online. Refer to

Setting Online State (all) or

Blocking or

Unblocking a Port

(specified ports) for instructions.

NPIV allows multiple (up to 256) Fibre Channel addresses to be assigned to a node (N_Port). The NPIV feature must be installed.

Refer to

Installing PFE Keys (Optional)

for instructions.

To configure port NPIV, use the following steps:

2-22 McDATA Sphereon 4400 Fabric Switch Installation and Service Manual

Configure SNMP

Installation Tasks

2

1. Select NPIV from the Configure menu (Configure>Ports>NPIV).

The NPIV View appears.

2. Click Enable to activate NPIV operation for the product.

3. Type a desired value(1 through 256) in the Login column.

4. Click OK to save and activate changes.

Follow the procedure in this section to configure names, write authorizations, addresses, and user datagram protocol (UDP) port numbers for SNMP trap message recipients.

To configure recipient workstations, use the following steps:

1. Select SNMP from the Configure menu (Configure>SNMP). The

SNMP View

appears ( Figure 2-10 ).

a. Click Enable to activate the installed SNMP agent.

b. Select the appropriate Fibre Alliance management information base (FA MIB) from the FA MIB Version drop-down list. Valid selections are FA MIB Version 3.0 or FA MIB Version 3.1.

Figure 2-10 SNMP View c. Check the Enable Authentication Traps check box to enable transmission of SNMP trap messages to recipients.

Task 4: Configure Product at the EFCM Basic Edition Interface (Optional) 2-23

2

Installation Tasks

Enable CLI

Enable or Disable the CLI for SSH

d. Type a community name, for each configured recipient (32 alphanumeric characters or less) in the Name field. The name is incorporated in SNMP trap messages to ensure against unauthorized viewing.

e. Check the box in the Write Auth column to enable write authorization for the trap recipient (default is disabled). When enabled, a configured user can change sysContact, sysName, and sysLocation SNMP variables.

f. Type the IP address or DNS host name of the trap recipient

(SNMP management workstation) in the Trap Recipient field. It is recommended that the IP address be used.

g. Type a decimal port number in the UDP Port Number field to specify the UDP port number.

2. Click OK to save and activate changes.

Follow the procedure in this section to toggle (enable or disable) the state of the product’s command line interface. To change the CLI state, Enable the check box Enable CLI from the Configure menu

To configure SSH, Select Configure > SSH on the navigation panel.

The SSH configuration page ( Figure 2-11 ) appears.

Figure 2-11 SSH Configuration

2-24 McDATA Sphereon 4400 Fabric Switch Installation and Service Manual

Enable or Disable

Host Control

Installation Tasks

2

Click Enable to enable SSH. Click Disable to disable the SSH. When

SSH is enabled, only SSH is allowed, and all data sent over the connection is encrypted. When the SSH is disabled, only Telnet is allowed, and the data is not encrypted.

Folllow the procedure in this section to configure the open systems management server and enable OSI host control of the product.

Implementing and enabling OSI host control requires installation of a

SAN management application on the OSI server. Applications include Veritas ® SANPoint™ Control or Tivoli ® NetView ® .

To enable or disable OSMS host control:, use the following steps

1. Select OSMS from the Configure menu (Configure>OSMS). The

OSMS View appears (

Figure 2-12

).

Configure SSL

Encryption

Figure 2-12 OSMS View

2. Perform one of the following:

• Click Enable to activate OSMS.

• Click Disable to deactivate OSMS.

3. Click the Enable Host Control check box to activate host control of the product.

4. Click OK to save and activate changes.

SSL is a protocol that encrypts internet communications. The protocol uses key encryption and includes a digital certificate that enables server authentication and SSL session initialization.

To configure SSL encryption, use the following steps:

Task 4: Configure Product at the EFCM Basic Edition Interface (Optional) 2-25

2

Installation Tasks

1. Select SSL from the Configure menu (Configure>SSL). The SSL

View

appears ( Figure 2-13 ).

2. Perform one of the following:

• Click Enable to activate web SSL.

• Click Disable to deactivate web SSL.

3. Perform one of the following:

• Click Enable to activate software SSL.

• Click Disable to deactivate software SSL.

2-26

Figure 2-13 SSL View

4. Type a value between 30 and 3650 in the Expires in field to define the expiration period (in days) of the digital certificate. The default is 365 days.

5. Click Generate to generate a new certificate.

6. Type a value between 50 and 10000 in the Renegotiate after field to define a renegotiation parameter (in megabytes) for the SSL session key.

7. Click OK to save and activate changes.

McDATA Sphereon 4400 Fabric Switch Installation and Service Manual

Installing PFE Keys

(Optional)

Installation Tasks

2

Follow the procedures in this section to install optional features using

PFE keys.

After purchasing a feature, you must obtain the PFE key by following the enclosed instructions. The key is an alphanumeric string consisting of uppercase and lowercase characters that must be entered exactly, including dashes. An example format is:

XxXx-XXxX-xxXX-xX.

Keys are encoded to work only with the serial number of the installed product. Note down the key. This will help you to re-install the feature when required.

If the product fails and is replaced, obtain new PFE keys from the technical support center (800-752-4572 or [email protected]

). You will have to provide the serial numbers of the failed and replacement products, and the old PFE key number or transaction code.

The optional features you can install using PFE-keys are listed below:

• Element Manager application - This feature enables out-of-band product management through an Element Manager interface.

Products are delivered with the application enabled for a 31-day grace period. Before grace period expiration, the application must be reactivated through a PFE key.

• Flexport Technology - A Flexport Technology product is delivered at a discount without all Fibre Channel ports enabled.

When additional port capacity is required, the remaining ports are incrementally enabled through this feature.

• Full volatility - This feature ensures no Fibre Channel frames are stored after the product is powered off or fails, and a memory dump file (that possibly includes classified data frames) is not included as part of the data collection procedure.

• N_Port ID virtualization - This feature allows up to 256 Fibre

Channel addresses to be assigned to an N_Port.

• OpenTrunking - This feature provides dynamic load balancing of

Fibre Channel traffic across multiple ISLs.

• SANtegrity (enhanced) - This feature enhances security in SANs by combining the functions of SANtegrity authentication

(restricting access to Fibre Channel elements) and SANtegrity binding (controlling large and mixed fabrics).

Task 4: Configure Product at the EFCM Basic Edition Interface (Optional) 2-27

2

Installation Tasks

To install the optional features using EFCM Basic, use the following steps:

1. Select Optional Features from the Configure menu

(Configure>Optional Features) or Security menu (Security>Optional

Features ). The Maintenance Feature Installation View appears

(

Figure 2-14

).

Feature status is indicated by a green check mark D (installed) or a red X (uninstalled). Flexport Technology status is indicated by the number of installed ports. Click a feature title in the Feature panel and a description appears in the Feature Details panel.

Figure 2-14 Maintenance Feature Installation View

2. Type the key in the Feature Key field and click Update. The interface refreshes and indicates the update changes in the Feature panel.

NOTE: When OK is selected, all features are updated with new features.

2-28 McDATA Sphereon 4400 Fabric Switch Installation and Service Manual

Configure Security

Installation Tasks

2

3. Click OK. New PFE key(s) activate, the message Feature installation in process. Your browser connection will be unavailable until unit restart is complete.

appears, and the product performs a non-disruptive (to Fibre Channel traffic) firmware reset.

After the product reset, the message Feature installation complete. Click here to login.

appears.

4. Click here to login and start a new EFCM Basic Edition session.

The Enter Network Password dialog box appears.

This section describes the security features for the product that may be optionally configured.

NOTE: The enhanced SANtegrity PFE key (SANtegrity authentication and

SANtegrity binding) must be installed ( Installing PFE Keys (Optional)

) to configure these features.

Select Security from the configrue menu (Configure>Security) and choose from one of the following options in the drop-down menu:

• Authentication settings - The Authentication Settings View provides four pages to configure optional SANtegrity authentication features, including:

— User settings - Configure password-protected administrator and operator access to the EFCM Basic Edition and command line interfaces.

— Software settings - Configure challenge handshake authentication protocol (CHAP) controlled management interface access (out-of-band and inband) to the product.

— Device settings - Configure a CHAP secret authentication sequence for nodes (devices) attached to the product through

E_Ports or N_ports.

— Port settings - Override product-level authentication settings and enable or disable device communication on a per-port basis.

• IP Access control list - Use the IP Access Control List View to configure a list of device IP addresses or a range of device IP addresses authorized to communicate with the product.

Task 4: Configure Product at the EFCM Basic Edition Interface (Optional) 2-29

2

Installation Tasks

Configure

Interswitch Links

• RADIUS - Use the RADIUS Server View to configure up to three remote authentication dial-in user service (RADIUS) servers as part of SANtegrity authentication. A RADIUS server stores and authenticates passwords and CHAP secrets.

• Enterprise Fabric Mode - Use the Enterprise Fabric Mode View to enable or disable Enterprise Fabric Mode (EFM). Fabric binding is activated when EFM is enabled.

• Fabric binding - Use the Fabric Binding View to lock parameters of a fabric in accordance with the user configuration. Fabric binding creates a membership list of element (director or switch)

Domain_IDs and worldwide names (WWNs) that can communicate with the product.

• Switch binding - Use the Switch Binding View to create a membership list of node (device) WWNs that can attach to the product. The specified connection policy restricts product access through E_Ports, F_Ports, or in general (all ports).

• Port binding - Use the Port Binding View to bind an attached device WWN to a product Fibre Channel port.

To configure optional features, refer to the McDATA EFCM Basic

Edition User Manual (620-000240) for instructions.

This section describes the procedures to configure the optional ISL performance features enabled through Configure menu selections.

The OpenTrunking feature requires PFE key installation. Refer to

Installing PFE Keys (Optional)

for instructions. Features include:

• OpenTrunking (Configure>Performance>Open Trunking)- Use the OpenTrunking View to optimize ISL bandwidth. The feature monitors data rates (congestion and BB_Credit starvation) through multiple ISLs and load balances traffic (from congested to uncongested links) accordingly.

• Preferred path (Configure>Performance>Preferred path) - Use the Preferred Path View to specify and configure one or more ISL data paths between multiple fabric elements. At each fabric element, a preferred path consists of a source port, exit port, and destination Domain_ID.

2-30 McDATA Sphereon 4400 Fabric Switch Installation and Service Manual

Installation Tasks

2

• Port fencing (Configure>Performance>Port fencing)- Use the Port

Fencing View to minimize ISLs that bounce (repeatedly attempt to establish a connection), causing disruptive fabric rebuilds.

Fencing defines a bounce threshold that when reached, automatically blocks the disruptive E_Port.

To configure features, refer to the McDATA EFCM Basic Edition User

Manual (620-000240) for instructions. If no additional options or

features are to be configured, go to Task 21: Cable Fibre Channel Ports

.

Task 4: Configure Product at the EFCM Basic Edition Interface (Optional) 2-31

2

Installation Tasks

Task 5: Configure Product Network Information (Optional)

Follow the procedures in this section to configure product network information:

• MAC address - The media access control (MAC) address is programmed into FLASH memory on the control processor (CTP) card at manufacture. The MAC address is unique for each product, and should not be changed.

• IP address - The default IP address is 10.1.1.10. If multiple products are installed on the same LAN, each product (and the management server) must have a unique IP address.

NOTE: If multiple products and the management server are delivered in a Fabricenter equipment cabinet, all devices are configured with unique

IP addresses that do not require change. The addresses require change only if multiple cabinets are LAN-connected.

• Subnet mask - The default subnet mask is 255.0.0.0. If the product is installed on a complex public LAN with one or more routers, the address may require change.

• Gateway address - The default gateway address is 0.0.0.0. If the product is installed on a public LAN, the gateway address must be changed to the address of the corporate intranet’s local router.

Ensure that the LAN installation with the customer.

• If one product is installed on a dedicated LAN, network

addresses do not require change. Go to Task 6: Unpack, Inspect, and

Install the Management Server .

• If multiple products are installed or a public LAN segment is used, network addresses must be changed to conform to the customer’s LAN addressing scheme.

Perform the following steps to change a product IP address, subnet mask, or gateway address.

NOTE: An asynchronous RS-232 modem cable and maintenance terminal

(desktop or notebook PC) with a Windows-based operating system and

RS-232 serial communication software (such as ProComm Plus or

HyperTerminal) are required.

2-32 McDATA Sphereon 4400 Fabric Switch Installation and Service Manual

Installation Tasks

2

1. Use a Phillips screwdriver to remove the protective cap from the

9-pin maintenance port at the rear of the chassis. Connect one end of the RS-232 modem cable to the port.

2. Connect the other cable end to a 9-pin serial communication port

(COM1 or COM2) at the rear of the maintenance terminal PC.

3. Power on the maintenance terminal. At the Windows desktop, click Start at the left side of the task bar. The Windows Workstation menu appears.

NOTE: The following steps describe changing network addresses using

HyperTerminal serial communication software.

4. Open the HyperTerminal window on your Windows Workstation

(Start>Programs>Accessories>Communications>HyperTerminal). The

Connection Description dialog box appears (

Figure 2-15

).

Figure 2-15 Connection Description Dialog Box

5. Type a descriptive product name in the Name field and click OK.

The Connect To dialog box appears.

6. Ensure that the Connect using field displays COM1 or COM2

(depending on the port connection to the product), and click OK.

The COMn Properties dialog box appears, where n is 1 or 2.

Task 5: Configure Product Network Information (Optional) 2-33

2

Installation Tasks

7. Configure Port Settings parameters:

— Bits per second - 115200.

— Data bits - 8.

— Parity - None.

— Stop bits - 1.

— Flow control - Hardware or None.

Click OK. The New Connection - HyperTerminal window appears.

8. Type the user password (default is password) at the > prompt, and press Enter. The password is case sensitive. The New

Connection - HyperTerminal window appears with software and hardware version information for the product, and a C > prompt at the bottom of the window.

9. Type the ipconfig command at the C > prompt, and press Enter.

The New Connection - HyperTerminal window appears with configuration information listed:

— MAC Address.

— IP Address (default is 10.1.1.10).

— Subnet Mask (default is 255.0.0.0).

— Gateway Address (default is 0.0.0.0).

— Auto Negotiate.

— Speed.

— Duplex.

Only the IP Address, Subnet Mask, and Gateway Address fields are configurable.

10. Change the IP address, subnet mask, and gateway address as directed by the customer. To change the addresses, type the following at the C > prompt and press Enter.

ipconfig xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx yyy.yyy.yyy.yyy zzz.zzz.zzz.zzz

The IP address is xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx, the subnet mask is yyy.yyy.yyy.yyy

, and the gateway address is zzz.zzz.zzz.zzz, where the octets xxx, yyy, and zzz are decimals from zero through 255. If an address is to remain unchanged, type the current address in the respective field.

2-34 McDATA Sphereon 4400 Fabric Switch Installation and Service Manual

Installation Tasks

2

11. Select Exit from the File pull-down menu. A HyperTerminal message box appears.

12. Click Yes. A second message box appears.

13. Click No to exit and close the application.

14. Power off the maintenance terminal and disconnect the RS-232 modem cable. Replace the protective cap over the maintenance port.

15. At the product front panel, press and hold the RESET button for ten seconds to perform a POR.

16. Connect the product to the customer-supplied Ethernet LAN segment or Ethernet hub: a. Connect one end of the Ethernet patch cable (supplied) to the

RJ-45 connector (labelled 10/100).

b. Connect the remaining end of the cable to the LAN as directed by the customer or to any available Ethernet hub port.

17. Perform one of the following:

— If the product is delivered separately from the management

server, go to Task 6: Unpack, Inspect, and Install the Management

Server .

— If the product is delivered as part of a Fabricenter equipment cabinet, go to

Task 7: Configure Server Password and Network

Addresses

.

Task 6: Unpack, Inspect, and Install the Management Server

The management server is rack-mount unit with SAN management and Element Manager applications installed. The server also includes a TightVNC Viewer client-server software control package that provides remote network access (through a standard web browser) to the server desktop. For information, refer to www.tightvnc.com

.

NOTE: The server and related applications provide a GUI to monitor and manage products, and are a dedicated solution that should not be used for other tasks. Applications on the server are tested, but not compatibility tested with other third-party software. Modifications to the server hardware or installation of additional software (including patches or service packs) may interfere with normal operation.

Task 6: Unpack, Inspect, and Install the Management Server 2-35

2

Installation Tasks

To unpack, inspect, and install the server use the following steps:

1. Inspect shipping container(s) for damage. Ensure that a freight carrier representative is present when the container is opened.

Unpack shipping container(s) and inspect each item for damage.

Ensure that the packaged items correspond to items listed on the enclosed bill of materials.

2. Call the toll-free telephone number printed on the attached service label if any items are damaged or missing,

3. Perform one of the following:

• Desktop installation: Position the server on a table or desktop as directed by the customer. Ensure a grounded AC electrical outlet is available.

• Cabinet installation: Open the rack-mount kit and inspect the contents. Refer to the enclosed bill of materials and verify all parts are delivered. Install the management server in the equipment cabinet. Refer to the 1U Server Rack-Mount Kit

Installation Instructions (958-000310) for instructions.

4. Connect the server to the customer-supplied Ethernet LAN segment or Ethernet hub (private LAN interface): a. Connect one end of the Ethernet patch cable (supplied) as shown in

Figure 2-16

, to the right RJ-45 adapter (LAN 2) at the rear of the server.

Figure 2-16 1U Management Server Connections

2-36 McDATA Sphereon 4400 Fabric Switch Installation and Service Manual

Installation Tasks

2 b. Connect the remaining end of the Ethernet cable to the LAN:

• If the server is installed on a customer-supplied LAN segment, connect the cable to the LAN as directed.

• If the server is installed through the Ethernet hub, connect the cable to any available hub port.

5. If required, connect the server to the customer intranet

(public LAN interface): a. Connect one end of a customer- supplied Ethernet patch cable

as shown in Figure 2-16

, to the left RJ-45 adapter (LAN 1) at the rear of the server.

b. Connect the remaining end of the Ethernet cable to the corporate intranet as directed by the customer.

6. Connect a phone cord to the left RJ-11 adapter (LINE), as shown in

Figure 2-16

, at the rear of the server and a facility telephone connection.

7. Connect the AC power cord to the server and a facility power

source or rack power strip, as shown in Figure 2-16 , that provides

single-phase, 90 to 264 VAC current.

8. When the power cord is connected, the server powers on and performs power-on self-tests (POSTs). During POSTs: a. The green liquid crystal display (LCD) panel illuminates.

b. The green hard disk drive (HDD) LED blinks momentarily, and processor speed and random-access memory information display momentarily at the LCD panel.

c. After a few seconds, LCD panel displays a Boot from LAN?

Press <Enter> message.

d. Ignore the message. After ten seconds, the server performs the boot sequence from the basic input/output system (BIOS).

After successful boot and POST completion, the LCD panel displays a Welcome!! message.

e. The server then continuously cycles through and displays operational information at the LCD panel.

9. Press the left edge (PUSH label) of the LCD panel to disengage the panel and expose the CD-RW drive. Insert a blank rewritable

CD into the CD-RW drive and close the panel.

Task 6: Unpack, Inspect, and Install the Management Server 2-37

2

Installation Tasks

Task 7: Configure Server Password and Network Addresses

Verify the LAN installation. If the server or Fabricenter equipment cabinet is installed on a dedicated LAN, network information does not require change. Change the default password for the server LCD panel (if required by the customer), then go to

Task 8: Configure

Management Server Information

.

If the server or equipment cabinet is installed on a public LAN, the default password for the server LCD panel and the following transmission control protocol internet protocol (TCP/IP) network information must be changed to conform to the customer’s LAN addressing scheme:

• IP address.

• Subnet mask.

Configure Password

To configure a new LCD panel password:

1. Press ENTER at the management server LCD panel . The

Welcome!!

or operational information message changes to an

Input Password 0**** message.

2. Using the button to increment a digit, the button to decrement a digit, the button to move the cursor left, and the

button to move the cursor right, input the default password

(9999), and press ENTER. A LAN 1 Setting?? message appears at the LCD panel.

3. Press the button several times until the Change Password? option appears at the LCD panel, then press ENTER. A New

Password 0**** message appears.

4. Use the arrow keys as described in step 2

to input a new 4-digit numeric password, then press ENTER. A Save Change? Yes,

Save!! message appears.

5. Press ENTER. A Wait a moment! message appears at the LCD panel, the LCD panel returns to the LAN 1 Setting?? message, and the password changes.

2-38 McDATA Sphereon 4400 Fabric Switch Installation and Service Manual

Configure Private

LAN Addresses

Configure Public

LAN Addresses

(Optional)

Installation Tasks

2

To configure TCP/IP network information for the private LAN connection (LAN 2):

1. Press ENTER, at the management server LCD panel, press

ENTER . The Welcome!! or operational information message changes to an Input Password 0**** message.

2. Using the button to increment a digit, the button to decrement a digit, the button to move the cursor left, and the

button to move the cursor right, input the default or changed password, and press ENTER. The LAN 1 Setting?? message appears at the LCD panel.

3. Press the button. The LAN 2 Setting?? message appears at the

LCD panel. Press ENTER and the default IP address of 10.1.1.1 appears.

4. Use the arrow keys as described in step 2

to input a new IP address, then press ENTER. A Save Change? Yes, Save!! message appears.

5. Press ENTER. The LAN 2 IP address changes and the default subnet mask of 255.0.0.0 appears.

6. Use the arrow keys as described in step 2

to input a new subnet mask, then press ENTER. A Save Change? Yes, Save!! message appears.

7. Press ENTER. A Wait a moment! message appears at the LCD panel, the panel returns to the LAN 1 Setting?? message, and the

LAN 2 subnet mask changes.

8. Record the private LAN IP address and subnet mask for reference if the server hard drive fails and must be restored.

To optionally configure TCP/IP network information for the public

LAN connection (LAN 1):

1. Press ENTER at the management server LCD panel, . The

Welcome!!

or operational information message changes to an

Input Password 0**** message.

2. Using the button to increment a digit, the button to decrement a digit, the button to move the cursor left, and the

button to move the cursor right, input the default or changed password, and press ENTER. The LAN 1 Setting?? message appears at the LCD panel.

Task 7: Configure Server Password and Network Addresses 2-39

2

Installation Tasks

3. Press ENTER and the default IP address of 192.168.0.1. appears.

4. Use the arrow keys as described in step 2

to input a new IP address, then press ENTER. A Save Change? Yes, Save!! message appears.

5. Press ENTER. The LAN 1 IP address changes and the default subnet mask of 255.0.0.0 appears.

6. Use the arrow keys as described in step 2

to input a new subnet mask, then press ENTER. A Save Change? Yes, Save!! message appears.

7. Press ENTER. A Wait a moment! message appears at the LCD panel, the panel returns to the LAN 1 Setting?? message, and the

LAN 1 subnet mask changes.

8. Record the public LAN IP address and subnet mask for reference if the server hard drive fails and must be restored.

Task 8: Configure Management Server Information

Configure a server computer name and workgroup name from the

Windows operating system, using a LAN-attached PC with standard web browser.

If required, change the server’s gateway addresses and domain name system (DNS) server IP addresses to conform to the customer’s LAN addressing scheme. The gateway addresses are the addresses of the local router for the corporate intranet.

Access the

Management

Server Desktop

To login and access the server desktop use the following steps:

1. Ensure that the management server and a browser-capable PC are connected through an Ethernet LAN. Launch the browser application (Netscape Navigator or Internet Explorer).

2. Enter the LAN 2 IP address of the server, followed by :5800, as the

Internet uniform resource locator (URL). Use the following format: http://xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx:5800

2-40 McDATA Sphereon 4400 Fabric Switch Installation and Service Manual

Configure

Management

Server Names

Installation Tasks

2

Where xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx is the default IP address of 10.1.1.1 or the

IP address configured while performing

Task 7: Configure Server

Password and Network Addresses . The VNC Authentication screen

appears.

3. Type the default password and click OK. The Welcome to Windows dialog box appears.

NOTE: The default TightVNC viewer password is password.

4. Click the Send Ctrl-Alt-Del button at the top of the window to log on to the server desktop. The Log On to Windows dialog box appears.

NOTE: Do not simultaneously press the Ctrl, Alt, and Delete keys. This action logs the user on to the browser-capable PC, not the server.

5. Type the default Windows user name and password and click

OK . The server’s Windows desktop opens and the EFCM Log In dialog box appears.

NOTE: The default Windows user name is Administrator and the default password is password. Both are case-sensitive.

To configure the management server name and workgroup name use the following steps:

1. Open the system properties dialog box from the Windows desktop (Start>Settings>Control Panel>System). The System

Properties dialog box appears with the General tab open by default.

2. Click the Network Identification tab. The System Properties dialog box appears with the Network Identification tab selected.

3. Click Properties. The Identification Changes dialog box appears

(

Figure 2-17

).

Task 8: Configure Management Server Information 2-41

2

Installation Tasks

Figure 2-17 Identification Changes Dialog Box

4. Change the name to MGMTSERVER at the Computer Name field.

Click (select) the Workgroup radio button, change the name to

WORKGROUP , and click OK. The dialog box closes.

5. Record the computer and workgroup names for reference if the server hard drive fails and must be restored.

6. Close all dialog boxes and return to the Windows desktop.

Configure Gateway and DNS Server

Addresses

To configure gateway and DNS server IP addresses for the private

LAN connection (LAN 2) and public LAN connection (LAN 1):

1. Open the system properties dialog box from the Windows desktop (Start>Settings>Control Panel>Network and Dial-up

Connections). The Network and Dial-up Connections window appears.

2. To configure addresses for the private LAN connection (LAN 2), double-click the Local Area Connection 2 icon. The Local Area

Connection 2 Status dialog box appears.

3. Click Properties. The Local Area Connection 2 Properties dialog box appears.

2-42 McDATA Sphereon 4400 Fabric Switch Installation and Service Manual

Installation Tasks

2

4. In the Components checked are used by this connection field, double-click the Internet Protocol (TCP/IP) entry. The Internet

Protocol (TCP/IP) Properties

dialog box appears ( Figure 2-18 ).

Figure 2-18 Internet Protocol (TCP/IP) Properties Dialog Box

5. The Use the following IP address radio button is enabled and the IP address and Subnet mask fields display network information configured while performing

Task 7: Configure Server Password and

Network Addresses .

6. Enter the gateway address obtained from the customer at the

Default gateway field.

7. Select (enable) the Use the following DNS server addresses radio button. At the Preferred DNS server field, enter the DNS server IP address obtained from the customer, then click OK to apply the changes and close the dialog box.

Task 8: Configure Management Server Information 2-43

2

Installation Tasks

8. Close dialog boxes as appropriate and return to the The Network and Dial-up Connections window.

9. Record the changed gateway and DNS server addresses for reference if the server hard drive fails and must be restored.

10. To optionally configure addresses for the public LAN connection

(LAN 1), double-click the Local Area Connection 1 icon and repeat

step 2 through

step 9 .

11. Close all dialog boxes and return to the Windows desktop.

12. Reboot the server and

Access the Management Server Desktop .

Task 9: Configure Windows Operating System Users

Configure password access for all authorized Windows (server) users. It is also recommended to change the default administrator password. To configure users:

1. Open the system properties dialog box from the Windows desktop (Start>Settings>Control Panel>Users and Passwords). The

Users and Passwords dialog box appears.

2. The Guest user name is a built-in account in the Windows operating system and cannot be deleted. The srvacc account is for field service users and must not be modified or deleted.

Change Default

Administrator

Password

Add a New User

To change the administrator password from the default (password) to a customer-specified password:

1. Click Set Password at the Users and Passwords dialog box. The Set

Password dialog box appears.

2. Confirm New Password fields at the New Password and, type the new password. Both fields are case-sensitive.

3. Click OK. The default administrator password changes and the

Set Password dialog box closes.

To set up a new Windows user:

1. Click Add at the Users and Passwords dialog box, . The first

window of the Add New User wizard appears ( Figure 2-19

).

2-44 McDATA Sphereon 4400 Fabric Switch Installation and Service Manual

Installation Tasks

2

Change User

Properties

Figure 2-19 Add New User Wizard

2. Type the appropriate information in the User name and Domain fields and click Next. The second window of the Add New User wizard appears.

3. Type the new user password in the Password and Confirm password fields and click Next. The third window of the Add New

User wizard appears.

4. Based on the level of access to be granted, select the Standard user,

Restricted user , or Other radio button. If the Other radio button is selected, choose the type of access from the adjacent list box.

5. Click Finish. New user information is added and the wizard closes. Record the user information for reference if the server hard drive fails and must be restored.

6. If no other users are to be added, close all dialog boxes and return to the Windows desktop.

To change existing user properties use the following steps:

1. Highlight the user at the Users for this computer field and click

Properties at the Users and Passwords dialog box. The Properties dialog box appears with the General tab selected (

Figure 2-20

).

Task 9: Configure Windows Operating System Users 2-45

2

Installation Tasks

Figure 2-20 Properties Dialog Box (General Tab)

2. Type the appropriate new user information in the User name, Full name , and Description fields, then click the Group Membership tab.

The Properties dialog box appears with the Group Membership tab selected.

3. Select the Standard user, Restricted user, or Other radio button based on the level of access to be changed, . If the Other radio button is selected, choose the type of access from the adjacent list box.

4. Click OK. The new user information is added and the Properties dialog box closes. Record the user information for reference if the server hard drive fails and must be restored.

5. Close all dialog boxes and return to the Windows desktop.

Task 10: Set Management Server Date and Time

SAN Management application logs are stamped with the server date and time, and the product system clock is synchronized with the server date and time by default. To set the server date and time:

2-46 McDATA Sphereon 4400 Fabric Switch Installation and Service Manual

Installation Tasks

2

1. Open the system properties dialog box from the Windows desktop (Start>Settings>Control Panel>Date/Time). The Date/Time

Properties dialog box appears with the Date & Time page open.

NOTE: The Time Zone field must be set before the Date & Time field.

2. Click the Time Zone tab. The Date/Time Properties dialog box appears with the Time Zone page open (

Figure 2-21

).

Figure 2-21 Date/Time Properties Dialog Box (Time Zone Tab)

3. To change the time zone use the following steps: a. Select the appropriate time zone from the drop-down list at the top of the dialog box.

b. If instructed by the customer, select the Automatically adjust clock for daylight saving changes check box.

c. Click Apply. Record time zone and daylight savings information for reference if the server hard drive fails and must be restored.

4. Click the Date & Time tab. The Date/Time Properties dialog box appears with the Date & Time page open (

Figure 2-22 ).

Task 10: Set Management Server Date and Time 2-47

2

Installation Tasks

Figure 2-22 Date/Time Properties Dialog Box (Date & Time Tab)

5. To change the date and time use the following steps: a. Select the month from the drop-down list under Date.

b. Click the up or down arrow adjacent to the year field and select the desired year.

c. Click the day on the calendar to select the desired date.

d. Click in the time field and enter the desired time, then click the adjacent up or down arrow and select AM or PM.

e. Click Apply. Record date and time information for reference if the server hard drive fails and must be restored.

6. Close all dialog boxes and return to the Windows desktop.

Task 11: Configure the Call-Home Feature (Optional)

The management server has an optional call-home feature that provides automatic dial-out through the internal modem to a service support facility to report switch problems. The problem is logged into the support facility’s tracking system for resolution. To configure the call-home feature:

2-48 McDATA Sphereon 4400 Fabric Switch Installation and Service Manual

Installation Tasks

2

1. There are two jacks on the server internal modem: one for the call-home connection (LINE), and the other for a telephone

(PHONE). Ensure a telephone cable is routed and connected to the LINE jack at the rear of the management server (connected

while performing Task 6: Unpack, Inspect, and Install the

Management Server ).

2. Double-click the Call Home Configuration icon at the Windows desktop. The Call Home Configuration dialog box appears.

3. Enter the telephone number for the technical support center

(800-752-4572) at the Call Center Phone Number field. Include necessary information, such as the country code, area code, or any prefix required to access a telephone line outside the facility.

4. Enter the telephone number for access to the local server at the

Local Phone Number field. Include necessary information such as the country code or area code.

5. Click OK to save the configured telephone numbers and close the dialog box.

Task 12: Assign User Names and Passwords

In addition to password access for the Windows operating system, users must be configured for SAN management application access.

To assign application user names and passwords use the following steps:

1. The EFCM Log In dialog box appears at the Windows desktop.

The dialog box was opened when performing Task 8: Configure

Management Server Information .

2. Type the SAN management application default user ID and password and select a server or IP address from the Network

Address drop-down list.

NOTE: The default user ID is Administrator and the default password is password.

Both are case-sensitive.

3. Click Login. The application opens and the EFCM main window appears.

4. Select Users from the SAN menu. The EFCM Server Users dialog box appears.

Task 12: Assign User Names and Passwords 2-49

2

Installation Tasks

5. Click Add. The Add User dialog box appears ( Figure 2-23 ).

Figure 2-23 Add User Dialog Box

6. Enter information in fields as directed by the customer:

• Description - Type a new user name up to 16 alphanumeric characters in length. Control characters and spaces are not valid. The user name is case-sensitive.

• Email Address - Type one or more new user e-mail addresses.

Separate multiple addresses with a semicolon.

• User ID - Type a unique user ID for the new user.

• Secure password - Type a password up to 16 alphanumeric characters in length. Control characters and spaces are not valid. The password is case-sensitive.

• Retype Password - To confirm the password, enter the password exactly as in the Secure Password field.

7. Enable the Enable check box to enable e-mail notification for the new user. An unchecked box indicates e-mail notification is not enabled.

8. Select (click) the Filter link to configure event types for which e-mail notification is sent. The Define Filter dialog box appears.

For instructions on defining event filters, refer to the EFC Manager

Software Release 8.7 User Manual (620-000170).

9. Click OK to accept the information. Close all dialog boxes and return to the EFCM main window.

2-50 McDATA Sphereon 4400 Fabric Switch Installation and Service Manual

Installation Tasks

2

Task 13: Configure the Product to the Management Application

To manage a new product, it must be identified to and discovered by the SAN management application. To identify the product use the following steps:

1. Select Setup from the Discover menu (Discover>Setup). The

Discover Setup dialog box appears.

2. Click Add. The Address Properties dialog box appears with the IP

Address

page open by default ( Figure 2-24 ).

Figure 2-24 Address Properties Dialog Box (IP Address Page)

3. Type a product description in the Description field.

4. Type the product IP address (determined by the customer) in the

IP Address field.

5. Type the product subnet mask (determined by the customer) in the Subnet Mask field.

6. Click OK to save the entered information and define the switch to the SAN management application. Close all dialog boxes and return to the EFCM main window.

Task 13: Configure the Product to the Management Application 2-51

2

Installation Tasks

2-52

Task 14: Record or Verify Server Restore Information

Windows operating system configuration information must be recorded to restore the server in case of hard drive failure. Refer to

Appendix B , Restore Management Server for instructions. Record or

verify the following information:

1. Ensure that the network configuration information was recorded

while performing Task 7: Configure Server Password and Network

Addresses

and Task 8: Configure Management Server Information

.

a. The default LCD panel password (9999) or changed password was recorded.

b. The default or changed network addresses were recorded for the private LAN connection (LAN 2):

• IP address - default is 10.1.1.1.

• Subnet mask - default is 255.0.0.0.

• Gateway address - default is blank.

• DNS server IP address - default is blank.

c. The default or changed network addresses were recorded for the public LAN connection (LAN 1):

• IP address - default is 192.168.0.1.

• Subnet mask - default is 255.0.0.0.

• Gateway address - default is blank.

• DNS server IP address - default is blank.

d. The default computer name (MGMTSERVER) or changed computer name was recorded.

2. Ensure that the user passwords and other information were

recorded while performing Task 9: Configure Windows Operating

System Users .

3. Ensure the date and time information was recorded while

performing Task 10: Set Management Server Date and Time

.

a. Ensure that the time zone was recorded.

b. Ensure if the management server was set to automatically adjust the clock for daylight savings time changes.

4. Record the Product ID number:

McDATA Sphereon 4400 Fabric Switch Installation and Service Manual

Installation Tasks

2 a. Open the system properties dialog box from the Windows desktop (Start>Settings>Control Panel.>System). The System

Properties dialog box appears with the General tab open by default. b. Record the Product ID number listed under the Registered to heading.

c. Close all dialog boxes and return to the Windows desktop.

Task 15: Verify Product-to-Server Communication

Communication must be verified between the product and server

(SAN management and Element Manager applications). To verify communication use the following steps:

1. At the SAN management application main window (physical map or product list), inspect the shape and color of the status symbol associated with the product icon.

Table 2-4

explains operational states and associated symbols.

Table 2-4 Operational States and Symbols

Operational State

Operational - Communication is established, the product is operational, and no failures are indicated. Go to

Task 16: Configure PFE Key

(Optional) .

Status Symbol

No status symbol

Degraded - Communication is established, but the product is operating in degraded mode and requires service. This condition is typical if a port or redundant FRU fails. Go to

step 2 .

Failed - Communication is established, but the product failed and requires immediate service. Go to

step 2 .

Status Unknown - Product status is unknown because of a network

communication failure. Go to step 2

.

2. Right-click the product icon at the SAN management application’s physical map. A pop-up menu appears.

3. Select the Element Manager option from the pop-up menu. When the Element Manager application opens, the last view accessed by a user opens by default. As an example, the Hardware View

(

Figure 2-25

) is shown.

Task 15: Verify Product-to-Server Communication 2-53

2

Installation Tasks

Figure 2-25 Hardware View

4. Inspect product status at the Hardware view and perform one of the following steps:

• If the product appears operational (no FRU alert symbols and

a green circle at the status bar), go to Task 16: Configure PFE Key

(Optional) .

• If product operation appears degraded or a failure is indicated

(FRU alert symbols and a yellow triangle or red diamond on

the status bar), go to MAP 0000: Start MAP

to isolate the problem.

2-54 McDATA Sphereon 4400 Fabric Switch Installation and Service Manual

Installation Tasks

2

Task 16: Configure PFE Key (Optional)

Follow the procedures in this section to install optional features using

PFE key.

After purchasing a feature, obtain the PFE key by following the enclosed instructions. The key is an alphanumeric string consisting of uppercase and lowercase characters that must be entered exactly, including dashes.

Keys are encoded to work only with the serial number of the installed product. Note down the key. This will help you to re-install the feature when required.

If the product fails and is replaced, obtain new PFE keys from the technical support center (800-752-4572 or [email protected]

).

You will have to provide the serial numbers of the failed and replacement products and the old PFE key number or transaction code.

The optional features that you can install using PFE keys are listed below:

• Element Manager application - This feature enables out-of-band product management through an Element Manager interface.

Products are delivered with the application enabled for a 31-day grace period. Before grace period expiration, the application must be reactivated through a PFE key.

During the grace period, a No Feature Key dialog box appears when the Element Manager application opens. Click OK to close the dialog box and use the application. In addition, the message

Element Manager license key has not been installed - Please follow up instructions to update permanent key appears splashed across all views.

• Flexport Technology - A Flexport Technology product is delivered at a discount without all Fibre Channel ports enabled.

When additional port capacity is required, the remaining ports are incrementally enabled through this feature.

• Full volatility - This feature ensures no Fibre Channel frames are stored after the product is powered off or fails, and a memory dump file (that possibly includes classified data frames) is not included as part of the data collection procedure.

Task 16: Configure PFE Key (Optional) 2-55

2

Installation Tasks

• N_Port ID virtualization - This feature allows up to 256 Fibre

Channel addresses to be assigned to an N_Port.

• OpenTrunking - This feature provides dynamic load balancing of

Fibre Channel traffic across multiple ISLs.

• SANtegrity (enhanced) - This feature enhances security in SANs by combining the functions of SANtegrity authentication

(restricting access to Fibre Channel elements) and SANtegrity binding (controlling large and mixed fabrics).

After obtaining a PFE key, install the feature as follows:

1. Select Features from the Configure menu at any view. The Configure

Feature Key dialog box appears.

2. Click New. The New Feature Key dialog box appears (

Figure 2-26

).

Figure 2-26 New Feature Key Dialog Box

3. Type the PFE key (case-sensitive xxxx-xxxx-xxxx-xx format) and click OK. The Enable Feature Key dialog box appears.

4. Ensure that the feature description appears in the New Features panel and click OK. A Warning dialog box appears with the message Installing this feature key causes an IPL and momentary loss of the LAN connection. The operation is nondisruptive to Fibre Channel traffic. Do you wish to continue?

5. Click Yes to enable the PFE key and IPL the product. Close all dialog boxes and return to the Element Manager application.

Task 17: Configure Management Server (Optional)

Folllow the procedures in this section to configure the open systems management server and enable OSI host control of the product.

2-56 McDATA Sphereon 4400 Fabric Switch Installation and Service Manual

Installation Tasks

2

NOTE: Implementing host control requires installation of a SAN management application on the OSI server. Management applications include Veritas ® SANPoint™ Control or Tivoli ® NetView ® .

To configure the management server, use the following steps:

1. Select Open Systems Management Server from the Configure menu at any view. Two submenu options display:

• Enable OSMS.

• Host Control Prohibited.

2. Enable or disable OSMS by selecting the Enable OSMS option.

Check the box to enable the server.

3. Allow or prohibit host (OSI server) control by selecting the Host

Control Prohibited option. Check the box to prohibit a host management program from changing configuration and connectivity parameters on the product. The host program has read-only access to configuration and connectivity parameters.

Task 18: Set Product Date and Time

Log entries are stamped with the date and time received from the product. To set the effective date and time for the product:

1. Select Date/Time from the Configure menu (Configure>Date/Time).

The Configure Date and Time dialog box appears (

Figure 2-27

).

Date and time can be set manually, or set to be periodically updated by the SAN management application (the product and application synchronize at least once daily).

Task 18: Set Product Date and Time 2-57

2

Installation Tasks

Figure 2-27 Configure Date and Time Dialog Box

2. To set date and time manually: a. Disable (uncheck) the Periodic Date/Time Synchronization check box. The Date and Time fields become active.

b. Configure the Date field:

• Month (MM): 1 through 12.

• Day (DD): 1 through 31.

• Year (YYYY): greater than 1980.

c. Configure the Time field:

• Hour (HH): 0 through 23.

• Minute (MM): 0 through 59.

• Second (SS): 0 through 59.

d. Click Activate to set the switch date and time and close the dialog box.

3. Use the following procedure to set the product to periodically synchronize date and time with the SAN management application: a. Click the Periodic Date/Time Synchronization check box to select the option. b. Do one of the following:

2-58 McDATA Sphereon 4400 Fabric Switch Installation and Service Manual

Installation Tasks

2

• Click Activate to enable synchronization and close the dialog box. Product date and time synchronize with the

SAN management application date and time at the next update period (at least once daily).

• Click Sync Now to synchronize the product and SAN management application immediately. The Date and Time

Synced information dialog box appears. Click OK to synchronize the date and time and close the dialog box, then click Activate to enable synchronization and close the

Configure Date and Time dialog box.

Task 19: Configure the Element Manager Application

To configure the Element Manager application, selectively perform the following tasks according to customer requirements:

Product

Ports

Management

Security

Interswitch links

• Identification

• Product parameters

• Fabric parameters.

• Basic information

• Buffer-to-buffer credits (BB_Credits)

• N_Port identifier virtualization (NPIV).

• SNMP trap message recipients

• Threshold alerts

• EFCM Basic Edition interface access

• Telnet access

• e-mail, Ethernet event, and call-home event notification.

• SANtegrity authentication

• Enterprise Fabric Mode

• SANtegrity binding.

• OpenTrunking

• Preferred path

• ISL port fencing

Configure Product

Identification

Follow the procedures in this section to configure the product identification.

Task 19: Configure the Element Manager Application 2-59

2

Installation Tasks

NOTE: The Name, Location, and Contact variables correspond respectively to the SNMP variables sysName, sysLocation, and sysContact, and are used by management workstations when obtaining product data.

1. Select Operating Parameters from the Configure menu

(Configure>Operating Parameters). The Operating Parameters dialog box appears.

2. Click the Identification tab.(

Figure 2-28

).

2-60

Figure 2-28 Identification View c. Type a unique product name of 24 alphanumeric characters or less in the Name field. If installed on a public LAN, the name should reflect the product’s Ethernet network domain name system (DNS) host name.

d. Type a product description of 255 alphanumeric characters or less in the Description field.

e. Type the product’s physical location (255 alphanumeric characters or less) in the Location field.

f. Type the name of a contact person (255 alphanumeric characters or less) in the Contact field.

McDATA Sphereon 4400 Fabric Switch Installation and Service Manual

Configure Product

Parameters

Installation Tasks

2

3. Click Activate to save the information and close the dialog box.

Follow the procedures in this section to configure product operating parameters.

1. Set the product offline. Refer to

Setting Online State for

instructions.

2. Select Operating Parameters from the Configure menu

(Configure>Operating Parameters).

3. Click the Domain tab (

Figure 2-29

).

Figure 2-29 Configure Switch Parameters Dialog Box a. Select the Domain ID Offset value from the drop-down list.

Values available in the drop-down list are 0, 32, 64, 96

(default), 128, 160, and 192. Domain IDs minus the offset are still in the 1-31 range.

b. Type a value between 1 - 31 in the Preferred Domain ID field.

This value uniquely identifies each fabric element. At the

Preferred Domain ID field, type a value between 1 through 31.

This value uniquely identifies each fabric element.

Task 19: Configure the Element Manager Application 2-61

2

Installation Tasks

Configure Fabric

Parameters

NOTE: An ISL between fabric elements with identical domain IDs segments and prevents communication.

If the Insistent Domain ID field is enabled, the value configured in the Preferred Domain ID field becomes the active domain ID when the fabric initializes.

c. Enable (check) the Rerouting Delay field if you want the traffic to be delayed through the fabric by the user-specified error detect time out value (E_D_TOV). This delay ensures that

Fibre Channel frames are delivered to their destination in order.

d. Enable (check) the Domain RSCNs field if you want the attached devices to register to receive notification when other devices change state.

e. Enable (check) the Suppress Zoning RSCNs on Zone Set

Activations field if you do not want the RSCNs to be transmitted when a zone set is activated.

f. Enable (check) the Isolate on zone activations field if you want only devices that require RSCN notification, due to a zoning configuration change, to receive RSCNs. Do not enable this option if Suppress on zone set activations is enabled because

RSCNs will not be sent to attached devices.

g. Enable (check) the Node Port Virtualization field for N_Port identifier virtualization (NPIV). NPIV allows multiple (up to

256) F

4. Click Activate to save the information and close the dialog box.

5. Set the product online. Refer to

Setting Online State for

instructions.

Follow the procedures in this section to configure fabric operating parameters.

To configure the fabric operating parameters, use the following steps:

1. Set the product offline. Refer to

Setting Online State for

instructions.

2. Select Operating Parameters from the Configure menu

(Configure>Operating Parameters). The Operating Parameters dialog box appears.

2-62 McDATA Sphereon 4400 Fabric Switch Installation and Service Manual

3. Click the Fabric tab (

Figure 2-30

).

Installation Tasks

2

Figure 2-30 Configure Fabric Parameters Dialog Box a. Type a value between 10 - 1200 tenths of a second (1-120 seconds) in the R_A_TOV field. This value must be greater than the E_D_TOV value.

b. Type a value between 2 - 600 tenths of a second (0.2 - 60 seconds) in the E_D_TOV field. This must be greater lesser than the R_A_TOV value.

NOTE: Fabric elements must be set to the same R_A_TOV and

E_D_TOV values. An ISL between fabric elements with different values segments and prevents communication.

c. Select from the Switch Priority drop-down list to designate the fabric’s principal switch. The principal switch is assigned a priority of 1 and controls the allocation and distribution of domain IDs for all fabric elements (including itself). Available selections are Default, Principal, and Never Principal.

Principal is the highest priority setting, Default is next, and

Never Principal is the lowest. At least one switch in a fabric must be set as Principal or Default. If all switches are set to

Never Principal , all ISLs segment.

Task 19: Configure the Element Manager Application 2-63

2

Installation Tasks

Configure Ports

d. Select from the Interop Mode drop-down list to set the product operating mode. This setting affects the management mode and does not affect port operation. Available selections are:

• McDATA Fabric 1.0 - Select this option if the product is fabric-attached only to other McDATA directors or switches operating in McDATA fabric mode.

• Open Fabric 1.0 - Select this option (default) for managing heterogeneous fabrics and if the product is fabric-attached to McDATA directors or switches and other open-fabric compliant switches.

NOTE: With Open Fabric 1.0 enabled, the default zone set is disabled.

e. Select from one of the options to change the ISL cost.

• By Port Speed - The fastest fabric path is determined by port (ISL) speed. Cost is inversely proportional to speed.

• Ignore Port Speed - ISL speed is ignored, and the fastest fabric path is determined by the number of hops. Cost is directly proportional to hop count.

4. Click Activate to save the information and close the dialog box.

5. Set the product online. Refer to

Setting Online State for

instructions.

Follow the procedure in this section to configure the ports for the product.

To configure Fibre Channel ports, use the following steps:

1. Select Ports from the Configure menu (Configure>Ports). The

Configure Ports

dialog box appears ( Figure 2-31 ).

2-64 McDATA Sphereon 4400 Fabric Switch Installation and Service Manual

Installation Tasks

2

Figure 2-31 Configure Ports Dialog Box a. Type a port name of 24 alphanumeric characters or less, for each port to be configured, in the Name field. The port name should characterize the device to which the port is attached.

b. The switch provides a port buffer pool of 150 receive

BB_Credits. Each port can be assigned between two and 120 credits, provided the total credits allocated to all ports does not exceed 150. The default value is six credits per port. Type the desired value in the RX BB_Credit column.

c. Enable the check box in the LIN Alerts column to enable or disable link incident (LIN) alerts (default is enabled). A check mark indicates alerts are enabled. When enabled and a port incident occurs, an alert indicator (yellow triangle) appears at the Hardware View and a message is sent to e-mail recipients.

d. Enable the check box in the FAN column to enable or disable the fabric address notification feature (default is enabled). A check mark indicates FAN is enabled. When enabled, an

FL_Port transmits FAN frames after loop initialization to verify FC-AL devices are still logged in.

e. Select from the drop-down list in the Type column to configure the port type. Available selections are fabric port (F_Port), expansion port (E_Port), generic port (G_Port), generic mixed port (GX_Port), and fabric mixed port (FX_Port).

Task 19: Configure the Element Manager Application 2-65

2

Installation Tasks

Configure SNMP

f. Select from the drop-down list in the Speed column to configure the port transmission rate. Available selections are auto-negotiate between speeds (Negotiate), 1.0625 Gbps operation (1 Gb/sec), 2.1250 Gbps operation (2 Gb/sec), and

4.2500 Gbps operation (4 Gb/sec).

g. The NPIV feature must be installed to allow multiple Fibre

Channel addresses to be assigned to an N_Port. Refer to

Installing PFE Keys (Optional) for instructions. Type the desired

value (1 - 256) in the NPIV Login Limit column.

h. Enable the check box in the Port Binding column to enable or disable the feature (default is disabled). A check mark indicates binding is enabled and the port can connect only to a device with a WWN listed in the Bound WWN column.

i. Type the WWN or nickname of the device attached to the port in the Bound WWN column.

• If port binding is enabled and a WWN or nickname appears in the Bound WWN column, only the specified device can connect.

• If port binding is enabled but no WWN or nickname appears in the Bound WWN column, no device can connect.

• If port binding is disabled, any device can connect.

2. Click Activate to save the information and close the dialog box.

Follow the procedures in this section to configure names, write authorizations, addresses, and UDP port numbers for SNMP trap message recipients. To configure recipient workstations:

1. Select Operating Parameters from the Configure menu(Configure>Operating Parameters). The Operating

Parameters dialog box appears.

1. Select the SNMP tab (

Figure 2-32

).

2-66 McDATA Sphereon 4400 Fabric Switch Installation and Service Manual

Installation Tasks

2

Figure 2-32 Configure SNMP Dialog Box a. Enable the Enable SNMP Agent and Enable Authentication Traps to activate the installed agent and enable transmission of

SNMP trap messages to recipients.

b. Select the appropriate FA MIB from the Fibre Alliance MIB Trap

Version drop-down list. Valid selections are FA MIB Version

3.0

or FA MIB Version 3.1.

c. Type a community name of 32 alphanumeric characters or less, for each configured recipient, in the Community Name field. The name is incorporated in SNMP trap messages to ensure against unauthorized viewing.

d. Enable the check the box in the Write Authorization column to enable write authorization for the trap recipient (default is disabled). When enabled, a configured user can change sysContact , sysName, and sysLocation SNMP variables.

e. Type the IP address or DNS host name of the trap recipient

(SNMP management workstation) in the Trap Recipient field. It is recommended the IP address be used.

f. Type a decimal port number in the UDP Port Number field to specify the UDP port number

2. Click Activate to save the information and close the dialog box.

Task 19: Configure the Element Manager Application 2-67

2

Installation Tasks

Configure Threshold

Alerts

A threshold alert notifies users when E_Port or F_Port transmit (Tx) or receive (Rx) throughput reaches or exceeds a specified value.

Alerts are indicated by:

• An attention indicator (yellow triangle) associated with a port at the Hardware View, Port List View, or Port Properties dialog box.

• Data recorded in the Threshold Alert Log.

To configure threshold alerts use the following steps:

1. Select Threshold Alerts from the Configure menu

(Configure>Threshold Alerts). The Configure Threshold Alerts dialog box appears. If alerts are configured, they display in table format showing the alert name, type, and state.

2. Click New. The New Threshold Alert dialog box appears

(

Figure 2-33

).

Figure 2-33 New Threshold Alert Dialog Box

3. Type a name (64 alphanumeric characters or less) in the Threshold

Alert Name field.

4. Select from the Threshold Type drop-down list to configure the alert type. Available selections are:

2-68 McDATA Sphereon 4400 Fabric Switch Installation and Service Manual

Installation Tasks

2

• Receive - An alert occurs if the threshold value for receive throughput is reached or exceeded.

• Transmit - An alert occurs if the threshold value for transmit throughput is reached or exceeded.

• Receive and Transmit - An alert occurs if the threshold value for either throughput is reached or exceeded.

5. Enter a percentage from 1 through 100 in the Threshold % utilization field or use the arrow buttons to increase and decrease values. When throughput reaches this percentage of port capacity, a threshold alert occurs.

6. Enter the Notification interval in minutes in which throughput is measured and threshold notifications can occur. The valid range is 5 minutes to 70,560 minutes.

7. Select the alert Rule

• Select If the threshold is ever exceeded if you want the alert to occur whenever the threshold limit is exceeded.

• Select If the Threshold is exceeded for if you want to specify cumulative minutes that the % utilization should exist during the notification interval before an alert occurs. Enter a value in the field to the right of the selection. The valid range is 1 to the value set for the Notification interval.

8. Either select a Port Type or Selected ports

• If you select a Port Type, the alert generates for all ports configured as the port type you selected.

• If you select Selected ports, you can select individual ports by selecting the check box by each port number or set all ports. Selecting Set All places a check mark against the port number. Selecting Clear All clears the check marks.

9. Click OK. The Configure Threshold Alerts dialog box appears the name, type, and state of the alert that you just configured.

10. To activate the alert, select the alert information that appears in the Configure Threshold Alerts table and click Activate.

11. To deactivate an existing alert, select the alert information that appears in the Configure Threshold Alerts table and click

Deactivate.

Task 19: Configure the Element Manager Application 2-69

2

Installation Tasks

Enable EFCM Basic

Edition and Telnet

Access

Configure, Enable, and Test E-mail

Notification

Follow the procedure in this section to enable EFCM Basic Edition interface and Telnet access through the maintenance port.

To enable EFCM Basic Edition interface and Telnet access through the maintenance port using the Element Manager, use the following steps:

1. Select Authentication from the Security menu

(Security>Authentication). The Configure Authentication window appears.

2. Select Enable Web Server/Enable Telnet Access in the window.

3. Click Add to add users who will be permitted to have EFCM Basic

Edition interface / Telnet access. The Add/Edit user window appears.

4. Type the User ID and Password of the user to be added. Confirm the password in the Retype field. Click OK to return to the

Configure Authentication Window.

5. Click Apply. The Security Change Confirmation Status - Users window appears.

6. Click Start to apply the settings.

Follow the procedure in this section to configure, enable, and test e-mail and simple mail transfer protocol (SMTP) addresses to receive event notifications. Configuration and test are performed at the SAN management application. E-mail notification is enabled at the

Element Manager application. To perform the procedures:

1. Select Email from the Monitor menu (Monitor>Event

Notification>Email) . The Email Event Notification Setup dialog box

appears ( Figure 2-34

).

2-70 McDATA Sphereon 4400 Fabric Switch Installation and Service Manual

Installation Tasks

2

Figure 2-34 Email Event Notification Setup Dialog Box

2. Select Enable Email Event Notification check box to enable e-mail transmission to configured addresses.

3. Type the IP address or DNS host name of the SMTP server in the

E-mail Server field.

4. Type the e-mail address to which replies should be sent in the

Reply Address field.

5. Type the length of time the application should wait between notifications at the Summary Interval field,. Choose seconds, minutes , or hours from the associated drop-down list.

6. Click User List to specify users for notification,. The EFCM Server

Users dialog box appears.

7. Enable the check box in the Email column to enable notification for a user. An unchecked box indicates e-mail notification is not enabled.

8. Click OK to close the EFCM Server Users dialog box.

9. Select the Send to radio button (and type recipient IP addresses in the adjacent field) , or select the Send to all users enabled for notification radio button at the E-mail Test Options field.

10. Click Send Test Email. A test message is sent to configured recipients.

11. Click OK to save the information and close the dialog box.

12. Maximize the Element Manager application.

Task 19: Configure the Element Manager Application 2-71

2

Installation Tasks

13. Select Enable E-Mail Notification from the Maintenance menu at any view. A check mark appears to indicate e-mail notification for the product is enabled.

NOTE: The enable function must be activated for each product through the Element Manager application.

Configure and

Enable Ethernet

Events

Perform this procedure to configure and enable Ethernet events. An

Ethernet event is recorded (after a user-specified time interval) when the switch-to-management server communication link drops.

To configure and enable Ethernet events, use the following steps:

1. Select Ethernet Event from the Monitor menu in the EFCM main window. The Configure Ethernet Events dialog box appears..

2. Enable the Enable Ethernet Events check box. .

3. Type a value between 10 - 120 minutes in the Ethernet Timeout field.

4. Click OK to close the dialog box.

Configure, Enable, and Test Call-Home

Event Notification

Telephone numbers and other information for the call-home feature are configured through the Windows dial-up networking application. Refer to

Task 11: Configure the Call-Home Feature (Optional)

for configuration instructions.

To configure, enable, and test call-home event notification, use the following steps:

NOTE: The call-home feature may not be available if the EFCM Lite application is installed on a customer-supplied platform.

1. Select Call Home from the Monitor menu (Monitor>Event

Notification>Call Home) in the EFCM main window. The Call Home

Event Notification Setup dialog box appears..

2. Enable the Enable Call Home Event Notification check box.

NOTE: The enable function must be activated for each product through the Element Manager application.

3. Click Send Test. A call-home test message is sent.

2-72 McDATA Sphereon 4400 Fabric Switch Installation and Service Manual

Configure Security

Installation Tasks

2

4. Click OK to close the dialog box.

5. Maximize the Element Manager application.

6. Select Enable Call Home Notification from the Maintenance menu at any view. A check mark appears to indicate call-home event notification is enabled.

This section describes optional product security features configured through the SAN management or Element Manager applications. The enhanced SANtegrity PFE key must be installed. Refer to

Installing

PFE Keys (Optional)

for instructions. Features include:

• SANtegrity authentication - Select SANtegrity Authentication from the Configure menu at the Element Manager application(Configure>SANtergrity Authentication). The SANtegrity

Authentication dialog box provides five pages (tabs) to configure optional authentication features, including:

— Users - Configure password-protected administrator and operator access to the SAN management and Element

Manager applications.

— Software - Configure CHAP-controlled management interface access (out-of-band and inband) to the product.

— Devices - Configure a CHAP secret authentication sequence for nodes (devices) attached to the product through E_Ports or

N_ports.

— IP Access Control - Configure a list of device IP addresses or a range of device IP addresses authorized to communicate with the product.

— RADIUS Servers - Configure RADIUS servers. A RADIUS server stores and authenticates passwords and CHAP secrets.

• Enterprise Fabric Mode - Use the Enterprise Fabric Mode option from the Configure menu (Configure>EFM) to enable or disable

EFM. Fabric binding is activated when EFM is enabled.

• Fabric binding - Use the Fabric Binding from the Configure option from the Configure menu (Configure>Fabric Binding) to lock parameters of a fabric in accordance with the user configuration.

Fabric binding creates a membership list of element (director or switch) Domain_IDs and WWNs that can communicate with the product.

Task 19: Configure the Element Manager Application 2-73

2

Installation Tasks

Configure

Interswitch Links

• Switch binding - Use the Switch Binding option from the

Configure menu (Configure>Switch binding) to create a membership list of node (device) WWNs that can attach to the product. The specified connection policy restricts product access through E_Ports, F_Ports, or in general (all ports).

To configure optional features, refer to the EFC Manager Software

Release 8.7 User Manual (620-000170) for instructions.

This section describes ISL performance features configured through the SAN management or Element Manager applications. The

OpenTrunking feature requires PFE key installation. Refer to

Installing PFE Keys (Optional)

for instructions. Features include:

• OpenTrunking - Use the OpenTrunking option from the Configure menu (Configure>Open Trunking) to optimize ISL bandwidth. The feature monitors data rates (congestion and BB_Credit starvation) through multiple ISLs and load balances traffic (from congested to uncongested links) accordingly.

• Preferred path - Use the Preferred Path option from the Configure menu (Configure>Preferred Path) to specify and configure one or more ISL data paths between multiple fabric elements. At each fabric element, a preferred path consists of a source port, exit port, and destination Domain_ID.

• Port fencing - Use the Port Fencing option from the Configure menu (Configure>Port fencing) to minimize ISLs that bounce

(repeatedly attempt to establish a connection), causing disruptive fabric rebuilds. Fencing defines a bounce threshold that when reached, automatically blocks the disruptive E_Port.

To configure features, refer to the EFC Manager Software Release 8.7

User Manual (620-000170) for instructions. If no additional options or features are to be configured, continue to the next task.

2-74 McDATA Sphereon 4400 Fabric Switch Installation and Service Manual

Installation Tasks

2

Task 20: Back Up Configuration Data

Follow the procedures in this section to backup server configuration data and create a base restore CD.

Critical configuration data for EFCM is stored on the management server hard drive in the following directories:

• C:\Program Files\EFCM 8.7\CallHome

• C:\Program Files\EFCM 8.7\Client

• C:\Program Files\EFCM 8.7\Server.

The server is configured to automatically mirror the contents of these directories to the CD-RW drive anytime directory contents change or the server is rebooted. The directories contain all SAN management configuration data, log files, firmware versions, call-home and other configuration data; and are used to restore the server operating environment in case of hard drive failure.

The server does not back up Windows operating system data, such as user names, passwords, date and time, and network information.

This information was recorded while performing installation tasks,

and verified while performing Task 14: Record or Verify Server Restore

Information

.

To back up server configuration data and create a base restore CD:

1. Insert a blank rewritable CD into the CD-RW drive and format the CD: a. Locate the InCD icon (1) at the right side of the task bar at the

Windows desktop (

Figure 2-35

). The icon is indicated by a red down arrow.

Figure 2-35 InCD Icon (Unformatted CD) b. Right-click the icon and select Format (F). The first window of the InCD wizard appears.

Task 20: Back Up Configuration Data 2-75

2

Installation Tasks c. Click Next to proceed to the second window of the InCD wizard. Use default parameters displayed at each window, and click Next and Finish as appropriate to complete the CD formatting task.

d. When the rewritable CD is formatted, the red down arrow associated with the InCD icon changes to a green up arrow.

2. Back up the product configuration file to the server. For instructions, refer to

Back Up Configuration .

3. Close the Element manager application and return to the EFCM management application.

4. Close the EFCM by selecting Shutdown from the SAN menu. A

EFCM Message dialog box appears. Click Yes to close the application.

5. Reboot the server to cause directory contents to be written to the blank CD: a. Restart Windows. During the reboot process, the LAN connection between the server and browser-capable PC drops momentarily, and the TightVNC viewer displays a network error.

b. Click Login again after the management server reboots. The

VNC Authentication screen appears.

c. Type the default password and click OK. The Welcome to

Windows dialog box appears.

d. Type the default password and click OK. The Welcome to

Windows dialog box appears.

NOTE: The default TightVNC viewer password is password. e. Click the Send Ctrl-Alt-Del button at the top of the window to log on to the server desktop. The Log On to Windows dialog box appears.

NOTE: Do not simultaneously press the Ctrl, Alt, and Delete keys.

This action logs the user on to the browser-capable PC, not the server.

f. Type the default Windows user name and password and click

OK . The server’s Windows desktop opens and the EFCM Log

In dialog box appears.

2-76 McDATA Sphereon 4400 Fabric Switch Installation and Service Manual

Installation Tasks

2

NOTE: The default Windows user name is Administrator and the default password is password. Both are case-sensitive.

g. Type the SAN management application default user ID and password and select a server or IP address from the Network

Address drop-down list.

NOTE: The default user ID is Administrator and the default password is password. Both are case-sensitive.

6. Click Login. The application opens and the EFCM main window appears.

7. Remove the base restore CD from the CD-RW drive and store in a safe location. Insert a blank rewritable CD into the CD-RW drive and format the CD. Refer to

step 1

for formatting instructions.

8. Go to Task 21: Cable Fibre Channel Ports .

Task 21: Cable Fibre Channel Ports

Follow the procedures in this section to cable Fibre Channel ports and connect devices.

To cable Fibre Channel ports and connect devices, use the following steps:

1. Route fiber-optic jumper cables from customer-specified Fibre

Channel devices, FC-AL devices, or fabric elements to product ports.

2. Connect device cables to SFP optical port transceivers as directed by the customer.

3. Perform one of the following:

• If the product is installed on a table or desktop, bundle and secure Fibre Channel cables as directed by the customer.

• If the product is installed in a customer-supplied equipment rack, bundle Fibre Channel cables from the product and other equipment (groups of 16 maximum), and secure them as directed by the customer.

Task 21: Cable Fibre Channel Ports 2-77

2

Installation Tasks

• If the product is installed in a Fabricenter equipment cabinet, bundle Fibre Channel cables from the product and other equipment (groups of 16 maximum), and secure them in the cable management area at the front-left side of the cabinet.

Task 22: Configure Zoning (Optional)

Perform this procedure to configure, change, add, or delete zones; and to configure, change, enable, or disable zone sets.

• Zone - A zone is a group of devices that can access each other through port-to-port connections. Devices in the same zone can recognize and communicate with each other; devices in different zones cannot.

• Zone set - A zone set is a group of zones that is activated or deactivated as a single entity across all managed products in either a single switch or a multiswitch fabric. Only one zone set can be active at one time.

The following naming conventions apply to zones and zone sets:

• All names must be unique and may not differ by case only. For example, zone-1 and Zone-1 are both valid individually, but are not considered unique.

• The first character of a zone set name must be a letter

(A through Z or a through z).

• A zone set name cannot contain spaces.

• Valid characters are alphanumerics and the caret ( ^ ), hyphen ( - ), underscore ( _ ), or dollar ( $ ) symbols.

• A zone set name can have a maximum of 64 characters.

If the installation is performed from the EFCM Basic Edition interface, refer to the McDATA EFCM Basic Edition User Manual

(620-000240) for instructions. If the installation is performed from the management server, refer to the EFC Manager Software Release 8.7 User

Manual (620-000170) for instructions.

2-78 McDATA Sphereon 4400 Fabric Switch Installation and Service Manual

Installation Tasks

2

Task 23: Connect Product to a Fabric Element (Optional)

To provide fabric-attached Fibre channel connectivity for devices connected to the product, connect the product to an expansion port

(E_Port) of a fabric element (switch or director). Any switch can be used to form this ISL. To connect the product to a fabric element and create an ISL use the following steps:

1. Ensure that the fabric element is accessible by the EFCM Basic

Edition interface or defined to the SAN management application.

If the fabric element must be defined, refer to the appropriate switch or director installation manual for instructions.

2. Ensure that the preferred domain ID for the product is unique and does not conflict with the ID of another switch or director participating in the fabric.

— If the domain ID must be changed from the EFCM Basic

Edition, refer to

Task 4: Configure Product at the EFCM Basic

Edition Interface (Optional) .

— If the domain ID must be changed from the management server, refer to

Task 19: Configure the Element Manager

Application .

3. Ensure that the R_A_TOV and E_D_TOV values for the product are identical to the values for all switches or directors participating in the fabric.

— If the values must be changed from the EFCM Basic Edition,

refer to Task 4: Configure Product at the EFCM Basic Edition

Interface (Optional)

.

— If the values must be changed from the management server,

refer to Task 19: Configure the Element Manager Application .

4. Route a multimode fiber-optic cable from a customer-specified

E_Port of the fabric element to the front of the product.

5. Connect the fiber-optic cable to a product port as directed by the customer.

6. If the product is managed through the management server, go to

step 7 . If the product is managed through EFCM Basic Edition:

a. Select Port List from the Product menu at any view. The Port

List View appears.

Task 23: Connect Product to a Fabric Element (Optional) 2-79

2

Installation Tasks b. At the Port List View, click the physical port number of the fabric ISL (connected in

step 5

) in the Port column. Physical properties for the port appear in the lower panel of the view.

c. Ensure that the Operational State field displays Online and the

Reason field displays N/A or is blank. If an ISL segmentation or

other problem is indicated, go to MAP 0000: Start MAP

to isolate the problem. If no problems are indicated, installation tasks are complete.

7. Right-click the product icon at the SAN management application’s physical map, then select Element Manager from the pop-up menu.

8. Click the Hardware tab. The Hardware View ( Figure 2-25 ) appears.

9. Double-click the graphical port connector used for the fabric ISL

(connected in

step 5

). The Port Properties dialog box appears.

10. Ensure that the Link Incident field displays None, the Operational

State field displays Online, and the Reason field displays N/A or is blank. If an ISL segmentation or other problem is indicated, go to

MAP 0000: Start MAP to isolate the problem. If no problems are

indicated, installation tasks are complete.

Task 24: Register with the McDATA Filecenter

To complete the installation, register with the McDATA Filecenter web site to receive e-mail updates and access the following:

• Technical publications.

• Firmware and software upgrades.

• Technical newsletters.

• Release notes.

To register with the Filecenter use the following steps:

1. Open the McDATA home page ( http://mcdata.com

). Select File

Center from the Support menu. The Filecenter home page opens

(

Figure 2-36

).

2. Select (click) the New User Registration option at the top of the home page. The Filecenter’s New User Registration page appears.

Use the page to input user information. The following is required:

• Password.

2-80 McDATA Sphereon 4400 Fabric Switch Installation and Service Manual

• Verify password.

• First, middle, and last name.

Installation Tasks

2

Figure 2-36 McDATA Filecenter Home Page

• E-mail address.

• Company.

• Title.

• Telephone and facsimile numbers.

3. Complete fields as required and click Register. The registration is complete and Filecenter login information is transmitted to the e-mail address specified.

4. Close the Internet session. If no product problems are indicated, installation tasks are complete.

Task 24: Register with the McDATA Filecenter 2-81

2

Installation Tasks

2-82 McDATA Sphereon 4400 Fabric Switch Installation and Service Manual

3

Maintenance Analysis

Procedures

This chapter describes maintenance analysis procedures (MAPs) used by service representatives to fault isolate Sphereon 4400 Fabric Switch problems or failures to the field-replaceable unit (FRU) level. MAPs consist of step-by-step procedures that provide information to interpret system events, isolate a failure to a single FRU, remove and replace the failed FRU, and verify product operation.

Factory Defaults

Table 3-1

lists factory defaults for product passwords (customer and maintenance level), and the product’s Internet Protocol (IP) address, subnet mask, and gateway address.

Table 3-1 Factory-Set Defaults

Item

Customer password

Maintenance password

IP address

Subnet mask

Gateway address

Default password level-2

10.1.1.10

255.0.0.0

0.0.0.0

Factory Defaults 3-1

3

Maintenence Analysis Procedures

Quick Start

Table 3-2

lists and summarizes MAPs. Fault isolation normally

begins at MAP 0000: Start MAP

.

Table 3-2 MAP Summary

MAP

MAP 0000: Start MAP

MAP 0100: Power Distribution Analysis

MAP 0200: POST Failure Analysis

MAP 0300: Loss of Server Communication

MAP 0400: FRU Failure Analysis

MAP 0500: Port Failure or Link Incident Analysis

MAP 0600: Fabric or ISL Problem Analysis

3-14

3-24

3-26

3-38

Page

3-5

3-10

3-13

Table 3-3

lists event codes, corresponding MAP references, and provides a quick start guide if an event code is readily available.

Table 3-3 Event Codes versus Maintenance Action

Event

Code Explanation

011 Login Server database invalid.

021 Name Server database invalid.

031 SNMP request received from unauthorized community.

051 Management Server database invalid.

061 Fabric Controller database invalid.

062 Maximum interswitch hop count exceeded.

063 Remote switch has too many ISLs.

064 ESS response from indicated domain ID not received after maximum tries.

070 E_Port is segmented.

Action

Go to

MAP 0600

.

Go to

MAP 0600

.

Add a community name at the Element Manager.

Go to

MAP 0600

.

Go to

MAP 0600

.

Go to

MAP 0600

.

Go to

MAP 0600

.

No action required.

Go to

MAP 0600

.

3-2 McDATA Sphereon 4400 Fabric Switch Installation and Service Manual

Maintenence Analysis Procedures

3

Table 3-3 Event Codes versus Maintenance Action (Continued)

Event

Code

071

072

073

Explanation

Switch is isolated.

E_Port connected to unsupported switch.

Fabric initialization error.

Action

Go to

MAP 0600

.

Go to

MAP 0600

.

Go to

Collecting Maintenance Data . (EFCM Basic)

or Collecting Maintenance Data (Element

Manager).

074 ILS frame delivery error threshold exceeded.

Go to

Collecting Maintenance Data . (EFCM Basic)

or Collecting Maintenance Data (Element

Manager).

No action required.

075 E_Port segmentation recovery.

080

081

Unauthorized worldwide name.

Invalid attachment.

082 Port fenced.

083 Port set to inactive state.

Go to

MAP 0500

.

Go to

MAP 0500

Go to

Go to

MAP 0600

MAP 0500

.

120 Error detected while processing system management command.

Go to

Collecting Maintenance Data . (EFCM Basic)

or Collecting Maintenance Data (Element

Manager).

121 Zone set activation failed - zone set too large.

Reduce size of zone set and retry.

140 Congestion detected on an ISL.

141 Congestion relieved on an ISL.

142 Low BB_Credit detected on an ISL.

143 Low BB_Credit relieved on an ISL.

150 Fabric merge failure.

151 Fabric configuration failure.

200

201

203

204

Power supply AC voltage failure.

Power supply DC voltage failure.

Power supply AC voltage recovery.

Power supply DC voltage recovery.

Go to

Go to

Go to

MAP 0600

No action required.

MAP 0600

No action required.

MAP 0600

.

.

.

Go to

Collecting Maintenance Data . (EFCM Basic)

or Collecting Maintenance Data (Element

Manager).

Go to

MAP 0100

.

Go to

MAP 0100

.

No action required.

No action required.

Quick Start 3-3

3

Maintenence Analysis Procedures

Table 3-3 Event Codes versus Maintenance Action (Continued)

Event

Code Explanation

206 Power supply removed.

207 Power supply installed.

300 Cooling fan propeller failed.

301 Cooling fan propeller failed.

302 Cooling fan propeller failed.

310 Cooling fan propeller recovered.

311 Cooling fan propeller recovered.

312 Cooling fan propeller recovered.

370 Cooling fan status polling temporarily disabled.

400 Power-up diagnostic failure.

410 Switch reset.

411 Firmware fault.

412 CTP watchdog timer reset.

421 Firmware download complete.

423 CTP firmware download initiated.

426 Multiple ECC single-bit errors occurred.

433 Non-recoverable Ethernet fault.

440 Embedded port hardware failed.

442 Embedded port anomaly detected.

445 ASIC detected a system anomaly.

453 New feature key installed.

506

507

508

Fibre Channel port failure.

Loopback diagnostics port failure.

Fibre Channel port anomaly detected.

Action

Replace FRU.

No action required.

Go to

MAP 0400

.

Go to

MAP 0400

.

Go to

MAP 0400

.

No action required.

No action required.

No action required.

Go to

MAP 0400

.

Go to

MAP 0200

.

No action required.

Go to

MAP 0200

.

Go to

Collecting Maintenance Data . (EFCM Basic)

or Collecting Maintenance Data (Element

Manager).

No action required.

No action required.

Go to

MAP 0400

.

Go to

MAP 0400

.

Go to

MAP 0400

.

No action required.

No action required.

No action required.

Go to

MAP 0500

.

Go to

MAP 0500

.

No action required.

3-4 McDATA Sphereon 4400 Fabric Switch Installation and Service Manual

Table 3-3 Event Codes versus Maintenance Action (Continued)

Event

Code Explanation

510 Optical transceiver hot-insertion initiated.

512 Optical transceiver nonfatal error.

513 Optical transceiver hot-removal completed.

514 Optical transceiver failure.

515 Optical digital diagnostics warning threshold exceeded.

516 Optical digital diagnostics alarm threshold exceeded.

523 FL_Port open request failed.

524 No AL_PA acquired.

525 FL_Port arbitration timeout.

581 Implicit incident.

582 Bit error threshold exceeded.

583 Loss of signal or loss of synchronization.

584 Not operational primitive sequence received.

585 Primitive sequence timeout.

586 Invalid primitive sequence received for current link state.

810 High temperature warning (CTP thermal sensor).

811 Critically hot temperature warning (CTP thermal sensor).

812 CTP card shutdown due to thermal violations.

850 Switch shutdown due to CTP thermal violations.

Action

No action required.

Go to

MAP 0500

.

No action required.

Go to

MAP 0500

Go to

MAP 0500

.

Go to

MAP 0500

.

No action required.

No action required.

No action required.

Go to

MAP 0500

.

Go to

MAP 0500

.

Go to

MAP 0500

.

Go to

MAP 0500

.

Go to

MAP 0500

.

Go to

MAP 0500

.

Go to

MAP 0400

.

Go to

MAP 0400

.

Go to

MAP 0400

.

Go to

MAP 0400

.

Maintenence Analysis Procedures

3

MAP 0000: Start MAP

This MAP describes initial fault isolation beginning at the:

• Failed product.

MAP 0000: Start MAP 3-5

3

Maintenence Analysis Procedures

• Browser-capable PC with Internet connectivity to the firmware- resident Enterprise Fabric Connectivity Manager (EFCM) Basic

Edition interface.

• Rack-mount management server running storage area network

(SAN) management and Element Manager applications.

• Product-attached open systems interconnection (OSI) host console.

1

Prior to fault isolation, acquire:

• A system configuration drawing or planning worksheet that includes the location of the product, management interface, other McDATA products, and device connections.

• The internet protocol (IP) address, gateway address, and subnet mask for the product reporting the problem.

• User IDs and passwords.

Continue to the next step.

2

Ensure the product is connected to facility power. Inspect the product for indications of being powered on, such as:

• An illuminated PWR LED (green) or ERR LED (amber).

• Illuminated LEDs adjacent to Fibre Channel ports.

• Audio emanations and airflow from cooling fans.

Is the product powered on?

YES NO

↓

A power distribution problem is indicated. Go to

Power Distribution Analysis

. Exit MAP.

MAP 0100:

3

At the failed product, inspect the amber ERR LED, amber LEDs associated Fibre Channel ports, and green LEDs on power supply assemblies.

Are amber LEDs illuminated? Are green LEDs on power supply assemblies extinguished?

NO YES

3-6 McDATA Sphereon 4400 Fabric Switch Installation and Service Manual

Maintenence Analysis Procedures

3

↓

A FRU failure, power-on self-test (POST) failure, link incident, interswitch link (ISL) problem, fenced E_Port, or segmented

E_Port is indicated. To obtain event codes that identify the

failure, go to step 10 .

4

Is the product management interface (browser PC, management server, or OSI host console) powered on and operational?

NO

↓

YES

Go to step 7 .

5

Power on the management interface platform and launch the associated management application:

• EFCM Basic Edition - Refer to

Task 4: Configure Product at the

EFCM Basic Edition Interface (Optional) for instructions.

•

SAN management application - Refer to Task 6: Unpack,

Inspect, and Install the Management Server

and

Access the

Management Server Desktop

for instructions.

• OSI host console - Refer to documentation supplied with the host system for instructions.

Was the maintenance action successful?

NO

↓

YES

Go to step 7 .

6

Inspect the management interface for communication link failure.

Observe one of the following:

• A Page cannot be found, Unable to locate the server, HTTP

404 - file not found, or similar message (browser PC).

• The icon representing the product displays a grey square with an exclamation mark (SAN management application).

• A grey square at the alert panel, a No Link status and reason, and no visible product FRUs (Element Manager Hardware View).

Was a failure indication observed?

NO YES

MAP 0000: Start MAP 3-7

3

Maintenence Analysis Procedures

↓

Communication between the product and management interface failed. Go to

MAP 0300: Loss of Server

Communication . Exit MAP.

Perform a data collection and contact the next level of support. Refer to

Collecting Maintenance Data

(EFCM Basic Edition) or Collecting

Maintenance Data (Element Manager). Exit MAP.

7

Inspect product status at the management interface: a. For the product reporting the problem:

— EFCM Basic Edition - Select Hardware from the Product menu at any view. The Hardware View displays.

— SAN management application - At the physical map, right-click the status icon for the product reporting the problem and select Element Manager from the pop-up menu. The Element Manager opens and the Hardware View displays.

— OSI host console - Go to

step 9 .

b. Inspect the status symbol associated with the product. A yellow triangle (attention indicator) indicates the product is operating in degraded mode. A red diamond (failure indicator) indicates the product is not operational.

c. Inspect simulated Fibre Channel ports for a yellow triangle

(attention indicator) that overlays the FRU graphic.

d. Inspect simulated FRUs for a blinking red and yellow diamond

(failed FRU indicator) that overlays the FRU graphic.

Is a failure indicated?

NO

↓

YES

A FRU failure, power-on self-test (POST) failure, link incident, interswitch link (ISL) problem, fenced E_Port, or segmented

E_Port is indicated. To obtain event codes that identify the

failure, go to step 10 .

8

A link incident may have occurred, but the LIN alerts option is not enabled and the yellow triangle (attention indicator) does not appear.

Inspect the Link Incident Log: a. For the product reporting the problem:

3-8 McDATA Sphereon 4400 Fabric Switch Installation and Service Manual

Maintenence Analysis Procedures

3

— EFCM Basic Edition - Select Link Incident from the Logs menu at any view. The Link Incident Log displays.

— Element Manager - Select Link Incident Log from the Logs menu at any view. The Link Incident Log displays.

b. If a link incident occurred, the port number is listed with one of the following messages.

— Link interface incident - implicit incident.

— Link interface incident - bit-error threshold exceeded.

— Link failure - loss of signal or loss of synchronization.

— Link failure - not-operational primitive sequence (NOS) received.

— Link failure - primitive sequence timeout.

— Link failure - invalid primitive sequence received for the current link state.

Did a listed message appear?

NO

↓

YES

A Fibre Channel link incident is indicated. Go to

Port Failure or Link Incident Analysis

. Exit MAP.

MAP 0500:

Perform a data collection and contact the next level of support. Refer to

Collecting Maintenance Data

(EFCM Basic Edition) or Collecting

Maintenance Data (Element Manager). Exit MAP.

9

If an incident occurs on the Fibre Channel link between the product and attached OSI server, a link incident record is generated and sent to the server console using the reporting procedure defined in

T11/99-017v0.

Was a link incident record generated and sent to the OSI server?

NO

↓

YES

A Fibre Channel link incident is indicated. Go to

Port Failure or Link Incident Analysis

. Exit MAP.

MAP 0500:

Perform a data collection and contact the next level of support. Refer to

Collecting Maintenance Data

(EFCM Basic Edition) or Collecting

Maintenance Data (Element Manager). Exit MAP.

MAP 0000: Start MAP 3-9

3

Maintenence Analysis Procedures

10

Inspect the Event Log to obtain failure reason codes: a. For the product reporting the problem:

— EFCM Basic Edition - Select Event from the Logs menu at any view. The Event Log displays.

— Element Manager - Select Event Log from the Logs menu at any view. The Event Log displays.

b. Record the event code and associated date, time, and severity

(Informational, Minor, Major, or Severe).

c. If multiple event codes are found, record all codes and severity levels. Record the date, time, and sequence, and determine if all codes are related to the reported problem. Begin fault isolation with the most recent event code with the highest severity level.

Other codes may accompany this event code, or may indicate a normal indication after a problem is recovered.

Were one or more event codes found?

NO

↓

YES

Go to Table 3-3 to obtain event codes. Exit MAP.

Return to

step 1

and perform fault isolation again. If this is the second time at this step, perform a data collection and contact the next level of support. Refer to

Collecting Maintenance Data (EFCM

Basic Edition) or Collecting Maintenance Data (Element Manager).

Exit MAP.

MAP 0100: Power Distribution Analysis

This MAP describes fault isolation for the product power distribution system, including defective AC power cords or redundant power supplies. The failure indicator is:

• Failure of the product to power on.

• Event code 200 or 201 observed at the Event Log (EFCM Basic

Edition or Element Manager interface).

3-10 McDATA Sphereon 4400 Fabric Switch Installation and Service Manual

Maintenence Analysis Procedures

3

1

Ensure the product is connected to facility power. Inspect the product for indications of being powered on, such as:

• An illuminated PWR LED (green) or ERR LED (amber).

• Illuminated LEDs adjacent to Fibre Channel ports.

• Audio emanations and airflow from cooling fans.

Is the product powered on?

YES NO

↓

A power distribution problem is indicated. Go to

step 4

.

2

Table 3-4

lists event codes, explanations, and MAP steps.

Table 3-4

Event

Code

200

201

MAP 100 Event Codes

Explanation

Power supply AC voltage failure.

Power supply DC voltage failure.

Action

Go to

step 3 .

Go to

step 3 .

3

As indicated by visual inspection or event code 200 or 201, one or both power supplies failed and must be disconnected and replaced.

Refer to

RRP 2: Redundant Power Supply

.

• The procedure is concurrent and performed while the product is operational.

• Perform a data collection as part of FRU removal and

replacement. Refer to Collecting Maintenance Data (EFCM

Basic Edition) or

Collecting Maintenance Data

(Element

Manager).

Was the maintenance action successful?

NO

↓

YES

The product is operational. Exit MAP.

Contact the next level of support. Exit MAP.

MAP 0100: Power Distribution Analysis 3-11

3

Maintenence Analysis Procedures

4

Inspect and verify facility power is within specifications:

• One single-phase connection for each power supply.

• Input power between 100 and 240 VAC, at least 5 amps.

• Input frequency between 50 and 60 Hz.

Is facility power within specifications?

YES NO

↓

Ask the customer to correct the facility power problem. When corrected, continue to the next step.

5

One or both power supplies are disconnected from facility power, improperly connected, or failed. Verify power supplies are connected to facility power.

a. Ensure AC power cords are connected to the rear of the switch and facility power receptacles. If not, connect power cords as directed by the customer.

b. Ensure facility circuit breakers are on. If not, ask the customer to set breakers on.

c. Ensure AC power cords are not damaged. If damaged, replace the cords.

Was the maintenance action successful?

NO

↓

YES

The product is operational. Exit MAP.

6

Verify power supply operation.

a. Inspect each power supply to determine if the green LED is extinguished.

b. If a green LED is extinguished, ensure the indicated power supply is properly connected. Disconnect and reconnect the power supply.

3-12 McDATA Sphereon 4400 Fabric Switch Installation and Service Manual

Maintenence Analysis Procedures

3

Was the maintenance action successful?

NO

↓

YES

The product is operational. Exit MAP.

A power supply failure is indicated. Go to step 3 .

MAP 0200: POST Failure Analysis

This MAP describes fault isolation for a POST failure. The failure indicator is event code 400 or 411 observed at the Event Log (EFCM

Basic Edition or Element Manager interface).

1

Table 3-5

lists event codes, explanations, and MAP steps.

Table 3-5

Event

Code

400

411

MAP 200 Event Codes

Explanation

Power-up diagnostic failure.

Firmware fault.

Action

Go to step 2

.

Go to step 4

.

2

As indicated by event code 400, POST/IPL diagnostics detected a

FRU failure.

a. At the Event Log, examine the first two bytes of event data.

b. Byte 0 specifies failed FRU. Byte 1 specifies the slot number of the failed FRU (00 for nonredundant, 00 or 01 for redundant) as

listed in Table 3-6 .

Table 3-6

Byte 0

02

05

06

MAP 200 Byte 0 FRU Codes

Failed FRU

CTP card.

Fan module.

Power supply.

Action

Replace the switch. Exit MAP.

Replace the switch. Exit MAP.

Go to step 3

.

MAP 0200: POST Failure Analysis 3-13

3

Maintenence Analysis Procedures

3

A power supply failed POSTs and must be removed and replaced.

Refer to

RRP 2: Redundant Power Supply

.

• The procedure is concurrent and performed while the product is operational.

• Perform a data collection as part of FRU removal and

replacement. Refer to Collecting Maintenance Data (EFCM

Basic Edition) or

Collecting Maintenance Data

(Element

Manager).

Was the maintenance action successful?

NO

↓

YES

The product is operational. Exit MAP.

Contact the next level of support. Exit MAP.

4

As indicated by event code 411, POST/IPL diagnostics detected a firmware failure and performed an online dump. All Fibre Channel ports reset after failure and devices momentarily logout, login, and resume operation. Perform a data collection and contact the next level of support. Refer to

Collecting Maintenance Data

(EFCM Basic

Edition) or Collecting Maintenance Data

(Element Manager). Exit

MAP.

MAP 0300: Loss of Server Communication

This MAP describes fault isolation for the product to browser PC

Internet connection (EFCM Basic Edition interface) or the product to management server LAN connection. The failure indicator is:

• A Page cannot be found, Unable to locate the server, HTTP 404 - file not found , or similar message (browser PC).

• The icon representing the product displays a grey square with an exclamation mark (SAN management application).

• A grey square at the alert panel, a No Link status and reason, and no visible product FRUs (Element Manager Hardware View).

NOTE: Upon restart, it may take up to five minutes for the management interface logical connection to activate. This delay is normal.

3-14 McDATA Sphereon 4400 Fabric Switch Installation and Service Manual

Maintenence Analysis Procedures

3

1

The following product management interface failed:

• EFCM Basic Edition (browser PC). Go to

step 2 .

• SAN management or Element Manager application

(management server). Go to step 5 .

2

A Page cannot be found, Unable to locate the server, HTTP 404 -

file not found, or similar message appears at the browser PC, indicating the PC cannot communicate with the product because:

• The product-to-PC Internet link could not be established.

• AC power distribution for the product failed or AC power was disconnected.

• The product CTP card failed.

Continue to the next step.

3

Ensure the product is connected to facility power. Inspect the product for indications of being powered on, such as:

• An illuminated PWR LED (green) or ERR LED (amber).

• Illuminated LEDs adjacent to Fibre Channel ports.

• Audio emanations and airflow from cooling fans.

Is the product powered on?

YES NO

↓

A power distribution problem is indicated. Go to

Power Distribution Analysis

. Exit MAP.

MAP 0100:

4

A product-to-PC link problem (Internet too busy or IP address typed incorrectly) or an Ethernet port failure is indicated.

a. Wait approximately five minutes, then attempt to login to the product.

b. At the Netsite field (Netscape Navigator) or Address field

(Internet Explorer), type http://xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx, where

xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx is the product IP address obtained in

MAP

0000: Start MAP

. The Username and Password Required dialog box appears.

MAP 0300: Loss of Server Communication 3-15

3

Maintenence Analysis Procedures c. Type the user name and password obtained in

MAP 0000: Start

MAP and click OK. If the EFCM Basic Edition interface does not

open, wait five minutes and perform this step again.

Is the EFCM Basic Edition interface operational?

NO

↓

YES

The Internet connection is restored. Exit MAP.

Failure of the Ethernet port is indicated. Replace the switch.

Exit MAP.

5

A status icon (grey square with yellow exclamation mark) appears at the SAN management application, indicating the management server cannot communicate with the product because:

• The server-to-PC Internet link could not be established.

• AC power distribution for the product failed or AC power was disconnected.

• The product CTP card failed.

Continue to the next step.

6

Ensure the product is connected to facility power. Inspect the product for indications of being powered on, such as:

• An illuminated PWR LED (green) or ERR LED (amber).

• Illuminated LEDs adjacent to Fibre Channel ports.

• Audio emanations and airflow from cooling fans.

Is the product powered on?

YES NO

↓

A power distribution problem is indicated. Go to

Power Distribution Analysis

. Exit MAP.

MAP 0100:

7

At the SAN management application’s physical map, right-click the status icon for the product reporting the problem and select Element

Manager from the pop-up menu. The Element Manager opens and the Hardware View displays:

• A grey square appears at the alert panel.

3-16 McDATA Sphereon 4400 Fabric Switch Installation and Service Manual

Maintenence Analysis Procedures

3

• No product FRUs are visible.

• The Status table is yellow, the Status field displays No Link, and

the Reason field displays an error message listed in Table 3-7

.

Table 3-7 MAP 300 Error Messages

Error Message

Never connected.

Link timeout.

Protocol mismatch.

Duplicate session.

Unknown network address.

Incorrect product type.

Action

Go to

step 8

.

Go to

step 8

.

Go to step 15

.

Go to step 18

.

Go to step 21

.

Go to step 23

.

8

Transmit or receive errors for the Ethernet adapter exceeded a threshold, the link was not connected, or the link timed out. A problem with the Ethernet cable, Ethernet hub(s), or other LAN-attached device is indicated. Verify the product is connected to the management server through one or more Ethernet hubs: a. Ensure an RJ-45 Ethernet cable connects the product to a hub. If not, connect the cable as directed by the customer.

b. Ensure an RJ-45 Ethernet cable connects the management server to a hub. If not, connect the cable as directed by the customer.

c. Ensure Ethernet cables are not damaged. If damaged, replace the cables.

Was the maintenance action successful?

NO

↓

YES

The management server connection is restored. Exit MAP.

MAP 0300: Loss of Server Communication 3-17

3

Maintenence Analysis Procedures

9

Does the configuration use multiple daisy-chained Ethernet hubs?

YES NO

↓

Go to step 11 .

10

Verify hubs are correctly daisy-chained.

a. Top hub - As shown in Figure 3-1 (1), ensure an RJ-45 Ethernet cable connects to port 24 and the medium-dependent interface

(MDI) switch is set to MDI (in).

b. Middle hub - As shown in Figure 3-1 (2), ensure the cable from the top hub connects to port 12, the cable from the bottom hub connects to port 24, and the MDI switch is set to MDI (in).

c. Bottom hub - As shown in Figure 3-1 (3), ensure the cable from the middle hub connects to port 12 and the MDI switch is set to

MDIX (out).

Figure 3-1 Daisy-Chained Ethernet Hubs

Was the maintenance action successful?

NO

↓

YES

The management server connection is restored. Exit MAP.

3-18 McDATA Sphereon 4400 Fabric Switch Installation and Service Manual

Maintenence Analysis Procedures

3

11

Verify operation of Ethernet hub(s). Inspect each hub for indications of being powered on, such as:

• Green Power LED illuminated.

• Green Status LEDs illuminated.

Is a failure indicated?

YES NO

↓

Go to step 13 .

12

Remove and replace the Ethernet hub. Refer to supporting documentation for instructions.

Was the maintenance action successful?

NO

↓

YES

The management server connection is restored. Exit MAP.

Contact the next level of support. Exit MAP.

13

A problem with LAN-attached device is indicated.

• If the problem is associated with another fabric element or management server, go to

MAP 0000: Start MAP

to isolate the problem for that product. Exit MAP.

• If the problem is associated with an unrelated device, inform the customer for problem resolution.

Was the maintenance action successful?

NO

↓

YES

The management server connection is restored. Exit MAP.

14

The Ethernet adapter on the product CTP card reset in response to an error. The connection to the management server terminated briefly, then recovered upon reset. Perform a data collection and

contact the next level of support. Refer to Collecting Maintenance

Data (EFCM Basic Edition) or

Collecting Maintenance Data

(Element

Manager). Exit MAP.

MAP 0300: Loss of Server Communication 3-19

3

Maintenence Analysis Procedures

15

A protocol mismatch occurred because the SAN management application and the product firmware are not at compatible release levels. Recommend to the customer the downlevel version (software or firmware) be upgraded.

Does the SAN management application require upgrade?

YES NO

↓

Go to step 17 .

16

Upgrade the SAN management application. Refer to Installing or

Upgrading Software .

Was the maintenance action successful?

NO

↓

YES

The management server connection is restored. Exit MAP.

17

Product firmware upgrade is required. Refer to

Upgrading Firmware

(EFCM Basic Edition) or

Upgrading Firmware (Element Manager).

Perform a data collection after the upgrade. Refer to Collecting

Maintenance Data (EFCM Basic Edition) or

Collecting Maintenance

Data (Element Manager).

Was the maintenance action successful?

NO

↓

YES

The management server connection is restored. Exit MAP.

Contact the next level of support. Exit MAP.

18

An instance of the SAN management application is open at another management server and communicating with the product (duplicate session). Inform the customer and either:

• Power off the server running the second instance of the application.

• Configure the server running the second instance of the application as a client workstation.

3-20 McDATA Sphereon 4400 Fabric Switch Installation and Service Manual

Maintenence Analysis Procedures

3

Does the customer want the second server configured as a client?

YES NO

↓

Power off the server reporting the Duplicate Session problem. Exit MAP.

19

Determine the IP address of the management server running the first instance of the SAN management application.

a. After the server powers on and successfully completes POSTs, the LCD panel displays a Welcome!! message and continuously cycles through and displays operational information.

b. After a few seconds, the LCD panel displays a LAN 2:

010.001.001.001 message.

c. Depending on product-to-server LAN connectivity, record the appropriate IP address (LAN 1 or LAN 2).

Continue to the next step.

20

Configure the management server reporting the Duplicate Session problem as a client.

a. At the SAN management application, select Logout from the

SAN menu. The application closes and the Log In dialog box displays.

b. Type the user ID and password obtained in MAP 0000: Start

MAP . Both are case sensitive).

c. Type the IP address of the management server running the first instance of the SAN management application in the Network

Address field.

d. Click Login. The application opens and the main window displays.

Was the maintenance action successful?

NO

↓

YES

The management server connection is restored and the second management server is a client. Exit MAP.

Contact the next level of support. Exit MAP.

MAP 0300: Loss of Server Communication 3-21

3

Maintenence Analysis Procedures

21

The IP address defining the product to the SAN management application is incorrect or unknown and must be verified. An asynchronous RS-232 modem cable and maintenance terminal

(desktop or notebook PC) with a Windows-based operating system and RS-232 serial communication software (such as ProComm Plus or HyperTerminal) are required. To verify the IP address: a. Using a Phillips screwdriver, remove the protective cap from the

9-pin maintenance port at the rear of the chassis. Connect one end of the RS-232 modem cable to the port.

b. Connect the other cable end to a 9-pin serial communication port

(COM1 or COM2) at the rear of the maintenance terminal PC.

c. Power on the maintenance terminal. At the Windows desktop, click Start at the left side of the task bar. The Windows

Workstation menu displays.

d. At the Windows Workstation menu, sequentially select the

Programs, Accessories, Communications, and HyperTerminal options. The Connection Description dialog box displays.

e. Type a descriptive product name in the Name field and click OK.

The Connect To dialog box displays.

f. Ensure the Connect using field displays COM1 or COM2

(depending on the port connection to the product), and click OK.

The COMn Properties dialog box displays, where n is 1 or 2.

g. Configure Port Settings parameters:

— Bits per second - 115200.

— Data bits - 8.

— Parity - None.

— Stop bits - 1.

— Flow control - Hardware or None.

Click OK. The New Connection - HyperTerminal window displays.

h. At the > prompt, type the user password (default is password) and press Enter. The password is case sensitive. The New

Connection - HyperTerminal window displays with software and hardware version information for the product, and a C > prompt at the bottom of the window.

3-22 McDATA Sphereon 4400 Fabric Switch Installation and Service Manual

Maintenence Analysis Procedures

3 i.

At the C > prompt, type the ipconfig command and press Enter.

The New Connection - HyperTerminal window displays with configuration information listed.

j.

Record the product IP address.

k. Select Exit from the File pull-down menu. A HyperTerminal message box appears.

l.

Click Yes. A second message box appears. Click No to exit and close the application. m. Power off the maintenance terminal and disconnect the modem cable. Replace the protective cap over the maintenance port.

Continue to the next step.

22

Define the product IP address (determined in

step 21 ) to the

management server.

a. At the SAN management application, select Setup from the

Discover menu. The Discover Setup dialog box displays.

b. Ensure the product to be reconfigured is moved from the

Selected Individual Addresses list to the Available Addresses list. Select (highlight) the product and click Edit. The Address

Properties dialog box displays with the IP Address page open.

c. Type the correct product IP address in the IP Address field.

d. Move the reconfigured product from the Available Addresses list to the Selected Individual Addresses list.

e. Click OK to save the address, close the dialog box, and redefine the product to the SAN management application.

f. Click OK to close the Discover Setup dialog box.

Was the maintenance action successful?

NO

↓

YES

The management server connection is restored. Exit MAP.

Contact the next level of support. Exit MAP.

MAP 0300: Loss of Server Communication 3-23

3

Maintenence Analysis Procedures

23

An incorrect product type is defined to the management server.

a. At the SAN management application, select Setup from the

Discover menu. The Discover Setup dialog box displays.

b. Ensure the incorrect product (to be deleted) is moved from the

Selected Individual Addresses list to the Available Addresses list. Select (highlight) the product and click Delete. The product is deleted.

c. Click Add. The Address Properties dialog box displays with the

IP Address page open.

d. Type a product description in the Description field.

e. Type the product IP address (determined by the network administrator) in the IP Address field.

f. Type the product subnet mask (determined by the network administrator) in the Subnet Mask field.

g. Click the Product Type and Access tab. Select Switch from the

Product Type drop-down list and type customer-specified values in the User ID, Password, and Retype Password fields.

h. Click OK to close the dialog box and define the new product configuration to the SAN management application.

i.

Click OK to close the Discover Setup dialog box.

Was the maintenance action successful?

NO

↓

YES

The management server connection is restored. Exit MAP.

Contact the next level of support. Exit MAP.

MAP 0400: FRU Failure Analysis

This MAP describes fault isolation for product FRUs. The failure indicator is:

• Illumination of the associated amber LED.

• Event code 300, 301, 302, 370, 426, 433, 440, 810, 811, 812, or 850 observed at the Event Log (EFCM Basic Edition or Element

Manager interface).

3-24 McDATA Sphereon 4400 Fabric Switch Installation and Service Manual

Maintenence Analysis Procedures

3

1

Table 3-8

lists event codes, explanations, and MAP steps.

Table 3-8 MAP 400 Event Codes

Event

Code

300

301

426

433

Explanation

Cooling fan propeller failed.

Cooling fan propeller failed.

302 Cooling fan propeller failed.

370 Cooling fan status polling temporarily disabled.

Multiple ECC single-bit errors occurred.

Non-recoverable Ethernet fault.

440 Embedded port hardware failed.

810 High temperature warning (CTP thermal sensor).

Action

811 Critically hot temperature warning (CTP thermal sensor).

Go to step 6

.

812 CTP card shutdown due to thermal violations.

Go to step 6

.

850 Switch shutdown due to CTP thermal violations.

Go to step 2

.

Go to step 2

.

Go to

Go to

Go to

Go to

step 2 step 3

Go to step 4

.

Go to step 5

.

step 5 step 6

Go to step 6

.

.

.

.

.

2

Visual inspection or event code 300, 301, or 302 indicates one or more cooling fans failed. Replace the switch. Exit MAP.

3

As indicated by event code 370, cooling fan status polling is temporarily disabled and status values for one or more fans exceed a set threshold. This indicates possible fan degradation or failure.

Is this event code a recurring problem?

NO

↓

YES

A fan failure is indicated. Go to

step 2

.

Monitor fan operation or recording of additional failure event codes.

Exit MAP.

MAP 0400: FRU Failure Analysis 3-25

3

Maintenence Analysis Procedures

4

As indicated by event code 426, an intermittent synchronous dynamic random access memory (SDRAM) problem may result in switch failure.

Is this event code a recurring problem?

NO

↓

YES

A CTP card failure is indicated. Replace the switch.

Exit MAP.

Perform a data collection and contact the next level of support. Refer to

Collecting Maintenance Data

(EFCM Basic Edition) or Collecting

Maintenance Data (Element Manager). Exit MAP.

5

As indicated by event code 433 or 440, the CTP card failed. Replace the switch. Exit MAP.

6

As indicated by event code 810, 811, 812, or 850, an intermittent thermal problem may result in switch failure. Reset the product. Refer to

IML or Reset Switch for instructions.

Was the maintenance action successful?

NO

↓

YES

The product is operational. Exit MAP.

A CTP card failure is indicated. Replace the switch. Exit MAP.

MAP 0500: Port Failure or Link Incident Analysis

This MAP describes fault isolation for small form factor pluggable

(SFP) optical transceivers and Fibre Channel link incidents. The failure indicator is:

• Event code 080, 081, 083, 506, 507, 512, 514, 515, or 516 observed at the Event Log (EFCM Basic Edition or Element Manager interface).

• Event code 581, 582, 583, 584, 585, or 586 observed at the console of an OSI server attached to the product reporting the problem.

• An error message observed at the Link Incident Log (EFCM Basic

Edition or Element Manager interface).

3-26 McDATA Sphereon 4400 Fabric Switch Installation and Service Manual

Maintenence Analysis Procedures

3

1

Table 3-9

lists event codes, explanations, and MAP steps.

Table 3-9 MAP 500 Event Codes

Event

Code

080

081

507

512

Explanation

Unauthorized worldwide name.

Invalid attachment.

083 Port set to inactive state.

506 Fibre Channel port failure.

Loopback diagnostics port failure.

Optical transceiver nonfatal error.

Action

Go to step 2

.

Go to step 3

.

Go to

Go to

step 13

step 17

Go to step 18 .

Go to step 17 .

514 Optical transceiver failure.

Go to step 17 .

515 Optical digital diagnostics warning threshold exceeded.

Go to step 17 .

.

.

516 Optical digital diagnostics alarm threshold exceeded.

581 Implicit incident.

582 Bit error threshold exceeded.

583 Loss of signal or loss of synchronization.

Go to

Go to

Go to

Go to

step 17

step 19 step 19 step 19

.

.

.

.

584 Not operational primitive sequence received.

585 Primitive sequence timeout.

Go to

Go to step 19 step 19

586 Invalid primitive sequence received for current link state.

Go to step 19 .

.

.

Table 3-10 lists link incident messages and MAP steps.

Table 3-10 Link Incident Messages

Explanation

Link interface incident - implicit incident.

Link interface incident - bit-error threshold exceeded.

Link failure - loss of signal or loss of synchronization.

Action

Go to

step 19 .

Go to

step 19 .

Go to

step 19 .

MAP 0500: Port Failure or Link Incident Analysis 3-27

3

Maintenence Analysis Procedures

Table 3-10 Link Incident Messages (Continued)

Explanation

Link failure - not-operational primitive sequence (NOS) received.

Action

Go to

step 19

Link failure - primitive sequence timeout.

Go to

step 19 .

Link failure - invalid primitive sequence received for current link state.

Go to

step 19 .

.

2

As indicated by event code 080, the eight-byte (16-digit) worldwide name (WWN) is not valid or an unconfigured nickname was used.

a. For the product reporting the problem:

— EFCM Basic Edition - Select Node List from the Product menu at any view. The Node List View displays.

— Element Manager - Select the Node List tab at any view.

The Node List View displays.

b. At the Port WWN column, inspect the WWN assigned to the port or attached device.

c. The WWN must be entered in (XX:XX:XX:XX:XX:XX:XX:XX) format or must be a valid nickname. Ensure a valid WWN or nickname is entered.

Was the maintenance action successful?

NO

↓

YES

The product port is operational. Exit MAP.

Contact the next level of support. Exit MAP.

3

As indicated by event code 081, a port has an invalid attachment.

a. At the Event Log, examine the first five bytes of event data.

b. Byte 0 specifies the port reporting the problem. Byte 4 specifies the invalid attachment reason as listed in

Table 3-11

.

3-28 McDATA Sphereon 4400 Fabric Switch Installation and Service Manual

Maintenence Analysis Procedures

3

Table 3-11 Invalid Attachment Reasons and Actions

Byte 4

01

Invalid Attachment Reason

Unknown

02 ISL connection not allowed.

03, 04 Incompatible switch.

05 Loopback plug connected.

0F

10

11

0B

0C

0D

0E

06

07

08

0A

N-Port connection not allowed.

Non-McDATA switch at other end.

E_Port capability disabled.

Unauthorized port binding WWN.

Unresponsive node.

ESA security mismatch.

Fabric binding mismatch.

Authorization failure reject.

Unauthorized switch binding WWN.

Authentication failure

Fabric mode mismatch.

Action

Contact the next level of support.

Go to

step 4 .

Go to

step 5 .

Go to

step 6 .

Go to

step 4 .

Go to

step 5 .

Go to

step 7 .

Go to

step 2 .

Go to

step 8 .

Go to

step 10

.

Go to

step 11

.

Go to

step 8 .

Go to

step 10

.

Go to

step 12

.

Go to

step 5 .

4

A connection is not allowed because of a conflict with the configured port type. An expansion port (E_Port) is cabled to a Fibre Channel device or a fabric port (F_Port) is cabled to a director or fabric switch.

a. For the product reporting the problem:

— EFCM Basic Edition - Select Ports and Basic Info from the

Configure menu at any view. The Basic Information View displays.

— Element Manager - Select Ports from the Configure menu at any view. The Configure Ports dialog box displays.

MAP 0500: Port Failure or Link Incident Analysis 3-29

3

Maintenence Analysis Procedures b. If necessary, use the vertical scroll bar to display the information row for the port indicating an invalid attachment.

c. Select (click) the Type field and configure the port as follows:

• Select fabric port (F_Port) if the port is cabled to a device.

• Select expansion port (E_Port) if the port is cabled to a director or switch (ISL).

d. Click OK or Activate.

Was the maintenance action successful?

NO

↓

YES

The product port is operational. Exit MAP.

Contact the next level of support. Exit MAP.

5

An ISL connection is not allowed because one of the following mode-mismatch conditions was detected:

• The product is configured to operate in Open Fabric 1.0 mode and is connected to a fabric element not configured to Open

Fabric 1.0 mode.

• The product is configured to operate in Open Fabric 1.0 mode and is connected to a legacy McDATA switch at the incorrect exchange link parameter (ELP) revision level.

• The product is configured to operate in Open Fabric 1.0 mode and is connected to a non-McDATA switch at the incorrect ELP revision level.

• The product is configured to operate in McDATA Fabric 1.0 mode and is connected to a non-McDATA switch.

Reconfigure the operating mode:

a. Set the product offline. Refer to Setting Online State (EFCM

Basic Edition) or

Setting Online State

(Element Manager).

b. For the product reporting the problem:

— EFCM Basic Edition - Select Switch and Fabric Parameters from the Configure menu at any view. The Fabric

Parameters View displays.

— Element Manager - Select Operating Parameters and

Fabric Parameters from the Configure menu at any view.

The Configure Fabric Parameters dialog box displays.

3-30 McDATA Sphereon 4400 Fabric Switch Installation and Service Manual

Maintenence Analysis Procedures

3 c. Select McDATA Fabric 1.0 or Open Fabric 1.0 from the Interop

Mode drop-down list.

— Select McDATA Fabric 1.0 if the product is attached only to other McDATA directors or switches operating in McDATA

Fabric 1.0 mode.

— Select Open Fabric 1.0 if the product is attached to directors or switches produced by open-fabric compliant original equipment manufacturers (OEMs).

d. Click OK or Activate.

Was the maintenance action successful?

NO

↓

YES

The product port is operational. Exit MAP.

Contact the next level of support. Exit MAP.

6

A loopback (wrap) plug is connected to the port with no diagnostic running. Remove the plug from the port receptacle. If directed by the customer, connect a fiber-optic jumper cable attaching a device to the product.

• If the port is operational with no device attached, both LEDs adjacent to the port extinguish and the port state is No Light.

• If the port is operational with a device attached, the green LED illuminates, the amber LED extinguishes, and the port state is

Online.

Was the maintenance action successful?

NO

↓

YES

The product port is operational. Exit MAP.

Contact the next level of support. Exit MAP.

7

An ISL connection is not allowed because E_Port capability is disabled. Install the full-fabric PFE key to enable E_port capability.

Refer to

Installing PFE Keys (Optional)

(EFCM Basic Edition) or Task

16: Configure PFE Key (Optional)

(Element Manager).

Exit MAP.

MAP 0500: Port Failure or Link Incident Analysis 3-31

3

Maintenence Analysis Procedures

8

The connection timed out because of an unresponsive device or an

ISL security violation (authorization failure reject). Check port status and clean fiber-optic components.

a. Inform the customer the port will be blocked. Ensure the system administrator quiesces Fibre Channel frame traffic and sets attached devices offline.

b. Block the port. Refer to

Blocking or Unblocking a Port

(EFCM

Basic Edition) or

Blocking or Unblocking a Port

(Element

Manager).

c. Clean fiber-optic connectors. Refer to Clean Fiber-Optic

Components

.

d. Unblock the port. Refer to

Blocking or Unblocking a Port (EFCM

Basic Edition) or

Blocking or Unblocking a Port

(Element

Manager).

e. Monitor port operation for approximately five minutes.

Was the maintenance action successful?

NO

↓

YES

The product port is operational. Exit MAP.

9

Inspect and service host bus adapters (HBAs).

Was the maintenance action successful?

NO

↓

YES

The product port is operational. Exit MAP.

Contact the next level of support. Exit MAP.

10

A connection is not allowed because of a switch binding or exchange security attribute (ESA) feature mismatch. Switch binding parameters must be compatible for both fabric elements. At the EFCM Basic

Edition interface or Element Manager, ensure switch binding is enabled, the connection policy is compatible, and switch membership lists are compatible for both elements.

• EFCM Basic Edition - Refer to the McDATA EFCM Basic Edition

User Manual (620-000240) for instructions.

3-32 McDATA Sphereon 4400 Fabric Switch Installation and Service Manual

Maintenence Analysis Procedures

3

• Element Manager - Refer to the McDATA Sphereon 4400

Fabric Switch Element Manager User Manual (620-000241) for instructions.

Was the maintenance action successful?

NO

↓

YES

The product port is operational. Exit MAP.

Contact the next level of support. Exit MAP.

11

A connection is not allowed because of a fabric binding mismatch.

Fabric membership lists must be compatible for both elements. At the

EFCM Basic Edition interface or SAN management application, ensure fabric binding is enabled and fabric membership lists are compatible for both elements.

• EFCM Basic Edition - Refer to the McDATA EFCM Basic Edition

User Manual (620-000240) for instructions.

• SAN management application - Refer to the EFC Manager

Software Release 8.7 User Manual (620-000170) for instructions.

Was the maintenance action successful?

NO

↓

YES

The product port is operational. Exit MAP.

Contact the next level of support. Exit MAP.

12

A connection is not allowed because of a SANtegrity authentication failure. At the EFCM Basic Edition interface or Element Manager, modify the IP address access control list, product-level authentication settings, port-level authentication settings, and challenge handshake authentication protocol (CHAP) sequence to ensure device access to the product.

• EFCM Basic Edition - Refer to the McDATA EFCM Basic Edition

User Manual (620-000240) for instructions.

• Element Manager - Refer to the McDATA Sphereon 4400

Fabric Switch Element Manager User Manual (620-000241) for instructions.

MAP 0500: Port Failure or Link Incident Analysis 3-33

3

Maintenence Analysis Procedures

Was the maintenance action successful?

NO

↓

YES

The product port is operational. Exit MAP.

Contact the next level of support. Exit MAP.

13

As indicated by event code 083, a port is set to an inactive state.

a. At the Event Log, examine the first two bytes of event data.

b. Byte 0 specifies the port reporting the problem. Byte 1 specifies the inactive reason as listed in

Table 3-12 .

Table 3-12 Inactive Port Reasons and Actions

Byte 1

02

03

04

06

Inactive Port Reason

Feature key not enabled.

Switch speed conflict.

Optics speed conflict.

Port swap conflict.

Action

Go to

step 14

.

Go to

step 15

.

Go to

step 15

.

Go to

step 16

.

14

A port is inactive because Flexport Technology is disabled. Install the

Flexport Technology PFE key to enable N_Port capability. Refer to

Installing PFE Keys (Optional)

(EFCM Basic Edition) or Task 16:

Configure PFE Key (Optional)

(Element Manager).

Exit MAP.

15

A port is inactive because the:

• Port cannot operate at the product (backplane) speed.

• Optical transceiver does not support the configured port speed.

Change the port speed to be compatible with the backplane or optical transceiver speed.

a. For the product reporting the problem:

— EFCM Basic Edition - Select Ports and Basic Info from the

Configure menu at any view. The Basic Information View displays.

3-34 McDATA Sphereon 4400 Fabric Switch Installation and Service Manual

Maintenence Analysis Procedures

3

— Element Manager - Select Ports from the Configure menu at any view. The Configure Ports dialog box displays.

b. If necessary, use the vertical scroll bar to display the information row for the inactive port.

c. Select (click) the Speed field and configure the port.

d. Click OK or Activate.

Was the maintenance action successful?

NO

↓

YES

The product port is operational. Exit MAP.

Contact the next level of support. Exit MAP.

16

A port is inactive because the port swap configuration is invalid.

Perform a port swap procedure (Element Manager only), ensure the configuration is valid, and ensure the port address matches the hardware configuration definition (HCD) of the attached host. Refer to

Swap Ports

.

Exit MAP.

17

As indicated by event codes 506, 512, 514, 515, or 516, a port failed and the optical transceiver must be removed and replaced. Refer to

RRP 1: SFP Optical Transceiver .

• The procedure is concurrent and performed while the product is operational.

• Replace the transceiver with a transceiver of the same speed.

• Perform an external loopback test. Refer to

External Loopback

Test (EFCM Basic Edition) or

External Loopback Test (Element

Manager).

NOTE: Event code 514 may generate a call-home event that incorrectly indicates a CTP card failure. Although the optical socket on the CTP card may have failed, replace the transceiver and verify operation. If a failure is still indicated, replace the switch. When event code 514 is indicated, ensure a replacement transceiver and switch are available.

MAP 0500: Port Failure or Link Incident Analysis 3-35

3

Maintenence Analysis Procedures

Was the maintenance action successful?

NO

↓

YES

The product port is operational. Exit MAP.

Contact the next level of support. Exit MAP.

18

As indicated by event code 507, a port failed a loopback test. Reset the failed port.

a. At the EFCM Basic Edition interface:

1. Select Ports and Reset from the Maintenance menu at any view. The Reset View displays.

2. If necessary, use the vertical scroll bar to display the information row for the port.

3. Select (click) the check box in the Reset column.

4. Click OK. The port resets.

b. At the Element Manager:

1. At the Hardware View, right-click the port. A pop-up menu appears.

2. Select Reset Port. The message This operation will cause

a link reset to be sent to the attached device displays.

3. Click OK. The port resets.

c. Perform an external loopback test for the reset port. Refer to

External Loopback Test

(EFCM Basic Edition) or External

Loopback Test (Element Manager).

Was the maintenance action successful?

NO

↓

YES

The product port is operational. Exit MAP.

Go to step 17 .

19

A message appeared in the Link Incident Log or an event code 581,

582, 583, 584, 585, or 586 was observed at the console of an OSI server attached to the product reporting the problem. Clear the link incident (Element Manager only).

3-36 McDATA Sphereon 4400 Fabric Switch Installation and Service Manual

Maintenence Analysis Procedures

3 a. At the Hardware View, right-click the port. A pop-up menu appears.

b. Select Clear Link Incident Alert(s). The Clear Link Incident

Alert(s) dialog box displays.

c. Select the This port (n) only radio button and click OK. The link incident clears.

d. Monitor port operation for approximately five minutes.

Did the link incident recur?

YES NO

↓

The problem is transient and the product port is operational.

Exit MAP.

20

Clean fiber-optic components.

a. Inform the customer the port will be blocked. Ensure the system administrator quiesces Fibre Channel frame traffic and sets attached devices offline.

b. Block the port. Refer to

Blocking or Unblocking a Port

(EFCM

Basic Edition) or

Blocking or Unblocking a Port

(Element

Manager).

c. Clean fiber-optic connectors. Refer to Clean Fiber-Optic

Components

.

d. Unblock the port. Refer to

Blocking or Unblocking a Port (EFCM

Basic Edition) or

Blocking or Unblocking a Port

(Element

Manager).

e. Monitor port operation for approximately five minutes.

Did the link incident recur?

YES NO

↓

The product port is operational. Exit MAP.

21

Disconnect the fiber-optic jumper cable from the port and connect the cable to a spare port.

Is a link incident reported at the new port?

YES NO

MAP 0500: Port Failure or Link Incident Analysis 3-37

3

Maintenence Analysis Procedures

↓

The port reporting the problem is causing the link incident.

This indicates port degradation and a possible pending failure. Go to

step 17

.

22

Ensure the attached fiber-optic jumper cable is not bent and connectors are not damaged. If the cable is bent or connectors are damaged: a. Inform the customer the port will be blocked. Ensure the system administrator quiesces Fibre Channel frame traffic and sets attached devices offline.

b. Block the port. Refer to

Blocking or Unblocking a Port

(EFCM

Basic Edition) or

Blocking or Unblocking a Port

(Element

Manager).

c. Remove and replace the fiber-optic jumper cable.

d. Unblock the port. Refer to

Blocking or Unblocking a Port (EFCM

Basic Edition) or

Blocking or Unblocking a Port

(Element

Manager).

Was the maintenance action successful?

NO

↓

YES

The product port is operational. Exit MAP.

23

The attached device is causing the recurrent link incident. Inform the customer of the problem and have the system administrator: a. Inspect and verify operation of the attached device.

b. Repair the attached device if a failure is indicated.

c. Monitor port operation for approximately five minutes.

Was the maintenance action successful?

NO

↓

YES

The product port is operational. Exit MAP.

Contact the next level of support. Exit MAP.

3-38

MAP 0600: Fabric or ISL Problem Analysis

This MAP describes fault isolation for fabric, interswitch link (ISL), fenced E_Port, and segmented E_Port problems. The failure indicator

McDATA Sphereon 4400 Fabric Switch Installation and Service Manual

Maintenence Analysis Procedures

3 is an event code 011, 021, 051, 061, 062, 063, 070, 071, 072, 082, 140,

142 , or 150 observed at the Event Log (EFCM Basic Edition or Element

Manager interface).

1

Table 3-13 lists event codes, explanations, and MAP steps.

Table 3-13 MAP 600 Event Codes

Event

Code

Explanation

011 Login Server database invalid.

021 Name Server database invalid.

051 Management Server database invalid.

061 Fabric Controller database invalid.

062 Maximum interswitch hop count exceeded.

063 Remote switch has too many ISLs.

070 E_Port is segmented.

071 Switch is isolated.

072 E_Port connected to unsupported switch.

082 Port fenced.

140 Congestion detected on an ISL.

142 Low BB_Credit detected on an ISL.

150 Fabric merge failure.

Action

Go to step 2

.

Go to step 2

.

Go to step 3

.

Go to step 4

.

Go to step 5

.

Go to step 6

.

Go to step 7

.

Go to step 7

.

Go to step 15 .

Go to step 16 .

Go to step 21 .

Go to step 21 .

Go to step 22 .

2

A minor error occurred that caused the Fabric Services database to be re-initialized to an empty state, and a disruptive fabric logout and login occurred for all attached devices. Indications are:

• Event code 011 - The Login Server database failed cyclic redundancy check (CRC) validation.

• Event code 021 - The Name Server database failed CRC validation.

MAP 0600: Fabric or ISL Problem Analysis 3-39

3

Maintenence Analysis Procedures

Devices resume operation after fabric login. Perform a data collection

and contact the next level of support. Refer to Collecting Maintenance

Data (EFCM Basic Edition) or

Collecting Maintenance Data

(Element

Manager). Exit MAP.

3

As indicated by event code 051, a minor error occurred that caused the Management Server database to be re-initialized to an empty state and fail CRC validation. A disruptive server logout and login occurred for all attached devices.

Devices resume operation after Management Server login. Perform a data collection and contact the next level of support. Refer to

Collecting Maintenance Data (EFCM Basic Edition) or

Collecting

Maintenance Data (Element Manager). Exit MAP.

4

As indicated by event code 061, a minor error occurred that caused the Fabric Controller database to be re-initialized to an empty state and fail CRC validation. The product briefly lost interswitch link capability.

Interswitch links resume operation after CTP reset. Perform a data

collection and contact the next level of support. Refer to Collecting

Maintenance Data (EFCM Basic Edition) or

Collecting Maintenance

Data (Element Manager). Exit MAP.

5

As indicated by event code 062, Fabric Controller software detected a path to another fabric element (director or switch) that traverses more than three interswitch links (hops). Fibre Channel frames may persist in the fabric longer than timeout values allow.

Advise the customer of the problem and reconfigure the fabric so the path between any two fabric elements does not traverse more than three hops.

Was the maintenance action successful?

NO

↓

YES

The fabric, ISL, and product are operational. Exit MAP.

Contact the next level of support. Exit MAP.

6

As indicated by event code 063, Fabric Controller software detected:

3-40 McDATA Sphereon 4400 Fabric Switch Installation and Service Manual

Maintenence Analysis Procedures

3

• A fabric element with more than 32 ISLs (SAN management application Version 3.2 or earlier).

• A fabric element with more than 128 ISLs (SAN management application Version 3.3 or later).

Fibre Channel frames may be lost or directed in loops because of potential fabric routing problems. Advise the customer of the problem and reconfigure the fabric so that no directors or switches have more than the proscribed number of ISLs.

Was the maintenance action successful?

NO

↓

YES

The fabric, ISL, and product are operational. Exit MAP.

Contact the next level of support. Exit MAP.

7

Event code 070 indicates an E_Port detected an incompatibility with an attached fabric element, segmented the port, and prevented fabric participation. A segmented E_port cannot transmit Class 2 or Class 3

Fibre Channel traffic. Event code 071 indicates the product is isolated from all fabric elements, and is accompanied by an event code 070 for each segmented E_Port. Event code 071 is resolved when all 070 events are corrected. Obtain supplementary event data as follows: a. At the Event Log, examine the first five bytes of event data.

b. Byte 0 specifies the segmented E_port. Byte 4 specifies the segmentation reason as listed in

Table 3-14

. The reason also displays at the Port List View (EFCM Basic Edition) or Port

Properties dialog box (Element Manager).

Table 3-14 E_Port Segmentation Reasons and Actions

Byte 4

01

02

03

04

05

06

Segmentation Reason

Incompatible operating parameters.

Duplicate domain ID.

Incompatible zoning configurations.

Build fabric protocol error.

No principal switch.

No response from attached switch (hello timeout).

Action

Go to

step 8 .

Go to

step 9 .

Go to

step 10

.

Go to

step 11

.

Go to

step 13

.

Go to

step 14

.

MAP 0600: Fabric or ISL Problem Analysis 3-41

3

Maintenence Analysis Procedures

8

An E_Port segmented because the error detect time out value

(E_D_TOV) or resource allocation time out value (R_A_TOV) is incompatible with the attached fabric element.

a. Contact customer support or engineering personnel to determine the recommended E_D_TOV and R_A_TOV values for both fabric elements.

b. Inform the customer both products will be set offline. Ensure the system administrator quiesces Fibre Channel frame traffic and sets attached devices offline.

c. Set both products offline. Refer to Setting Online State (EFCM

Basic Edition) or

Setting Online State

(Element Manager).

d. For the first product reporting the problem:

— EFCM Basic Edition - Select Switch and Fabric Parameters from the Configure menu at any view. The Fabric

Parameters View displays.

— Element Manager - Select Operating Parameters and

Fabric Parameters from the Configure menu at any view.

The Configure Fabric Parameters dialog box displays.

e. Type the recommended E_D_TOV and R_A_TOV values, then click OK or Activate.

f. Repeat steps d and e at the second product (attached to the segmented E_Port). Use the same E_D_TOV and R_A_TOV values.

g. Set both products online. Refer to Setting Online State (EFCM

Basic Edition) or

Setting Online State

(Element Manager).

Was the maintenance action successful?

NO

↓

YES

The fabric, ISL, and product are operational. Exit MAP.

Contact the next level of support. Exit MAP.

9

An E_Port segmented because two fabric elements had duplicate domain IDs.

a. Determine the desired domain ID (1 through 31 inclusive) for each product.

3-42 McDATA Sphereon 4400 Fabric Switch Installation and Service Manual

Maintenence Analysis Procedures

3 b. Inform the customer both products will be set offline. Ensure the system administrator quiesces Fibre Channel frame traffic and sets attached devices offline.

c. Set both products offline. Refer to Setting Online State (EFCM

Basic Edition) or

Setting Online State

(Element Manager).

d. For the first product reporting the problem:

— EFCM Basic Edition - Select Switch and Parameters from the Configure menu at any view. The Parameters View displays.

— Element Manager - Select Switch Parameters and Fabric

Parameters from the Configure menu at any view. The

Configure Switch Parameters dialog box displays.

e. Type the customer-determined preferred domain ID value, then click OK or Activate.

f. Repeat steps d and e at the second product (attached to the segmented E_Port). Use a different preferred domain ID value.

g. Set both products online. Refer to Setting Online State (EFCM

Basic Edition) or

Setting Online State

(Element Manager).

Was the maintenance action successful?

NO

↓

YES

The fabric, ISL, and product are operational. Exit MAP.

Contact the next level of support. Exit MAP.

10

An E_Port segmented because two products had incompatible zoning configurations. An identical zone name is recognized in the active zone set for both products, but the zones contain different members.

a. Determine the desired zone name change for one of the affected products. Zone names must conform to the following rules:

— The name must be 64 characters or fewer in length.

— The first character must be a letter (a through z), upper or lower case.

— Other characters must be alphanumeric (a through z or 0 through 9), dollar sign ($), hyphen (-), caret (^), or underscore (_).

MAP 0600: Fabric or ISL Problem Analysis 3-43

3

Maintenence Analysis Procedures b. At the EFCM Basic Edition interface or SAN management application, inspect names in the active zone set to determine the incompatible zone name, then modify the name as directed by the customer:

— EFCM Basic Edition - Refer to the McDATA EFCM Basic

Edition User Manual (620-000240) for instructions.

— SAN management application - Refer to the EFC Manager

Software Release 8.7 User Manual (620-000170) for instructions.

Was the maintenance action successful?

NO

↓

YES

The fabric, ISL, and product are operational. Exit MAP.

Contact the next level of support. Exit MAP.

11

An E_Port segmented because a build fabric protocol error was detected.

a. Disconnect the fiber-optic jumper cable from the segmented

E_Port.

b. Reconnect the cable to the same port.

Was the maintenance action successful?

NO

↓

YES

The fabric, ISL, and product are operational. Exit MAP.

12

Reset the product. Refer to

IML or Reset Switch for instructions.

Was the maintenance action successful?

NO

↓

YES

The fabric, ISL, and product are operational. Exit MAP.

Perform a data collection and contact the next level of support. Refer to

Collecting Maintenance Data

(EFCM Basic Edition) or Collecting

Maintenance Data (Element Manager). Exit MAP.

3-44 McDATA Sphereon 4400 Fabric Switch Installation and Service Manual

Maintenence Analysis Procedures

3

13

An E_Port segmented because no product in the fabric is capable of becoming the principal switch.

a. Inform the customer the product will be set offline. Ensure the system administrator quiesces Fibre Channel frame traffic and sets attached devices offline.

b. Set the product offline. Refer to Setting Online State (EFCM

Basic Edition) or

Setting Online State

(Element Manager).

c. For the product reporting the problem:

— EFCM Basic Edition - Select Switch and Fabric Parameters from the Configure menu at any view. The Fabric

Parameters View displays.

— Element Manager - Select Operating Parameters and

Fabric Parameters from the Configure menu at any view.

The Configure Fabric Parameters dialog box displays.

d. At the Switch Priority field, select Principal, Never Principal, or

Default, then click OK or Activate. The switch priority value designates the fabric’s principal switch, which is assigned a priority of 1 and controls the allocation and distribution of domain

IDs for all fabric elements (including itself).

Principal is the highest priority setting, Default is the next highest, and Never Principal is the lowest priority setting. The setting Never Principal means the fabric element is incapable of becoming a principal switch. If all elements are set to Principal or

Default, the element with the highest priority and the lowest

WWN becomes the principal switch. At least one element in a multiswitch fabric must be set as Principal or Default. If all elements are set to Never Principal, all ISLs segment.

e. Set the product online. Refer to Setting Online State (EFCM

Basic Edition) or

Setting Online State

(Element Manager).

Was the maintenance action successful?

NO

↓

YES

The fabric, ISL, and product are operational. Exit MAP.

Contact the next level of support. Exit MAP.

MAP 0600: Fabric or ISL Problem Analysis 3-45

3

Maintenence Analysis Procedures

14

An E_Port segmented (operational product) because a response

(hello timeout) to a verification check indicates an attached switch is not operational.

a. Perform a data collection at the operational product and contact

the next level of support. Refer to Collecting Maintenance Data

(EFCM Basic Edition) or Collecting Maintenance Data (Element

Manager).

b. Go to MAP 0000: Start MAP and perform fault isolation for the

failed switch. Exit MAP.

15

Event code 072 indicates a product E_Port is connected to an unsupported fabric element. Advise the customer of the problem and disconnect the ISL to the unsupported fabric element. Exit MAP.

16

Event code 082 is informational only and indicates a product E_Port is fenced (blocked). An application or hardware malfunction occurred

(as indicated by failure symptoms or primary event codes) or the port fencing policy is too restrictive. Obtain supplementary event data as follows: a. At the Event Log, examine the first five bytes (0 through 4) of event data.

b. Byte 0 specifies the E_Port reporting the problem. Byte 4 specifies the port fence code as listed in

Table 3-15

.

Table 3-15 Port Fence Codes and Actions

Byte 4

01

02

03

Port Fence Code

Protocol error.

Link-level hot I/O.

Security violation.

Action

Go to

step 17

.

Go to

step 18

.

Go to

step 19

.

3-46 McDATA Sphereon 4400 Fabric Switch Installation and Service Manual

Maintenence Analysis Procedures

3

17

An E_Port is fenced because of a protocol error. Depending on failure cause, additional information and event codes are available at the product or attached switch. Perform one of the following:

• The E_Port is segmented and accompanied by primary event code 070. Go to

step 7

.

• The fiber-optic cable is disconnected, the cable failed or is degraded, or the port optical transceiver failed. The failure is accompanied by a primary event code indicating the failure type.

Go to MAP 0000: Start MAP and perform fault isolation for the

primary event code. Exit MAP.

• The E_Port is fenced because of persistent incomplete

operations (ISL bouncing). Go to MAP 0000: Start MAP

and perform fault isolation at the attached switch. Exit MAP.

• The E_Port is fenced because of application-layer protocol

errors. Go to MAP 0000: Start MAP and perform fault isolation at

the attached switch. Exit MAP.

18

An E_Port is fenced because devices connected to the attached fabric element are flooding the ISL with frames (hot I/O). These link-level problems are typically associated with legacy devices, arbitrated loop devices, or magnetic tape drives. Perform one of the following:

• Disconnect the ISL. Exit MAP.

• Refer to the manufacturer’s documentation and perform fault isolation at the attached device or fabric element. Exit MAP.

• Change port fencing threshold settings to more lenient values.

Go to

step 20

.

19

An E_Port is fenced because of persistent firmware-related security violations (SANtegrity binding or SANtegrity authentication failures).

a. At the EFCM Basic Edition interface, SAN management application, or Element Manager, change binding membership lists or authentication parameters as directed by the customer:

MAP 0600: Fabric or ISL Problem Analysis 3-47

3

Maintenence Analysis Procedures

— EFCM Basic Edition - Refer to the McDATA EFCM Basic

Edition User Manual (620-000240) for instructions.

— SAN management application - Refer to the EFC Manager

Software Release 8.7 User Manual (620-000170) for instructions.

— Element Manager - Refer to the McDATA Sphereon 4400

Fabric Switch Element Manager User Manual (620-000241) for instructions.

b. Unblock the port. Refer to

Blocking or Unblocking a Port (EFCM

Basic Edition) or

Blocking or Unblocking a Port

(Element

Manager).

Was the maintenance action successful?

NO

↓

YES

The fabric, ISL, and product are operational. Exit MAP.

Contact the next level of support. Exit MAP.

20

Port fencing threshold settings are too restrictive.

a. At the EFCM Basic Edition interface or SAN management application, change port fencing threshold settings to more lenient values as directed by the customer:

— EFCM Basic Edition - Refer to the McDATA EFCM Basic

Edition User Manual (620-000240) for instructions.

— SAN management application - Refer to the EFC Manager

Software Release 8.7 User Manual (620-000170) for instructions.

b. Unblock the port. Refer to

Blocking or Unblocking a Port (EFCM

Basic Edition) or

Blocking or Unblocking a Port

(Element

Manager).

Was the maintenance action successful?

NO

↓

YES

The fabric, ISL, and product are operational. Exit MAP.

Contact the next level of support. Exit MAP.

3-48 McDATA Sphereon 4400 Fabric Switch Installation and Service Manual

Maintenence Analysis Procedures

3

21

Event codes 140 and 142 occur only if the optional OpenTrunking feature is enabled.

• Event code 140 - OpenTrunking firmware detected an ISL with

Fibre Channel traffic that exceeds the configured congestion threshold.

• Event code 142 - OpenTrunking firmware detected an ISL with no transmission BB_Credit for a period of time that exceeded the configured low BB_Credit threshold. This results in downstream fabric congestion.

No action is required for an isolated event or if the reporting ISL approaches 100% throughput. If the event persists, perform one of the following:

• Relieve the congestion by adding parallel ISLs between the fabric elements reporting the problem.

• Increase the ISL link speed between the fabric elements reporting the problem (from 1 Gbps to 2 or 4 Gbps).

• Reroute Fibre Channel traffic by moving device connections to a less-congested region of the fabric.

Was the maintenance action successful?

NO

↓

YES

The fabric, ISL, and product are operational. Exit MAP.

Contact the next level of support. Exit MAP.

22

Event code 150 indicates a fabric merge process failed during ISL initialization. An incompatible zone set was detected or a problem occurred during delivery of a zone merge frame. This event code always precedes event code 070, and represents the reply of an adjacent fabric element in response to a zone merge frame. Obtain supplementary event data as follows: a. At the Event Log, examine the first 12 bytes (0 through 11) of event data.

b. Bytes 0 specifies the E_Port reporting the problem. Bytes 8 through 11 specify the failure reason as listed in

Table 3-16

.

MAP 0600: Fabric or ISL Problem Analysis 3-49

3

Maintenence Analysis Procedures

Table 3-16 Fabric Merge Failure Reasons and Actions

Bytes 8 - 11 Merge Failure Reason

01

08

Invalid data length.

Invalid zone set format.

09

0A

F0

F1

F2

Invalid data.

Cannot merge.

Retry limit reached.

Invalid response length.

Invalid response code.

Action

Go to

step 23 .

Go to

step 23 .

Go to

step 24 .

Go to

step 24 .

Go to

step 23 .

Go to

step 23 .

Go to

step 23 .

23

A zone merge process failed during ISL initialization. The following list explains the reason:

• Reason 01 - An invalid data length condition caused an error in a zone merge frame.

• Reason 08 - An invalid zone set format caused an error in a zone merge frame.

• Reason F0 - A retry limit reached condition caused an error in a zone merge frame.

• Reason F1 - An invalid response length condition caused an error in a zone merge frame.

• Reason F2 - An invalid response code caused an error in a zone merge frame.

Disconnect the fiber-optic jumper cable from the E_Port reporting the problem, then reconnect the cable to the same port.

Was the maintenance action successful?

NO

↓

YES

The fabric, ISL, and product are operational. Exit MAP.

Perform a data collection and contact the next level of support. Refer to

Collecting Maintenance Data

(EFCM Basic Edition) or Collecting

Maintenance Data (Element Manager). Exit MAP.

3-50 McDATA Sphereon 4400 Fabric Switch Installation and Service Manual

Maintenence Analysis Procedures

3

24

A zone merge process failed during ISL initialization. The following list explains the reason:

• Reason 09 - Invalid data caused a zone merge failure.

• Reason 0A - A Cannot Merge condition caused a zone merge failure.

Obtain supplementary error code data for event code 150. At the

Event Log, examine bytes 12 through 15 of event data that specify the error code. Record the error code.

Perform a data collection and contact the next level of support. Refer to

Collecting Maintenance Data

(EFCM Basic Edition) or Collecting

Maintenance Data (Element Manager). Report the event code,

associated failure reason, and supplementary error code. Exit MAP.

MAP 0600: Fabric or ISL Problem Analysis 3-51

3

Maintenence Analysis Procedures

3-52 McDATA Sphereon 4400 Fabric Switch Installation and Service Manual

4

Repair Information

This chapter describes repair-related procedures for the Sphereon

4400 Fabric Switch. The procedures are performed at the switch, a browser-capable PC communicating with the product-resident

Enterprise Fabric Connectivity Manager (EFCM) Basic Edition interface, or a rack-mount management server running a storage area network (SAN) management application. The chapter describes:

•

Procedural Notes on page 4-2

•

Power On Switch on page 4-2

•

Power Off Switch on page 4-3

•

IML or Reset Switch on page 4-3

•

Clean Fiber-Optic Components on page 4-5.

•

Download Firmware or Software from the Filecenter on page 4-6

•

Port LED Diagnostics on page 4-8

•

Repair Procedures - EFCM Basic Edition on page 4-10

•

Repair Procedures - SAN Management Application on page 4-28

4-1

4

Repair Information

Procedural Notes

Observe the following procedural notes:

1. Follow all electrostatic discharge (ESD) precautions and

DANGER , CAUTION, and ATTENTION statements.

2. Before performing a procedure, read the procedure carefully and thoroughly to familiarize yourself with the information.

Power On Switch

To power on the switch:

1. One alternating current (AC) power cord is required for each external power supply. Ensure the correct power cords are available.

DANGER

Use the supplied power cords. Ensure that the facility power receptacle is the correct type, supplies the required voltage, and is properly grounded. (D004)

2. Plug power cords into facility power sources and AC connectors on each external power supply.

3. Connect each power supply adapter cord to a threaded output jack at the rear of the switch.

4. Twist the cord clockwise to lock and secure the connection. When the first adapter cord is connected, the switch powers on and performs power-on self-tests (POSTs).

NOTE: For high availability, plug the power cords into separate facility power circuits.

During POSTs:

— The green PWR LED on the switch front panel illuminates.

— The amber ERR LED on the switch front panel blinks momentarily while the switch is tested.

4-2 McDATA Sphereon 4400 Fabric Switch Installation and Service Manual

Repair Information

4

— The green LED associated with the Ethernet port blinks momentarily while the port is tested.

— The green and amber LEDs associated with Fibre Channel ports blink momentarily while the ports are tested.

After successful POST completion, the PWR LED remains illuminated and all amber LEDs extinguish.

5. If a POST error occurs, go to

MAP 0000: Start MAP to isolate the

problem.

Power Off Switch

Inform the customer the switch is to be powered off. Ensure the system administrator quiesces Fibre Channel frame traffic through the switch and sets attached devices offline.

To power off the switch, use the following steps:

1. Set the switch offline. Refer to Setting Online State

(EFCM Basic

Edition) or Setting Online State

(Element Manager) for instructions.

2. Twist external power supply adapter cords counterclockwise to unlock connections, then disconnect cords from threaded output jacks at the rear of the switch.

IML or Reset Switch

An initial machine load (IML) or reset is performed at the switch front panel using the RESET button. An IML does not cause power-on diagnostics to execute and is not disruptive to Fibre

Channel traffic. An IML:

• Reloads switch firmware from FLASH memory.

• Resets the Ethernet LAN interface, causing the connection to the browser PC or management server to drop momentarily until the connection automatically recovers.

A reset is disruptive to Fibre Channel traffic and resets the:

• Microprocessor and functional logic for the control processor

(CTP) card and reloads the firmware from FLASH memory.

Power Off Switch 4-3

4

Repair Information

IML

Reset

• Ethernet LAN interface, causing the connection to the browser PC or management server to drop momentarily until the connection automatically recovers.

• Ports, causing all Fibre Channel connections to drop momentarily until the connections automatically recover. This causes attached devices to log out and log back in, therefore data frames lost during switch reset must be retransmitted.

ATTENTION ! A reset should only be performed if a CTP card failure is indicated. Do not reset a switch unless directed to do so by a procedural step or the next level of support.

To IML the switch use the following steps:

1. Press and hold the RESET button (about three seconds) until the amber ERR LED blinks at twice the unit beaconing rate.

2. Release the button. During the IML, the switch-to-browser PC (or management server) Ethernet link drops momentarily.

To reset the switch use the following steps:

1. Press and hold the RESET button for ten seconds.

— After holding the button for three seconds, the amber ERR

LED blinks at twice the unit beaconing rate.

— After holding the button for ten seconds, the ERR LED stops blinking, and all front panel LEDs illuminate.

2. Release the button to reset the switch. During the reset:

— The green PWR LED on the switch front panel illuminates.

— The amber ERR LED on the switch front panel blinks momentarily while the switch is tested.

— The green LED associated with the Ethernet port blinks momentarily while the port is tested.

— Green and amber LEDs associated with Fibre Channel ports blink momentarily while the ports are tested.

— The switch-to-browser PC (or management server) Ethernet link drops momentarily.

4-4 McDATA Sphereon 4400 Fabric Switch Installation and Service Manual

Repair Information

4

Clean Fiber-Optic Components

Perform this procedure as directed by a service procedural step or when connecting or disconnecting fiber-optic cables from port optical transceivers.

The following tools (supplied by service personnel) are required:

• ESD grounding cable and wrist strap.

• Fiber-optic cleaning kit with:

— Oil-free compressed air or HFC-134a aerosol duster.

— Alcohol-soaked cleaning pads.

CAUTION

Wear eye protection when using an aerosol duster.

To clean fiber-optic components use the following steps:

1. Optical transceivers are ESD-sensitive. Ensure an ESD grounding cable is connected to the product chassis and your wrist.

2. Disconnect the fiber-optic cable from the optical transceiver as directed by a customer representative or service procedural step.

3. Use an aerosol duster to blow any contaminants from the component (part 1 of

Figure 4-1 ).

— Hold the duster upright and keep the air nozzle approximately 50 millimeters (two inches) from the end of the component.

— For approximately five seconds, continuously blow compressed air or HFC-134a gas on exposed surfaces and the end-face of the component.

Clean Fiber-Optic Components 4-5

4

Repair Information

Figure 4-1 Clean Fiber-Optic Components

4. Gently wipe the end-face and other surfaces of the component

with an alcohol pad (part 2 of Figure 4-1

). Ensure the pad makes full contact with the surface to be cleaned. Wait approximately five seconds for cleaned surfaces to dry.

5. Repeat steps two and three (second cleaning).

6. Repeat steps two and three (third cleaning).

7. Reconnect the fiber-optic cable to the optical transceiver.

Download Firmware or Software from the Filecenter

The firmware version shipped with the product is provided on the

System Version XX.YY.ZZ

CD-ROM. The SAN management application (software) shipped with the product is provided on the

EFC Management Applications CD-ROM. Subsequent (upgrade) firmware and software versions are provided to customers through the McDATA Filecenter.

NOTE: When upgrading firmware or software, follow all procedural information contained in release notes or engineering change (EC) instructions that accompany the version. Such information supplements information provided in this general procedure.

Download the firmware or software version to the hard drive of a server with Internet access. This server can be the rack-mount management server or PC communicating with the EFCM Basic

Edition interface.

To download a firmware or software version use the following steps:

4-6 McDATA Sphereon 4400 Fabric Switch Installation and Service Manual

Repair Information

4

1. Open the McDATA home page ( http://mcdata.com

). Select File

Center from the Support menu. The Filecenter home page opens

(

Figure 4-2 ).

Figure 4-2 McDATA Filecenter Home Page

2. Select (click) Login at the top of the page. The Login page appears.

3. Type a user name and password (assigned and registered while

performing Task 24: Register with the McDATA Filecenter

) and click

Login . The Welcome, you have been logged in page appears.

4. Select (click) Documents at the top of the page. The Search / New

Documents / By Category page appears.

5. Select (highlight) the desired option (firmware or software) from the list box and click Search. The Documents Match page appears with a list of firmware or software available for download.

6. As the secure symbol ( ) in the Status column indicates, authorization to download a firmware or software version requires approval. In the Action column adjacent to the desired version, click Add to Request. The Current Request: Not Yet

Submitted page appears.

7. Type the serial number of the product at the Associated Serial

Number field, to which the firmware or software download applies and click Submit Request. The Request Submitted page appears and the request for approval is e-mailed to support personnel.

Download Firmware or Software from the Filecenter 4-7

4

Repair Information

8. Wait approximately five minutes for a response, then select (click)

My Requests at the top of the page. The Request History page appears with the approved request (indicated by an approved symbol ( ) in the Status column).

9. In the Action column adjacent to the approved request for the firmware or software version, click Download. The File Download dialog box appears.

10. Click Save. The Save As dialog box appears.

11. At the Save As dialog box, ensure the correct directory path is specified at the Save in field, the correct file is specified in the File name field, and click Save.

12. A Download dialog box appears, showing the estimated time remaining to complete the firmware or software download process. When the process finishes, the dialog box changes to a

Download complete dialog box.

13. Click Close to close the dialog box. The new firmware or software version is downloaded and saved to the server hard drive.

14. Close the Internet session.

15. If required, transfer the downloaded file from the server to the rack-mount management server or PC communicating with the

EFCM Basic Edition interface. Use a diskette, CD-ROM, or other electronic means.

Port LED Diagnostics

Table 4-1

.

Fibre Channel port diagnostic information is obtained by inspecting port LEDs at the product front panel or emulated port LEDs at the management interface (EFCM Basic Edition interface or SAN management application). LEDs adjacent to each port and software alert symbols indicate operational status as described in

Table 4-1

Port Operational States

Port

State

Online

Green

LED

On or

Blinking

Off

Amber

LED

None

Alert

Symbol

Description

An attached device is ready to communicate, or is communicating with other devices. Green LED illuminates.

4-8 McDATA Sphereon 4400 Fabric Switch Installation and Service Manual

Repair Information

4

Table 4-1

Port

State

Offline

Beaconing Off, On, or

Blinking

Invalid

Attachment

On

Link

Incident

Off

Link Reset Off

Blinking

Off

Off

Off

No Light

Inactive

Port Operational States (continued)

Off

Off

Off

On

Not

Installed

Off

Not

Operational

Off

Port Failure Off

Green

LED

Off

Amber

LED

Off

Off

Off

Off

Off

On

None

Alert

Symbol

Yellow Triangle

Yellow Triangle

Yellow Triangle

Yellow Triangle

Yellow Triangle

None

Yellow Triangle

None

Description

Port is blocked and transmitting the offline sequence (OLS) to attached device.

Port is unblocked and receiving the OLS, indicating attached device is offline.

Port is beaconing. Amber LED blinks once every two seconds to enable users to locate port.

Port has an invalid attachment. Reason appears as supplementary data in the Event Log.

Link incident occurred. Reason appears in the Link Incident

Log.

Product and attached device are performing a link reset to recover the connection. Transient state that does not persist.

No signal (light) is received at product port. Normal condition when no cable is attached to port or when attached device is powered off.

Port is inactive. Reason appears at Port List View or Port

Properties dialog box.

Optical transceiver not installed in the port.

Segmented

E_Port

On

Testing Off

On

Off

Blinking

Blinking

Yellow Triangle Port is receiving the not operational sequence (NOS) from attached device.

Red and Yellow

Blinking Diamond

Port failed and requires service.

Yellow Triangle E_Port segmented, preventing connected switches from forming a fabric. Reason appears as supplementary data in the Event Log.

Yellow Triangle Port is performing an internal loopback test.

Yellow Triangle Port is performing an external loopback test.

Port LED Diagnostics 4-9

4

Repair Information

Repair Procedures - EFCM Basic Edition

The following procedures (performed at a PC communicating with the EFCM Basic Edition interface) are described:

•

Obtaining Log Information on page 4-10

•

Performing Port Diagnostics on page 4-13

•

Collecting Maintenance Data on page 4-20

•

Setting Online State on page 4-21

•

Blocking or Unblocking a Port on page 4-22

•

Upgrading Firmware on page 4-23

•

Managing Configuration Data on page 4-25

4-10

Obtaining Log

Information

Event Log

The EFCM Basic Edition interface provides access to logs that contain maintenance information. Select the desired log from the Logs menu at any view. Logs with maintenance information are:

• Event.

• Link Incident.

• Audit

• Security

• Open Trunking Re-Route.

• Fabric.

• Embedded Port Frame.

• Syslog Configuration.

The Event Log records events or errors. Entries reflect the status of the management interface and managed product. The log describes:

• Date/Time - Date and time the event occurred.

• Error Code - Three-digit code that describes the event. Event codes are listed and described in

Appendix A , Event Code Tables .

• Severity - Event severity (Informational, Minor, Major, or Severe).

• Event Data - Supplementary information (if available) in hexadecimal format. Event data is described in

Appendix A ,

Event Code Tables

.

McDATA Sphereon 4400 Fabric Switch Installation and Service Manual

Repair Information

4

Link Incident Log

Audit Log

Security Log

The Link Incident Log records Fibre Channel link incident events and causes. The log describes:

• Date/Time - Date and time the link incident occurred.

• Port - Port number reporting the link incident.

• Link Incident Event - Brief description of the link incident and cause, including:

— Implicit incident.

— Bit-error threshold exceeded.

— Loss of signal or loss of synchronization.

— Not-operational primitive sequence received.

— Primitive sequence timeout.

— Invalid primitive sequence received for current link state.

Refer to

MAP 0500: Port Failure or Link Incident Analysis

for corrective actions.

The audit log appears a history of all configuration changes applied to the switch from any source such as Element Manager, SNMP management stations, or host. The audit log provides:

• Date/Time - The date and time of the log entry.

• Source - The source of Audit Log event.

• User ID - Identifier of the user that issued the command. The identifier is usually an IP address.

• Action - The type of Audit Log event.

The security log provides:

• Reason - The reason code for the security event

• Date/Time - The date/time when the event occurred.

• Trigger Level - The trigger level of the event. Possible values include: Informational, Security Change, or Error

• Count - A cumulative count of events within a known period.

• Category - The event category message with possible values may be: Successful Connection, Disconnection, Configuration Change,

Authorization Failure, Authentication Failure, or Reserved.

• Description - Description of the event.

Repair Procedures - EFCM Basic Edition 4-11

4

Repair Information

4-12

Open Trunking

Re-Route Log

Fabric Log

• Data - Any extra or event specific data.

The Open Trunking Re-Route Log records interswitch link (ISL) congestion events that cause Fibre Channel traffic to be routed through an alternate ISL. Entries reflect the traffic re-route status at the managed product. The log describes:

• Date/Time - Date and time the re-route occurred.

• Receive Port - Target port number (decimal) receiving Fibre

Channel traffic after the re-route.

• Target Domain - Target device domain ID (decimal) receiving

Fibre Channel traffic after the re-route.

• Old Exit Port - Port number (decimal) transmitting Fibre Channel traffic before the re-route.

• New Exit Port - Port number (decimal) transmitting Fibre

Channel traffic after the re-route.

The Fabric Log records the time and nature of changes made to a multiswitch fabric. The information is useful for isolating zoning or fabric-wide problems. The log describes:

• Count - Cumulative count of log entries (wrapping or non-wrapping).

• Date/Time - Date and time the change occurred.

• Description - Description of the zoning or fabric change.

• Data - Supplementary information (if available) in text format.

NOTE: Identical entries are recorded in the wrapping and non-wrapping logs. When the non-wrapping log fills, old records are overwritten. The wrapping log preserves all records.

Embedded Port Frame

Log

The Embedded Port Frame Log records all Fibre Channel frames transmitted through the product’s embedded port, including Class F traffic, fabric logins, state change notifications, and exception frames.

The information is useful for Fibre Channel frame debugging

(usually performed by second-level support. The log describes:

• Count - Cumulative count of log entries (wrapping or non-wrapping).

• Date/Time - Date and time frame was transmitted through the embedded port.

McDATA Sphereon 4400 Fabric Switch Installation and Service Manual

Repair Information

4

Syslog Configuration

• Port # - Fibre Channel port number (decimal) transmitting frame through the embedded port.

• Direction - Fibre Channel frame direction - incoming (I) or outgoing (O).

• SOF - Start of frame character (hexadecimal).

• EOF - End of frame character (hexadecimal).

• Payload Size - Size of frame payload in bytes.

• Header - 24-byte frame header (hexadecimal).

• Payload - First 32 bytes of frame payload (hexadecimal).

The Syslog Configuration page enables you to configure client systems to receive logs from the product.

A remote host receives copies of the system logs (syslogs), providing a means to view logs if the product is unavailable.

The recipient clients are identified by IP address. You can specify multiple clients for receiving logs. The interface also enables you to choose which logs the product sends to its syslog recipients.

The following tasks can be performed using the Syslog

Configuration:

• Enable and disable syslogs.

• Add a syslog recipient to the list.

• Edit information for a syslog recipient.

• Delete syslog recipients from the list.

• Identify which logs are sent to recipients.

Performing Port

Diagnostics

Port List View

Fibre Channel port diagnostic information is obtained by:

• Inspecting port properties, predictive optics monitoring (POM) data, or port transceiver technology information at the lower panel of the Port List View.

• Inspecting statistical information at the Performance View.

• Performing an internal or external loopback test.

The EFCM Basic Edition interface provides access to port diagnostic information through the Port List View. To open this view, select Port

Repair Procedures - EFCM Basic Edition 4-13

4

Repair Information

List from the Product menu at any view. As an example, the figure

shows POM data in the lower panel ( Figure 4-3

).

Table 4-2 Port List Table

Port Property

Port

Name

Block Configuration

Operational State

Type

Figure 4-3

Health Status

Transceiver

Port List View

A row of information for each port appears. Each row consists of the following columns::

Description

The product port number.

The user-defined name or description for the port.

Indicates if a port is blocked or unblocked.

Port state (Online, Offline, Not Installed, Inactive, Invalid Attachment, Link Reset, No

Light, Not Operational, Port Failure, Segmented E_Port, or Testing).

The type of port, including generic mixed port (GX_Port), fabric mixed port (FX_Port), generic port (G_Port), fabric port (F_Port), or expansion port (E_Port).

The condition of the installed optical transceiver (Normal, Warning, Alarm, or No Info).

Installed transceiver type (SFP, XFP, or Unknown).

4-14 McDATA Sphereon 4400 Fabric Switch Installation and Service Manual

Repair Information

4

Table 4-3

Inspect Port Properties

At the Port List View, click a physical port number listed in the Port column. Physical properties for the selected port appear in the lower panel of the view:

Inspect Port Properties Table

Port Property

Port Number

Port Name

Port Type

Description

The product’s port number.

The user-defined name or description for the port.

The user-defined port type (GX_Port, FX_Port, G_Port, F_Port, or E_Port).

Operating Speed The port operating speed (Not Established, 1 Gbps, 2 Gbps, or 4 Gbps)

Fibre Channel Address The Port FC address identifier. Port FC address if the port was swapped.

Port WWN

Attached Port WWN

The Fibre Channel world wide name (WWN) of the port.

Fibre Channel WWN of the device attached to the port.

Block Configuration

Block Reason

Beaconing

FAN Configuration

RX BB Credit

Operational State

Reason

The user-configured state for the port (Blocked or Unblocked).

The reason for blocking the port.

The user-specified for the port (On or Off).

User-configured state for fabric address notification (FAN) configuration (Enabled or

Disabled).

The number of receive BB credits available for the port.

The port state (Online, Offline, Not Installed, Inactive, Invalid Attachment, Link Reset,

No Light, Not Operational, Port Failure, Segmented E_Port, Disabled, or Testing).

A summary appears describing the reason if the port state is Segmented E_Port, In-

valid Attachment, or Inactive. For any other port state, the reason is N/A.

Repair Procedures - EFCM Basic Edition 4-15

4

Repair Information

Table 4-4 POM Data Table

Inspect POM Data

At the Port List View, click the entry for a port in the Health Status column. POM data for the selected port appears in the lower panel of the view (

Figure 4-3 ):

Port Property

Port Number

Health Status

Transceiver Type

Description

The product’s port number.

The condition of the installed optical transceiver (Normal, Warning, Alarm, or No Info).

The installed transceiver type (SFP, XFP, or Unknown).

Table 4-5

If the port has a digital diagnostics (DD) enabled optical transceiver installed, product firmware appears a table of reported temperature, voltage, current, transceiver power, and receiver power. Optical transceivers also provide vendor-specific threshold values for these parameters.

Inspect Port Transceiver Technology

At the Port List View, click the entry for a port in the Transceiver column. Port transceiver technology information for the selected port appears in the lower panel of the view:

Inspect Port Transceiver Technology Table

Port Property

Port Number

Identifier

Connector type

Transceiver

Distance Capability

Media

Speed

Description

The product’s port number.

The installed transceiver type (SFP, XFP, or Unknown).

The type of port connector (LC, MT_RJ, MU, Unknown, or Internal Port).

The type of port transceiver (Shortwave Laser, Longwave Laser, Long Distance Laser,

Unknown, or None).

The port transmission distance (Short, Intermediate, Long, Very Long, or Unknown).

The type of optical cable used (Singlemode, multimode 50-micron, multimode 62.5-mi-

cron, or Unknown).

The operating speed (Not Established, 1 Gbps, 2 Gbps, or 4 Gbps).

4-16 McDATA Sphereon 4400 Fabric Switch Installation and Service Manual

Repair Information

4

Performance View

Table 4-6

The EFCM Basic Edition interface provides access to port statistics information through the Performance View.

• To open this view, select Performance from the Product menu

(Product>Performance). The following statistical information appears:

Performance View Table

Statistics

Traffic Statistics

Error Statistics

Class 2 Statistics

Description

Port transmit and receive values for frames

Four-byte words transmit and receive value for frames

Offline sequences transmit and receive value for frames

Link resets and link utilization percentage.

Time spent using no transmission buffer-to-buffer credit (BB_Credit)

Number of:

Link failures

Synchronization and signal losses

Discarded frames

Invalid transmission words

Primitive sequence errors

Cyclic redundancy check (CRC) errors

Delimiter errors

Address identification errors

Short frames.

Number of:

4-byte words transmitted and received

Class 2 frames transmitted, received, busied, or rejected.

Class 3 Statistics Number of:

4-byte words transmitted and received

Class 3 frames transmitted, received, or discarded.

Open Trunking Statistics These statistics include the number of traffic flows rerouted to or from an ISL due to congestion.

Internal Loopback

Test

An internal loopback test checks internal port, serializer, and deserializer circuitry and checks for the presence of an optical transceiver, but does not check fiber-optic components of the installed transceiver. Operation of the attached device is disrupted during the test.

Repair Procedures - EFCM Basic Edition 4-17

4

Repair Information

Inform the customer a disruptive internal loopback test is to be performed. Ensure the system administrator quiesces Fibre Channel frame traffic through the por and sets the attached device offline.

NOTE: A small form factor pluggable (SFP) optical transceiver must be installed in the port during the test. A device can remain connected during the test.

To perform the test use the following steps:

1. Select Diagnostics from the Maintenance menu

(Maintenance>Ports>Diagnostics). The Diagnostics View appears

(

Figure 4-4 ).

Figure 4-4 Diagnostics View

2. Type the port number to be tested in the Targeted Port Number field.

3. Select the Internal Loopback option, at the Diagnostic Test list box.

4. Click Start. The test begins and: a. The Diagnostics View changes to a Diagnostics - Executing View.

b. The message Diagnostics Time Remaining: xx appears, where xx are the seconds remaining in the test. The test takes approximately 30 seconds.

NOTE: Click Stop at any time to abort the loopback test.

4-18 McDATA Sphereon 4400 Fabric Switch Installation and Service Manual

Repair Information

4

External Loopback

Test

When the test completes, the Diagnostics - Executing View reverts to the Diagnostics View. Test results appear as Passed, Failed, or

Test Incomplete in the message area of the view.

5. Reset the tested port: a. Select Ports and Reset from the Maintenance menu at any view.

The Reset View appears.

b. For the tested port, click (enable) the check box in the Reset column. A check mark in the box indicates the port reset option is enabled.

c. Click OK. The port resets.

6. Inform the customer that the test is complete and the attached device can be set online.

An external loopback test checks all port circuitry, including fiber-optic components of the installed optical transceiver. To perform the test, the attached device must be quiesced and disconnected from the port, and a multimode loopback plug must be inserted in the port.

Inform the customer a disruptive external loopback test is to be performed and the attached device must be disconnected.

To perform the test, use the following steps:

1. Disconnect the fiber-optic jumper cable from the port to be tested.

2. Insert a multimode loopback plug into the port receptacle.

3. Select Ports and Diagnostics from the Maintenance menu

(Maintenance>Diagnostics). The Diagnostics View appears

(

Figure 4-4 ).

4. Type the port number to be tested in the Targeted Port Number field.

5. Select the External Loopback option at the Diagnostic Test list box .

6. Click Start. The test begins and: a. The Diagnostics View changes to a Diagnostics -Executing View.

b. The message Diagnostics Time Remaining: xx appears, where xx are the seconds remaining in the test. The test takes approximately 30 seconds.

Repair Procedures - EFCM Basic Edition 4-19

4

Repair Information

Collecting

Maintenance Data

NOTE: Click Stop at any time to abort the loopback test.

When the test completes, the Diagnostics - Executing View reverts to the Diagnostics View. Test results appear as Passed, Failed, or

Test Incomplete in the message area of the view.

7. Remove the loopback plug and reconnect the fiber-optic jumper

cable from the device to the port (disconnected in step 1 ).

8. Reset the tested port: a. Select Ports and Reset from the Maintenance menu at any view.

The Reset View appears.

b. For the tested port, click (enable) the check box in the Reset column. A check mark in the box indicates the port reset option is enabled.

c. Click OK. The port resets.

9. Inform the customer that the test is complete and the device can be reconnected and set online.

When firmware detects a critical error, the product automatically copies the contents of dynamic random access memory (DRAM) to a dump area in FLASH memory on the CTP card. Perform this procedure after a firmware fault or FRU failure to capture data for analysis by support personnel. Maintenance data includes the dump file and engineering logs.

NOTE: An optional full-volatility feature is often required at military sites that process classified data. If the feature is enabled through a product feature enablement (PFE) key, a memory dump file (that may include classified Fibre Channel frames) is not included as part of the data collection procedure.

To collect maintenance data use the following steps:

1. Select System Files from the Maintenance menu

(Maintenance>System Files). The System Files View appears

(

Figure 4-5 ).

4-20 McDATA Sphereon 4400 Fabric Switch Installation and Service Manual

Repair Information

4

Figure 4-5 System Files View

2. Right-click the Data Collection link to open a list of menu options.

Select the Save Target As menu option. The Save As dialog box appears.

3. Insert a blank diskette in the floppy drive of the PC communicating with the EFCM Basic Edition interface.

4. At the Save As dialog box, select the floppy drive (A:\) from the

Save in drop-down menu, type a descriptive name for the zipped

(.zip) dump file in the File name field, and click Save.

5. A Download dialog box appears, showing the estimated time remaining to complete the download process. When finished, the dialog box changes to a Download complete dialog box.

6. Click Close to close the dialog box.

7. Remove the diskette with the newly-collected maintenance data from the PC floppy drive. Return the diskette with the failed FRU to support personnel for failure analysis.

Setting Online State

This section describes procedures to set the product online or offline.

Operational states are:

• Online - When the product is set online, an attached device can log in if the port is not blocked. Attached devices in the same zone can communicate with each other.

• Offline - When the product is set offline, all ports are set offline and operation of attached Fibre Channel devices is disrupted. The product transmits the OLS to attached devices, and the devices cannot log in.

Repair Procedures - EFCM Basic Edition 4-21

4

Repair Information

NOTE: Do not set the product offline unless directed to do so by a procedural step or the next level of support.

To set the product online or offline use the following steps:

1. Select Switch from the Maintenance menu (Maintenance>Switch).

The Switch View appears (

Figure 4-6 ).

Blocking or

Figure 4-6 Switch View

2. Perform one of the following:

— If the product is offline, click the Activate button adjacent to the Current Online State: field. The product comes online.

— If the product is online, click the Deactivate button adjacent to the Current Online State: field. The product goes offline.

Unblocking a Port

This section describes procedures to block or unblock a Fibre Channel port. Blocking a port prevents an attached device or fabric element from communicating. A blocked port continuously transmits the

OLS. To block or unblock a port use the following steps:

1. Select Ports and Basic Info from the Configure menu

(Configure>Ports>Basic Info). The Basic Information View appears

(

Figure 4-7 ).

4-22 McDATA Sphereon 4400 Fabric Switch Installation and Service Manual

Repair Information

4

Figure 4-7 Basic Information View

2. Perform one of the following:

— Click the check box for the selected port in the Blocked column to block the port (default is unblocked). A check mark in the box indicates the port is blocked.

— Click the check box for the selected port in the Blocked column to remove the check mark and unblock the port. A blank box indicates the port is unblocked.

3. Click OK to save and activate changes.

Upgrading Firmware

Firmware is the product operating code stored in FLASH memory on the CTP card. Multiple firmware versions can be stored on a PC hard drive and made available for download through the EFCM Basic

Edition interface. Perform the following firmware upgrade tasks at the EFCM Basic Edition interface:

• Determine the active firmware version.

• Download a firmware version.

Determine Firmware Version

To determine a firmware version, select Hardware from the Product menu (Product >Hardware). The Hardware View appears. At the bottom

Repair Procedures - EFCM Basic Edition 4-23

4

Repair Information of the page, record the firmware version listed in the Firmware Level field.

Download Firmware Version

Ensure that the desired firmware version is obtained from the

Filecenter and resident on the hard drive of the PC communicating

with the EFCM Basic Edition interface. Refer to Download Firmware or

Software from the Filecenter

for instructions.

NOTE: When upgrading firmware, follow all procedural information contained in release notes or engineering change (EC) instructions that accompany the version. Such information supplements information provided in this general procedure.

To download a firmware version use the following steps:

1. Select Firmware Upgrade from the Maintenance menu(Maintenance>Firmware Upgrade). The Firmware Upgrade

View

appears ( Figure 4-8

).

Figure 4-8 Firmware Upgrade View

2. At the Download Firmware file from field, select the desired file from the PC hard drive using the Browse button or type the desired filename.

3. Click Send and Load Firmware. A message box appears, indicating any browser operation will terminate the firmware download.

4-24 McDATA Sphereon 4400 Fabric Switch Installation and Service Manual

Repair Information

4

4. Click OK to download firmware. The process takes several minutes to complete, during which the browser is unavailable.

When the process completes, the message Firmware successfully received and verified. Your browser connection will be unavailable until unit restart is complete.

appears.

After verification, the switch performs an initial program load

(IPL) that takes approximately 30 seconds to complete. During the IPL, the browser-to-switch Internet connection drops momentarily and the EFCM Basic Edition session is lost.

5. After the switch IPL and EFCM Basic Edition session logout, the message Firmware upgrade complete. Click here to login. appears.

6. Click here to login and start a new EFCM Basic Edition session.

The Enter Network Password dialog box appears.

7. Type the default user name and password.

NOTE: The default user name is Administrator and the default password is password. Both are case-sensitive.

8. Click OK. The EFCM Basic Edition interface opens with the

Hardware View panel displayed.

Managing

Configuration Data

Back Up Configuration

The EFCM Basic Edition interface provides options to:

• Back up and restore the configuration file stored in nonvolatile random-access memory (NV-RAM) on the switch CTP card.

• Reset the configuration file to factory default values.

The switch must be set offline prior to restoring or resetting the configuration file.

To back up the switch configuration file to the PC communicating with the EFCM Basic Edition interface:

1. Select Backup Configuration from the Maintenance menu

(Maintenance>Backup Configuration). The Backup Configuration

View

appears ( Figure 4-9

).

Repair Procedures - EFCM Basic Edition 4-25

4

Repair Information

Figure 4-9

Restore Configuration

Backup Configuration View

2. Right-click the Configuration file link to open a list of menu options. Select the Save Target As menu option. The Save As dialog box appears.

3. Select the hard drive (C:\) from the Save in drop-down menu at the Save As dialog box, type a descriptive name for the extensible markup language (.xml) configuration file in the File name field, and click Save.

4. A Download dialog box appears, showing the estimated time remaining to complete the backup process. When finished, the dialog box changes to a Download complete dialog box.

5. Click Close to close the dialog box.

To restore the switch configuration file from the PC communicating with the EFCM Basic Edition interface:

Inform the customer the switch is to be set offline. Ensure the system administrator quiesces Fibre Channel frame traffic through the switch and sets attached devices offline.

1. Set the switch offline. For instructions, refer to

Setting Online

State .

2. Select Restore Configuration from the Maintenance menu

(Maintenance>Restore Configuration). The Restore Configuration

View

appears ( Figure 4-10 ).

4-26 McDATA Sphereon 4400 Fabric Switch Installation and Service Manual

Repair Information

4

Figure 4-10 Restore Configuration View

Reset Configuration

Data

3. Select the desired file from the PC hard drive at the Download

Configuration file from field, using the Browse button or type the desired filename.

4. Click Send and Load Configuration. A message box appears, indicating any browser operation will terminate the configuration download.

5. Click OK to download the configuration. The process takes several minutes to complete, during which the browser is unavailable. When the process completes, the message

Configuration restored successfully.

appears.

When configuration data is reset to factory default values, the switch defaults to the factory-set (Internet Protocol) IP address and all optional features are disabled. To reset configuration data to factory default settings:

Inform the customer the switch is to be set offline. Ensure the system administrator quiesces Fibre Channel frame traffic through the switch and sets attached FC-AL devices offline.

1. Set the switch offline. For instructions, refer to

Setting Online

State .

2. Select Switch from the Maintenance menu (Maintenance>Switch).

The Switch View appears. (

Figure 4-6 ).

3. Click Reset Configuration. A dialog box with the message Are you sure that you want to reset the configuration?

appears.

4. Click OK to reset the configuration.

5. The switch IP address resets to the default address of 10.1.1.10.

Repair Procedures - EFCM Basic Edition 4-27

4

Repair Information

— If the configured IP address (prior to reset) was the same as the default address, the browser-to-switch Internet connection is not affected and the procedure is complete.

— If the configured IP address (prior to reset) was not the same as the default address, the browser-to-switch Internet connection drops and the EFCM Basic Edition session is lost.

Continue to the next step.

6. To change the switch IP address and restart the EFCM Basic

Edition interface, refer to

Configure Network Information

. To restart the EFCM Basic Edition interface using the default IP address of

10.1.1.10

: a. Enter the default IP address of 10.1.1.10 at the browser, as the

Internet URL. The Enter Network Password dialog box appears.

b. Type the default user name and password.

NOTE: The default user name is Administrator and the default password is password. The user name and password are case-sensitive.

c. Click OK. The EFCM Basic Edition interface opens and the procedure is complete.

4-28

Repair Procedures - SAN Management Application

The following procedures (performed at a rack-mount management server running a SAN management application) are described. SAN management applications include EFCM 8.7 (or later).

•

Obtaining Fabric Log Information on page 4-29

•

Obtaining Switch Log Information on page 4-30

•

Performing Port Diagnostics on page 4-35

•

Collecting Maintenance Data on page 4-45

•

Setting Online State on page 4-46

•

Blocking or Unblocking a Port on page 4-47

•

Upgrading Firmware on page 4-48

•

Managing Configuration Data on page 4-51

•

Installing or Upgrading Software on page 4-55

McDATA Sphereon 4400 Fabric Switch Installation and Service Manual

Repair Information

4

Obtaining Fabric

Log Information

Event Log

Fabric Log

Product Status Log

The SAN management application provides access to logs that contain fabric-level maintenance information. At the application main window, select the Logs option from the Monitor menu, then click (select) the desired log option. Logs with maintenance information are:

• Event.

• Fabric.

• Product Status.

The Event Log records simple network management protocol (SNMP) trap events, client-server communication errors, and other problems recorded by the SAN management application. Information provided is generally intended for use by third-level support personnel to fault isolate significant problems. The log describes:

• Date/Time - Date and time the event occurred.

• Event - Event number and brief description of the event. Include this information when reporting an event to customer support.

• Product - Product associated with the event and configured name or IP address associated with the instance.

• Data - Additional event data for fault isolation. Include this information when fault isolating a call-home problem or reporting an event to customer support.

The Fabric Log records the time and nature of changes made to a multiswitch fabric. The information is useful for isolating zoning or fabric-wide problems. The log describes:

• Date/Time - Date and time the change occurred.

• Fabric Event - Description of the zoning or fabric change.

• Description - Supplementary information (if available) in text format.

The Product Status Log records the previous and current status of a managed product, and indicates the instance of an Element Manager application that should be opened to investigate a problem. The log describes:

• Date/Time - Date and time the status change occurred.

Repair Procedures - SAN Management Application 4-29

4

Repair Information

• Network Address - IP address or configured name of the product. The address or name corresponds to the address or name displayed under the product icon at the physical map.

• Previous Status - Status of the product prior to the change

(Operational, Degraded, Failed, Out of Band Online, or Unknown).

An Unknown status indicates the SAN management application cannot communicate with the product.

• New Status - Status of the product after the change (Operational,

Degraded , Failed, Out of Band Online, or Unknown).

Obtaining Switch

Log Information

Audit Log

The Element Manager application provides access to logs that contain switch-level maintenance information. At any application view, click

(select) the desired log option from the Logs menu. Logs with maintenance information are:

• Audit

• Event.

• Hardware.

• Link Incident.

• Port Threshold Alert.

• Security.

• Open Trunking.

• Embedded Port.

• Switch Fabric.

• Syslog Configuration.

The audit log displays a history of all configuration changes applied to the switch from any source such as Element Manager, SNMP management stations, or host.

• Date/Time - The date and time of the log entry.

• Source - The source of Audit Log event.

• User ID - Identifier of the user that issued the command. The identifier is usually an IP address.

• Action - The type of Audit Log event.

4-30 McDATA Sphereon 4400 Fabric Switch Installation and Service Manual

Repair Information

4

Event Log

Hardware Log

Link Incident Log

The Event Log records events or errors. Entries reflect the status of the management interface and managed product. The log describes:

• Date/Time - Date and time the event occurred.

• Event - Three-digit code that describes the event. Event codes are listed and described in

Appendix A , Event Code Tables .

• Description - Brief description of the event.

• Severity - Event severity (Informational, Minor, Major, or Severe).

• FRU-Position - Acronym representing the FRU type, followed by a number representing the FRU chassis position.

• Event Data - Supplementary information (if available) in hexadecimal format. Event data is described in

Appendix A ,

Event Code Tables

.

The Hardware Log records a history of FRU removals and replacements (insertions) for the switch. The log describes:

• Date/Time - Date and time the FRU was inserted or removed.

• FRU - Acronym representing the FRU type.

• Position - Number representing the FRU chassis position. The chassis (slot) position for a nonredundant CTP card is 0. Chassis slots for redundant power supplies are 0 and 1.

• Action - Action performed (Inserted or Removed).

• Part Number - Part number of the inserted or removed FRU.

• Serial Number - Serial number of the inserted or removed FRU.

The Link Incident Log records Fibre Channel link incident events and causes. The log describes:

• Date/Time - Date and time the link incident occurred.

• Port - Port number reporting the link incident.

• Link Incident Event - Brief description of the link incident and cause, including:

— Implicit incident.

— Bit-error threshold exceeded.

— Loss of signal or loss of synchronization.

— Not-operational primitive sequence received.

Repair Procedures - SAN Management Application 4-31

4

Repair Information

Port Threshold Alert

Log

Security Log

— Primitive sequence timeout.

— Invalid primitive sequence received for current link state.

Refer to

MAP 0500: Port Failure or Link Incident Analysis

for corrective actions.

The Port Threshold Alert Log records a history of threshold alert notifications. The log describes:

• Date/Time - Date and time the alert occurred.

• Name - Alert name as configured through the Configure Threshold

Alerts dialog box.

• Port - Port number where the alert occurred.

• Type - Alert type: transmit (Tx) or receive (Rx).

• Utilization % - Percent of traffic capacity used and the threshold value configured through the Configure Threshold Alerts dialog box. A value of 25 means an alert occurs when throughput reaches 25% of port capacity.

• Interval - Time interval during which throughput is measured and an alert can generate. Set through the Configure Threshold

Alerts dialog box.

The security log displays the following security information:

• Severity - The severity level of the event (informational, warning, or fatal).

• User - The user associated with the event.

• Reason - The reason code for the event or conditions that caused the failure.

• Description - The security event category. The information also includes the description and details of the event and the IP address of the product.

• Date/Time - The date and time that the event occurred. The format is yyyy/mm/dd hh:mm:ss:tt. The last two characters

(hundredth of seconds) are needed due to possible higher frequency rate of some of the advanced logs.

• Count - The number of times that the same event occurs.

• Category - The category.

• IP - The IP address.

4-32 McDATA Sphereon 4400 Fabric Switch Installation and Service Manual

Repair Information

4

Open Trunking Log

Embedded Port Log

• Role - The role of the user.

• Interface - The interface.

The Open Trunking Log records ISL congestion events that cause Fibre

Channel traffic to be routed through an alternate ISL. Entries reflect the traffic re-route status at the managed product. The log describes:

• Date/Time - Date and time the re-route occurred.

• Receive Port - Target port number (decimal) receiving Fibre

Channel traffic after the re-route.

• Target Domain - Target device domain ID (decimal) receiving

Fibre Channel traffic after the re-route.

• Old Exit Port - Port number (decimal) transmitting Fibre Channel traffic before the re-route.

• New Exit Port - Port number (decimal) transmitting Fibre

Channel traffic after the re-route.

The Embedded Port Log records all Fibre Channel frames transmitted through the product’s embedded port, including Class F traffic, fabric logins, state change notifications, and exception frames. The information is useful for Fibre Channel frame debugging (usually performed by second-level support). The log describes:

• Date/Time - Date and time frame was transmitted through the embedded port.

• Port - Fibre Channel port number (decimal) transmitting frame through the embedded port.

• Direction - Fibre Channel frame direction (In or Out).

• Frame Header - 24-byte frame header (hexadecimal).

• Length - Size of frame payload in bytes.

• Payload - First 32 bytes of frame payload (hexadecimal).

• SOF - Start of frame character (hexadecimal).

• EOF - End of frame character (hexadecimal).

NOTE: Identical entries are recorded in the wrapping and non-wrapping logs. When the non-wrapping log fills, old records are overwritten. The wrapping log preserves all records.

Repair Procedures - SAN Management Application 4-33

4

Repair Information

Switch Fabric Log The Switch Fabric Log records the time and nature of changes made to a multiswitch fabric that affect this product. The log describes:

• Date/Time - Date and time the change occurred. Timing granularity is provided to one hundredth of a second.

• Description - Description of the zoning or fabric change.

• Event Data - Supplementary event data that provides additional information that varies according to the even logged.

• Ports (RSCN only) - List of product ports affected by registered state change notifications (RSCNs) related to the event.

NOTE: Identical entries are recorded in the wrapping and non-wrapping logs. When the non-wrapping log fills, old records are overwritten. The wrapping log preserves all records.

Syslog Configuration The Syslog Configuration page enables you to configure client systems to receive logs from the product.

A remote host receives copies of the system logs (syslogs), providing a means to view logs if the product is unavailable.

The recipient clients are identified by IP address. You can specify multiple clients for receiving logs. The interface also enables you to choose which logs the product sends to its syslog recipients.

The following tasks can be performed using the Syslog

Configuration:

• Enable and disable syslogs.

• Add a syslog recipient to the list.

• Edit information for a syslog recipient,.

• Delete syslog recipients from the list.

• Identify which logs are sent to recipients.

4-34 McDATA Sphereon 4400 Fabric Switch Installation and Service Manual

Repair Information

4

Performing Port

Diagnostics

Port List View

Fibre Channel port diagnostic information is obtained by:

• Inspecting properties at the Port List View.

• Inspecting statistical information at the Performance View.

• Inspecting parameters at the Port Properties dialog box.

• Inspecting parameters at the Port Technology dialog box.

• Performing an internal or external loopback test.

• Swapping ports.

The Element Manager application provides access to port diagnostic information through the Port List View. To open this view, click the

Port List tab at any view (

Figure 4-11

). A row of information for each port appears. Each row consists of the following columns:

• Port # - Product port number.

• FC Address - Logical port address (hexadecimal format).

• Name - User-defined name or description for the port.

Figure 4-11 Port List View

• Block Config - Indicates if a port is blocked or unblocked.

• State - Port state (Online, Offline, Not Installed, Inactive, Invalid

Attachment , Link Reset, No Light, Not Operational, Port Failure,

Segmented E_Port , or Testing).

Repair Procedures - SAN Management Application 4-35

4

Repair Information

Performance View

• Type - Port type (GX_Port, FX_Port, G_Port, F_Port, or E_Port).

• Operating Speed - Operating speed (Not Established, 1 Gbps,

2 Gbps , or 4 Gbps).

• Alert - If link incident (LIN) alerts are configured, a yellow triangle appears in the column when a link incident occurs. A yellow triangle also appears if beaconing is enabled. A red and yellow diamond appears if the port fails.

The Element Manager application provides access to port statistics information through the Performance View. To open this view, click the Performance tab at any other view.

Bar graphs at the top of the view display instantaneous transmit or receive activity level for each port. The relative value displayed is the greater of the transmit or receive activity. Each graph has 20 green-bar level indicators corresponding to 5% of maximum port throughput. If any activity is detected, at least one green bar appears.

A red indicator on each bar graph (high-water mark) remains at the highest level reached since the port was set online. In addition, the following statistical information appears:

Table 4-7 Statistical Information in Performance View

Statistics Class

Class 2

Class 3

Error

Description

Number of

• 4-byte words transmitted and received

• Class 2 frames transmitted, received, busied or rejected

Number of

• 4-byte words transmitted and received

• Class 3 frames transmitted, received, busied or rejected

Number of:

• Link Failures

• Synchronization and signal losses

• Discarded frames

• Invalid transmission words

• CRC

• Delimiter

• Address identification errors

• Short frames

4-36 McDATA Sphereon 4400 Fabric Switch Installation and Service Manual

Repair Information

4

Table 4-7

Operational

Statistical Information in Performance View

Traffic

Number of

• Offline Sequences

• Link resets transmitted and received

• Port transmit and receive value for frames

• Four byte words received and transmitted

• Link utilization in percentage

• Number of traffic flows rerouted to or from an ISL due to congestion

Port Properties Dialog

Table 4-8

Box

To open the Port Properties dialog box (

Figure 4-12

), double-click a port graphic at the Hardware View or a port row at the Port List View.

The dialog box provides the following information::

Port Properties Table

Port Property

Port Number

Port Name

Type

Technology

Operating Speed

Fibre Channel Address

Description

The product’s port number.

The user-defined name or description for the port.

The port type (E_Port, F_Port, or G_Port).

The type of port transceiver and optical cable installed.

The operating speed of the port (Not Established, 2 Gbps, or 10 Gbps).

The logical port address (hexadecimal format). Not applicable for E_Ports.

Port WWN

Attached Port WWN

Attached Port Nickname

Block Configuration

The Fibre Channel WWN of the port.

The Fibre Channel WWN of the device attached to the port.

The alternate name for the node logged into the port.

A user-configured state for the port (Blocked or Unblocked).

Rx BB_Credits Configured The user-defined number of receive BB_Credits allocated to the port.

NPIV Login Limit Configured The user-defined maximum number of virtual addresses assigned to the physical port when N_Port ID virtualization (NPIV) enabled.

Logged in IDs

LIN Alerts Configuration

FAN Configuration

The number of virtual addresses logged in to the physical port.

A user-specified state for the port (On or Off).

A user-configured state for FAN configuration (Enabled or Disabled).

Repair Procedures - SAN Management Application 4-37

4

Repair Information

Table 4-8 Port Properties Table

Port Property

Beaconing

Link Incident

Operational State

Reason

Threshold Alert

Zoning Enforcement

Description

User-specified for the port (On or Off). When beaconing is enabled, a yellow triangle appears adjacent to the status field.

If no link incidents are recorded, None appears in the status field. If a link incident is recorded, a summary appears describing the incident, and a yellow triangle appears adjacent to the status field.

The state of the port (Online, Offline, Beaconing, Invalid Attachment, Link Incident, Link

Reset, No Light, Not Operational, Port Failure, Segmented E_Port, or Testing). A yellow triangle appears adjacent to the status field if the port is in a non-standard state that requires attention. A red and yellow diamond appears adjacent to the status field if the port fails.

A summary appears describing the reason if the port state is Segmented E_Port, In-

valid Attachment, or Inactive. For any other port state, the reason field is blank or N/A.

If a threshold alert exists for the port, an alert indicator (yellow triangle) and the configured name for the alert appear.

The zoning policy enforced (Hard Zoning, Soft Zoning, or N/A).

4-38 McDATA Sphereon 4400 Fabric Switch Installation and Service Manual

Repair Information

4

Figure 4-12 Port Properties Dialog Box

Port Technology

Dialog Box

To view Port Technology (

Figure 4-13

), right-click a port graphic at the

Hardware View or a port row at the Port List View, then select Port

Optics from the pop-up menu. The Port Optics dialog box appears the

Port Technology and Extended Information:

Repair Procedures - SAN Management Application 4-39

4

Repair Information

Table 4-9

Figure 4-13 Port Technology Dialog Box

The dialog box provides the following information:

Port Technology Table

Port Property

Port Number

Connector type

Transceiver

Distance

Media

Description

The director’s port number.

Type of port connector (LC, Unknown, or Internal Port).

Type of port transceiver (Shortwave Laser, Longwave Laser, Long Distance Laser, Un-

known, or None).

Port transmission distance (<=50m, 50M - 2k, 2k - 10k, 10k=>).

Type of optical cable used (Singlemode, multimode 50-micron, multimode 62.5-micron, or Unknown).

Operating speed (Not Established, 2 Gbps, or 10 Gbps).

Speed

Extended Information

Extended ID

Vendor Name

The Extended ID

The vendor manufacturing the G bic.

4-40 McDATA Sphereon 4400 Fabric Switch Installation and Service Manual

Repair Information

4

Table 4-9 Port Technology Table

Port Property

Vendor Part #

Revision

Serial #

Date Code

Fiber used and Maximum length

Description

The vendor part number.

The revision number.

The serial number.

The date.

Shows link lengths that are possible based on the fiber type installed. Fields are blank if data is not available.

Internal Loopback

Test

An internal loopback test checks internal port, serializer, and deserializer circuitry and checks for the presence of an optical transceiver, but does not check fiber-optic components of the installed transceiver. Operation of the attached device is disrupted during the test. To perform the test:

Notify the customer a disruptive internal loopback test is to be performed. Ensure the system administrator quiesces Fibre Channel frame traffic through the port and sets the attached device offline.

NOTE: A small form factor pluggable (SFP) optical transceiver must be installed in the port during the test. A device can remain connected during the test.

1. Select Port Diagnostics from the Maintenance menu

(Maintenance>Port Diagnostics). The Port Diagnostics dialog box

appears ( Figure 4-14

).

2. Type the port number to be tested or select all ports at the Port

Select area of the dialog box.

3. Select the Internal Loop option at the Diagnostics Test list box.

4. Click Next. The message Press START TEST to begin diagnostics appears, and the Next button changes to a Start Test button.

Repair Procedures - SAN Management Application 4-41

4

Repair Information

Figure 4-14 Port Diagnostics Dialog Box

External Loopback

Test

5. Click Start Test. The test begins and: a. The Start Test button changes to a Stop Test button.

b. The message Port xx: TEST RUNNING appears.

c. A red progress bar (indicating percent completion) travels from left to right across the Completion Status field.

When the test completes, results appear as Port xx: Passed! or

Port xx: Failed! in the message area of the dialog box.

6. When finished, click Cancel to close the Port Diagnostics dialog box.

7. Reset the port: a. At the Hardware View, right-click the port graphic. A pop-up menu appears.

b. Select Reset Port. A message box appears, indicating a link reset will occur.

c. Click OK. The port resets.

8. Inform the customer the test is complete and the attached device can be set online.

An external loopback test checks all port circuitry, including fiber-optic components of the installed optical transceiver. To perform the test, the attached device must be quiesced and

4-42 McDATA Sphereon 4400 Fabric Switch Installation and Service Manual

Repair Information

4 disconnected from the port, and a multimode loopback plug must be inserted in the port. To perform the test:

Inform the customer a disruptive external loopback test is to be performed and the attached device must be disconnected.

1. Disconnect the fiber-optic jumper cable from the port to be tested.

2. Insert a multimode loopback plug into the port receptacle.

3. Select Port Diagnostics from the Maintenance menu

(Maintenance>Port Diagnostics). The Port Diagnostics dialog box

appears ( Figure 4-14

).

4. Type the port number to be tested or select all ports at the Port

Select area of the dialog box.

5. Select the External Loop option at the Diagnostics Test list box,.

6. Click Next. At the Port Diagnostics dialog box, the message

Loopback plug(s) must be installed on ports being diagnosed appears.

7. Ensure that the loopback plug is installed and click Next. The message Press START TEST to begin diagnostics appears, and the Next button changes to a Start Test button.

8. Click Start Test. The test begins and: a. The Start Test button changes to a Stop Test button.

b. The message Port xx: TEST RUNNING appears.

c. A red progress bar (indicating percent completion) travels from left to right across the Completion Status field.

When the test completes, results appear as Port xx: Passed! or

Port xx: Failed! in the message area of the dialog box.

9. When finished, click Cancel to close the Port Diagnostics dialog box.

10. Remove the loopback plug and reconnect the fiber-optic jumper

cable from the device to the port (disconnected in step 1 ).

11. Reset the port: a. At the Hardware View, right-click the port graphic. A pop-up menu appears.

b. Select Reset Port. A message box appears, indicating a link reset will occur.

Repair Procedures - SAN Management Application 4-43

4

Repair Information

Swap Ports c. Click OK. The port resets.

12. Inform the customer the test is complete and the device can be reconnected and set online.

Failure of port circuitry behind an optical transceiver may require swapping the logical port address of the failed port to a known operational port. This ensures the port address matches information in the hardware configuration definition (HCD) of an attached host.

NOTE: This procedure swaps hexadecimal logical port addresses, not decimal port numbers.

Inform the customer a port swap is to be performed. Ensure that the system administrator quiesces Fibre Channel frame traffic through the ports, varies any attached host offline and sets any attached device offline.

To swap ports use the following steps:

1. Select Port Swapping from the Maintenance menu

(Maintenance>Port Swapping) . The Swap Ports dialog box appears.

(

Figure 4-15

).

Figure 4-15 Swap Ports Dialog Box

2. Select the radio button associated with the product management style and enter the decimal port numbers (open systems style) or hexadecimal port addresses (FICON style) of the ports to be swapped. The FC Address fields update dynamically.

4-44 McDATA Sphereon 4400 Fabric Switch Installation and Service Manual

Collecting

Maintenance Data

Repair Information

4

3. Click Next. The Instructions section of the dialog box indicates the ports will be blocked.

4. Click Next. Beaconing is enabled for both ports and both ports are blocked. Swap the port fiber-optic cables as directed by the system administrator.

5. Click Next. The Instructions section of the dialog box indicates the port swap operation is complete and beaconing is disabled. Select each Unblock check box to unblock the ports, then click Finish.

6. Ensure that the system administrator varies any attached host online and sets any attached device online.

7. Back up the product configuration data. Refer to Back Up

Configuration for instructions.

When firmware detects a critical error, the product automatically copies the contents of DRAM to a dump area in FLASH memory on the CTP card. Perform this procedure after a firmware fault or FRU failure to capture data for analysis by support personnel.

Maintenance data includes the dump file and engineering logs.

NOTE: An optional full-volatility feature is often required at military sites that process classified data. If the feature is enabled through a PFE key, a memory dump file (that may include classified Fibre Channel frames) is not included as part of the data collection procedure.

To collect maintenance data use the following steps:

1. Select Data Collection from the Maintenance menu

(Maintenance>Data Collection). The Save Data Collection dialog box

appears ( Figure 4-16

).

Figure 4-16 Save Data Collection Dialog Box

Repair Procedures - SAN Management Application 4-45

4

Repair Information

Setting Online State

2. Remove the backup CD from the management server’s compact disk-rewritable (CD-RW) drive and insert a blank rewritable CD.

3. Select the compact disc drive (D:\) from the Look in drop-down menu at the Save Data Collection dialog box. Type a descriptive name for the collected maintenance data in the File name field, then click Save.

4. The Data Collection dialog box appears with a progress bar that shows percent completion of the data collection process. When the process reaches 100%, the Cancel button changes to a Close

Button.

5. Click Close to close the dialog box.

6. Remove the CD with the newly-collected maintenance data from the management server’s CD-RW drive. Return the CD with the failed FRU to support personnel for failure analysis.

7. To ensure that the backup application operates normally, replace the original backup CD in the management server’s CD-RW drive.

This section describes procedures to set the product online or offline.

Operational states are:

• Online - When the product is set online, an attached device can log in if the port is not blocked. Attached devices in the same zone can communicate with each other.

• Offline - When the product is set offline, all ports are set offline and operation of attached Fibre Channel devices is disrupted. The product transmits the OLS to attached devices, and the devices cannot log in.

NOTE: Do not set the product offline unless directed to do so by a procedural step or the next level of support.

To set the product online or offline use the following steps:

1. Select Set Online State from the Maintenance menu

(Maintenance>Set Online State). The Set Online State dialog box

appears ( Figure 4-17

).

4-46 McDATA Sphereon 4400 Fabric Switch Installation and Service Manual

Repair Information

4

Blocking or

Figure 4-17 Set Online State Dialog Box

2. Perform one of the following:

— Click Set Online. A warning dialog box appears the message

Performing this operation will change the current state to

Online . Click OK.

— Click Set Offline. A warning dialog box appears the message

Performing this operation will change the current state to

Offline . Click OK.

Unblocking a Port

This section describes procedures to block or unblock a Fibre Channel port. Blocking a port prevents an attached device or fabric element from communicating. A blocked port continuously transmits the

OLS. To block or unblock a port:

1. Select the Hardware tab. The Hardware View for the selected switch appears.

2. Move the cursor over the port to be blocked or unblocked and right-click the mouse to open a list of menu options. Perform one of the following:

— To block a port: Select the Block Port menu option. A Warning dialog box appears. Click OK. The dialog box closes and the following occur to indicate the port is blocked and offline:

• At the product, the green port LED extinguishes.

• At the Hardware View, the emulated green port LED extinguishes.

• A check mark appears adjacent to the Block Port menu option.

— To unblock a port: Select the Block Port menu option. Note the check mark in the box adjacent to the menu item, indicating the port is blocked. A Warning dialog box appears. Click OK.

The dialog box closes and the following occur to indicate the port is unblocked and online:

Repair Procedures - SAN Management Application 4-47

4

Repair Information

• At the product, the green port LED illuminates.

• At the Hardware View, the emulated green port LED illuminates.

• The box adjacent to the Block Port menu option becomes blank.

Upgrading Firmware

Firmware is the product operating code stored in FLASH memory on the CTP card. Up to 32 firmware versions can be stored on the management server hard drive and made available for download through the Element Manager application. Perform the following firmware upgrade tasks from the management server (Element

Manager application):

• Determine the active firmware version for the product.

• Add a firmware version to the management server library.

• Download a firmware version to the product.

Determine Firmware Version

To determine a switch firmware version:

1. Select Firmware Library from the Maintenance menu

(Maintenance>Firmware Library). The Firmware Library dialog box

appears ( Figure 4-18

).

Figure 4-18 Firmware Library Dialog Box

2. The active firmware version appears at the lower left corner of the dialog box in XX.YY.ZZ format, where XX is the version level, YY is the release level, and ZZ is the patch level.

4-48 McDATA Sphereon 4400 Fabric Switch Installation and Service Manual

Repair Information

4

3. Click Close to close the dialog box.

Add Firmware Version to Management Server Library

Ensure that the desired firmware version is obtained from the

Filecenter and resident on the management server hard drive. Refer to

Download Firmware or Software from the Filecenter for instructions.

NOTE: When upgrading firmware, follow all procedural information contained in release notes or EC instructions that accompany the version.

Such information supplements information provided in this general procedure.

To add a firmware version to the management server library:

1. Select Firmware Library from the Maintenance menu

(Maintenance>Firmware Library). The Firmware Library dialog box

appears ( Figure 4-18

).

2. Click New. The New Firmware Version dialog box appears.

3. Select the desired firmware version file (downloaded to the management server hard drive). Ensure the correct filename appears in the File name field and click Save. The New Firmware

Description dialog box appears.

4. Enter a description (up to 24 characters) for the new firmware version. The description should include the installation date and text that uniquely identifies the firmware version. Click OK. A

File Transfer message box appears. A progress bar travels across the message box to show percent completion.

5. Upon completion, the File Transfer message box converts to a

Transfer Complete message box, indicating the new firmware version is stored on the management server hard drive. Click

Close to close the message box.

6. The new firmware version and associated description appear in the Firmware Library dialog box. Click Close to close the dialog box.

7. To send the firmware version, refer to

Download Firmware Version

.

Download Firmware Version

To download a firmware version:

Repair Procedures - SAN Management Application 4-49

4

Repair Information

1. Before downloading firmware version XX.YY.ZZ, ensure version

XX.YY.ZZ

or higher of the SAN management application is running on the server.

a. Select the About option from the Help menu. The About dialog box appears the SAN management application version. Click

Close to close the dialog box.

b. If required, install the correct version of the application. For

instructions, refer to Installing or Upgrading Software .

As a precaution to preserve switch configuration information, perform the data collection procedure. For instructions, refer to

Collecting Maintenance Data .

2. Select Firmware Library from the Maintenance menu. The Firmware

Library dialog box appears (

Figure 4-18

).

3. Select (highlight) the firmware version to be downloaded and click Send. The send function verifies existence of certain switch conditions before the download process begins. If an error occurs, a message appears indicating the problem must be fixed before the firmware download. Conditions that terminate the process include:

— A firmware version is being installed to by another user.

— The switch-to-management server link failed or timed out.

If a problem occurs and a corresponding message appears, go to

MAP 0000: Start MAP to isolate the problem. If no error occurs, a

Warning dialog box appears confirming the operation.

4. Click Yes to download the firmware version. The Send Firmware dialog box appears and the following occur during the download process: a. A Writing data to FLASH message appears at the top of the dialog box as the download begins.

b. A Sending Files message appears and remains as a progress bar shows percent completion of the download. The bar progresses to 100% when the last file is transmitted to the CTP card.

c. A Writing data to FLASH message appears again as the download completes.

4-50 McDATA Sphereon 4400 Fabric Switch Installation and Service Manual

Repair Information

4 d. The switch performs an IPL, during which an IPLing message appears at the Send Firmware dialog box. In addition, the switch-to-management server Ethernet link drops momentarily.

5. A Send firmware complete message appears at the Send Firmware dialog box.

6. Click Close to close the Firmware Library dialog box.

Managing

Configuration Data

Back Up Configuration

The Element Manager application provides options to:

• Back up and restore the configuration file stored in NV-RAM on the switch CTP card.

• Reset the configuration file to factory default values.

The switch must be set offline prior to restoring or resetting the configuration file.

To back up the switch configuration file to the management server:

1. Select Backup & Restore Configuration from the Maintenance menu

(Maintenance>Backup&Restore Configuration). The Backup and

Restore Configuration

dialog box appearsappears ( Figure 4-19 ).

Figure 4-19 Backup and Restore Configuration Dialog Box

Restore Configuration

2. Click Backup. An Information dialog box appears, indicating the backup was initiated.

3. Click OK to complete the backup and close the dialog box.

To restore the switch configuration file from the management server:

Inform the customer the switch is to be set offline. Ensure the system administrator quiesces Fibre Channel frame traffic through the switch and sets attached FC-AL devices offline.

Repair Procedures - SAN Management Application 4-51

4

Repair Information

Reset Configuration

Data

1. Set the switch offline. For instructions, refer to

Setting Online

State .

2. Select Backup & Restore Configuration from the Maintenance menu(Maintenance>Backup&Restore Configuration). The Backup and

Restore Configuration dialog box appears (

Figure 4-19

).

3. Click Restore. A Warning dialog box appears, indicating the existing configuration file is to be overwritten.

4. Click Yes. A Restore dialog box appears, indicating the restore is in progress.

When the operation finishes, the Restore dialog box appears a

Restore complete message.

5. Click Close to close the dialog box.

When configuration data is reset to factory default values, the switch defaults to the factory-set (Internet Protocol) IP address and all optional features are disabled. To reset configuration data to factory default settings:

Inform the customer the switch is to be set offline. Ensure the system administrator quiesces Fibre Channel frame traffic through the switch and sets attached FC-AL devices offline.

1. Set the switch offline. For instructions, refer to

Setting Online

State .

2. At the SAN management application’s physical map, rightclick the product icon representing the switch for which a configuration file is to be reset to factory default settings, then select Element Manager from the pop-up menu. The application opens.

3. Select Reset Configuration from the Maintenance menu

(Maintenance>Reset Configuration). The Reset Configuration dialog box appears (

Figure 4-20

).

4-52 McDATA Sphereon 4400 Fabric Switch Installation and Service Manual

Repair Information

4

Figure 4-20 Reset Configuration Dialog Box

4. Click Reset to initiate the reset operation and close the dialog box.

5. The switch IP address resets to the default address of 10.1.1.10.

— If the configured IP address (prior to reset) was the same as the default address, the switch-to-management server

Ethernet link is not affected and the procedure is complete.

— If the configured IP address (prior to reset) was not the same as the default address, the switch-to-management server

Ethernet link drops and server communication is lost.

Continue to the next step.

6. To change the switch IP address and restart the management server session, go to

step 7

. To restart a management server session using the default IP address of 10.1.1.10: a. Close the Element Manager application and return to the SAN management application.

A grey square with a yellow exclamation mark appears adjacent to the icon representing the reset switch, indicating switch is not communicating with the management server.

b. Select Setup from the Discover menu(Discover>Setup). The

Discover Setup

dialog box appears ( Figure 4-21 ).

Repair Procedures - SAN Management Application 4-53

4

Repair Information

Figure 4-21 Discover Setup Dialog Box c. Select (highlight) the entry representing the reset switch in the

Available Addresses window and click Edit. The Address

Properties

dialog box appears ( Figure 4-22 ).

Figure 4-22 Address Properties Dialog Box d. Type 10.1.1.10 in the IP Address field and click OK. Entries at the Discover Setup dialog box reflect the new IP address.

e. At the Discover Setup dialog box, click OK. Switch-to- management server communication is restored and the procedure is complete.

7. Change the switch IP address and restart the management server session as follows:

4-54 McDATA Sphereon 4400 Fabric Switch Installation and Service Manual

Repair Information

4

Installing or

Upgrading Software

a. A grey square with a yellow exclamation mark appears adjacent to the icon representing the reset switch, indicating switch is not communicating with the management server.

b. Delete the icon representing the reset switch. At the SAN management application, select Setup from the Discover menu.

The Discover Setup dialog box appears ( Figure 4-21 ).

c. Select (highlight) the entry representing the reset switch in the

Available Addresses window and click Remove.

d. click OK at the Discover Setup dialog box. The switch is no longer defined to the management server.

e. Change the switch IP address through the maintenance port.

Refer to Task 5: Configure Product Network Information (Optional)

for instructions.

f. Identify the switch to the SAN management application. Refer

to Task 13: Configure the Product to the Management Application

for instructions.

The delivered SAN management application is provided on the EFC

Management Applications CD-ROM. Subsequent software versions for upgrade are provided to customers through the McDATA Filecenter.

NOTE: When upgrading software, follow all procedural information contained in release notes or EC instructions that accompany the version.

Such information supplements information provided in this general procedure.

To install or upgrade the SAN management application:

1. Close and exit all applications, then perform one of the following:

— Insert the EFC Management Applications CD-ROM into the

CD-ROM drive of the server.

— Ensure the desired software version is obtained from the

Filecenter and resident on the server hard drive. Refer to

Download Firmware or Software from the Filecenter for

instructions.

2. At the server’s Windows desktop, click Start at the left side of the task bar, then select the Run option. The Run dialog box appears.

3. In the Open field at the Run dialog box, type:

Repair Procedures - SAN Management Application 4-55

4

Repair Information

— C:\mcdataServerInstall.exe to install from the server hard drive.

— D:\mcdataServerInstall.exe to install from the EFC

Management Applications CD-ROM.

4. Click OK. The InstallShield third-party application prepares to install the software version, and opens the InstallShield Wizard

dialog box ( Figure 4-23 ).

Figure 4-23 InstallShield Wizard Dialog Box

5. Follow the online instructions for the InstallShield Wizard. Click

Next and Finish as appropriate.

6. Power off and reboot the server.

a. At the Windows desktop, click Start at the left side of the task bar (bottom of the desktop), then select Shut Down. The Shut

Down Windows dialog box appears.

b. Select the Restart option from the list box and click OK. The server powers down and restarts. During the reboot process the LAN connection between the server and browser-capable

PC drops momentarily, and the TightVNC viewer appears a network error.

4-56 McDATA Sphereon 4400 Fabric Switch Installation and Service Manual

Repair Information

4 c. After the server reboots, click Login again. The VNC

Authentication screen appears.

d. Type the default password and click OK. The Welcome to

Windows dialog box appears.

NOTE: The default TightVNC viewer password is password. e. Click the Send Ctrl-Alt-Del button at the top of the window to log on to the server desktop. The Log On to Windows dialog box appears.

NOTE: Do not simultaneously press the Ctrl, Alt, and Delete keys.

This action logs the user on to the browser-capable PC, not the rack-mount management server.

f. Type the default Windows user name and password and click

OK . The server’s Windows desktop opens and the EFCM Log

In dialog box appears.

NOTE: The default Windows user name is Administrator and the default password is password. Both are case-sensitive.

g. Type the SAN management application default user ID and password and select a server or IP address from the Network

Address drop-down list.

NOTE: The default SAN management application user ID is

Administrator and the default password is password. Both are case-sensitive.

h. Click Login. The application opens and the main window appears.

Repair Procedures - SAN Management Application 4-57

4

Repair Information

4-58 McDATA Sphereon 4400 Fabric Switch Installation and Service Manual

5

Removal and

Replacement Procedures

This chapter describes field-replaceable unit (FRU) removal and replacement procedures (RRPs) for the Sphereon 4400 Fabric Switch.

The chapter also provides procedural notes, electrostatic discharge

(ESD) precautions, and list of FRUs.

Procedural Notes

Observe the following procedural notes:

1. Follow all ESD precautions and DANGER, CAUTION, and

ATTENTION statements.

2. Do not perform an RRP unless a failure is isolated to a FRU. If fault isolation was not performed, refer to

MAP 0000: Start MAP .

3. Before removing a FRU, read the associated RRP to familiarize yourself with the procedure.

4. After completing an RRP:

— Clear the event codes reporting the failure and recovery from the product Event Log.

— Extinguish the amber system error light-emitting diode (LED) at the product front panel.

Procedural Notes 5-1

5

Removal and Replacement Procedures

ESD Procedures

Follow these ESD procedures:

• If the product is connected to facility power (grounded), wear an

ESD wrist strap and grounding cable connected to the product chassis.

• If the product is not connected to facility power (not grounded), wear an ESD wrist strap and grounding cable connected to an approved bench grounding point.

• Touch the product chassis once before performing a procedure, and once each minute during the procedure.

• Store ESD-sensitive FRUs in antistatic packaging.

Field-Replaceable Units

Table 5-1

lists concurrent FRUs that are removed and replaced while the product is powered on and operational. The table also lists ESD precautions (yes or no) for each FRU, and references the RRP page number. Refer to

Chapter 6 , Illustrated Parts Breakdown for FRU

locations and part numbers.

Table 5-1 Concurrent FRUs

Concurrent FRU

Small form factor pluggable optical transceiver

Redundant power supply

ESD Requirement

Yes

No

Page

5-3

5-7

5-2 McDATA Sphereon 4400 Fabric Switch Installation and Service Manual

Removal and Replacement Procedures

5

RRP 1: SFP Optical Transceiver

Use the following procedures to remove or replace a small form factor pluggable (SFP) optical transceiver. A list of required tools is provided.

Tools Required

Removal

The following tools are required:

• Door key with 5/16-inch socket (provided with the FC-512

Fabricenter equipment cabinet).

• Protective cap (provided with the fiber-optic jumper cable).

• Loopback plug (provided with the product).

• Fiber-optic cleaning kit.

• ESD grounding cable and wrist strap.

To remove an SFP optical transceiver:

1. Inform the customer the port with the defective transceiver will be blocked. Ensure the system administrator sets any attached device offline.

2. If the product is not rack-mounted, go to step 3 . If the product is

rack-mounted, perform one of the following:

— If the product is installed in an FC-512 Fabricenter equipment cabinet, insert the 5/16-inch door tool into the socket hole at the right top of the door (front or rear). Turn the tool counter- clockwise to unlock and open the door.

— If the product is installed in a customer-supplied equipment cabinet, unlock and open the cabinet door (front or rear) as directed by the customer representative.

3. Identify the defective port transceiver from:

— An illuminated amber LED adjacent to the port.

— At a web browser communicating with the EFCM Basic

Edition interface, port failure information displayed at the

Hardware View , Port List View, or Event Log.

— At the management server (Element Manager application), port failure information displayed at the Hardware View, Port

List View , Port Properties dialog box, or Event Log.

RRP 1: SFP Optical Transceiver 5-3

5

Removal and Replacement Procedures

4. Block communication to the port. Refer to

Blocking or Unblocking a

Port

(EFCM Basic Edition) or Blocking or Unblocking a Port

(SAN management application) for instructions.

5. Ensure an ESD grounding cable is connected to the product chassis (or approved bench ground) and your wrist.

6. Disconnect the fiber-optic jumper cable from the port: a. Pull the keyed LC connector free from the port’s optical transceiver.

b. Place a protective cap over the jumper cable connector.

7. The optical transceiver has a wire locking bale to secure the transceiver in the port receptacle and to assist in removal. The bale rotates up or down, depending on transceiver manufacturer and port location (top or bottom row).

a. Disengage the locking mechanism by rotating the wire bale up

or down 90 degrees as shown in part (1) of Figure 5-1

.

b. Grasp the wire bale and pull the transceiver from the port receptacle as shown in part (2) of

Figure 5-1 .

5-4

Figure 5-1 SFP Optical Transceiver Removal and Replacement

8. Inspect the Event Log:

— At a web browser communicating with the EFCM Basic

Edition interface, select Event from the Logs menu.

— At the management server (Element Manager application), select Event Log from the Logs menu.

An event code 513 (SFP optics hot-removal completed) appears in the Event Log.

McDATA Sphereon 4400 Fabric Switch Installation and Service Manual

Removal and Replacement Procedures

5

Replacement To replace an SFP optical transceiver:

1. Ensure an ESD grounding cable is connected to the product chassis (or approved bench ground) and your wrist.

2. Remove the replacement transceiver from its packaging.

3. Insert the transceiver into the port receptacle, then engage the locking mechanism by rotating the wire bale up or down 90 degrees as shown in

Figure 5-1 .

4. Perform an external loopback test. Refer to External Loopback Test

(EFCM Basic Edition) or External Loopback Test (SAN management

application) for instructions. If the test fails, go to MAP 0000: Start

MAP to isolate the problem.

5. Reconnect the fiber-optic jumper cable: a. Remove the protective cap from the cable connector and the protective plug from the port optical transceiver. Store the cap and plug in a suitable location for safekeeping.

b. Clean the jumper cable and transceiver connectors. Refer to

Clean Fiber-Optic Components

for instructions.

c. Insert the keyed LC cable connector into the port’s optical transceiver.

6. Ensure the amber port LED extinguishes. If the LED illuminates, go to

MAP 0000: Start MAP

to isolate the problem.

7. Inspect the Event Log:

— At a web browser communicating with the EFCM Basic

Edition interface, select Event from the Logs menu.

— At the management server (Element Manager application), select Event Log from the Logs menu.

Ensure an event code 510 (SFP optics hot-insertion initiated)

appears. If the event code does not appear, go to MAP 0000: Start

MAP to isolate the problem.

8. Verify port operation:

— At a web browser communicating with the EFCM Basic

Edition interface, open the Hardware View: a. Ensure alert symbols do not appear (yellow triangle or red diamond).

RRP 1: SFP Optical Transceiver 5-5

5

Removal and Replacement Procedures b. Open the Port List View. Verify that port Operational State,

Type , Health Status, and Transceiver are correct.

— At the management server (Element Manager application), open the Hardware View: a. Ensure alert symbols do not appear (yellow triangle or red diamond).

b. Double-click the port graphic to open the Port Properties dialog box. Verify port information is correct.

c. Right-click the port graphic and select Port Technology from the menu. The Port Technology dialog box displays. Verify the port technology is correct.

If a problem is indicated, go to MAP 0000: Start MAP

to isolate the problem.

9. Restore communication to the port as directed by the customer.

Refer to

Blocking or Unblocking a Port (EFCM Basic Edition) or

Blocking or Unblocking a Port (SAN management application) for

instructions. Inform the customer the port is available.

10. Clear the system error LED on the product front bezel:

— At a web browser communicating with the EFCM Basic

Edition interface, select Clear System Error Light from the

Maintenance menu.

— At the management server (Element Manager application), open the Hardware View. Right-click the front panel bezel graphic (away from a FRU), then click the Clear System Error

Light menu selection.

11. If necessary, close and lock the equipment cabinet door.

5-6 McDATA Sphereon 4400 Fabric Switch Installation and Service Manual

Removal and Replacement Procedures

5

RRP 2: Redundant Power Supply

Use the following procedures to remove or replace a redundant external power supply. A list of required tools is provided.

Tools Required

Removal

A door key with 5/16-inch socket (provided with the FC-512

Fabricenter equipment cabinet) is required.

To remove a redundant external power supply:

1. If the product is not rack-mounted, go to step 2 . If the product is

rack-mounted, perform one of the following:

— If the product is installed in an FC-512 Fabricenter equipment cabinet, insert the 5/16-inch door tool into the socket hole at the right top of the door (front or rear). Turn the tool counter- clockwise to unlock and open the door.

— If the product is installed in a customer-supplied equipment cabinet, unlock and open the cabinet door (front or rear) as directed by the customer representative.

2. Identify the defective power supply from:

— The extinguished green LED on the FRU.

— At a web browser communicating with the EFCM Basic

Edition interface or at the management server (Element

Manager application), FRU failure information displayed at the Hardware View, FRU List View, or Event Log.

3. Disconnect the AC power cord from facility power.

DANGER

Disconnect the power cords. (D005)

4. Twist the external power supply adapter cord counterclockwise to unlock the connection, then disconnect the cord from the threaded output jack at the rear of the switch chassis as shown in

Figure 5-2 . Remove the power supply.

RRP 2: Redundant Power Supply 5-7

5

Removal and Replacement Procedures

Figure 5-2

Replacement

Redundant Power Supply Removal and Replacement

5. Inspect the Event Log:

— At a web browser communicating with the EFCM Basic

Edition interface, select Event from the Logs menu.

— At the management server (Element Manager application), select Event Log from the Logs menu.

The following event codes appear:

• 200 - Power supply AC voltage failure (recorded when power is disconnected).

• 206 - Power supply removed.

To replace a redundant power supply:

1. Remove the replacement power supply from its packaging.

2. Connect the power supply adapter cord to the threaded output

jack at the rear of the switch chassis as shown in Figure 5-2

. Twist the cord clockwise to lock and secure the connection.

3. Connect the AC power cord to a facility power source.

4. Wait several seconds, then inspect the power supply to ensure the

amber LED extinguishes. If the LED illuminates, go to MAP 0000:

Start MAP to isolate the problem.

5-8 McDATA Sphereon 4400 Fabric Switch Installation and Service Manual

Removal and Replacement Procedures

5

5. Inspect the Event Log:

— At a web browser communicating with the EFCM Basic

Edition interface, select Event from the Logs menu.

— At the management server (Element Manager application), select Event Log from the Logs menu.

Ensure the following event codes appear:

• 203 - Power supply AC voltage recovery.

• 207 - Power supply installed.

If the event codes do not appear, go to MAP 0000: Start MAP

to isolate the problem.

6. Verify power supply operation. At a web browser communicating with the EFCM Basic Edition interface or at the management server (Element Manager application), open the

Hardware View and observe the FRU graphic to ensure alert symbols do not appear (yellow triangle or red diamond).

If a problem is indicated, go to MAP 0000: Start MAP

to isolate the problem.

7. Perform a data collection procedure. Refer to Collecting

Maintenance Data (EFCM Basic Edition) or

Collecting Maintenance

Data (SAN management application) for instructions.

8. Clear the system error LED on the product front bezel:

— At a web browser communicating with the EFCM Basic

Edition interface, select Clear System Error Light from the

Maintenance menu.

— At the management server (Element Manager application), open the Hardware View. Right-click the front panel bezel graphic (away from a FRU), then click the Clear System Error

Light menu selection.

9. If necessary, close and lock the equipment cabinet door.

RRP 2: Redundant Power Supply 5-9

5

Removal and Replacement Procedures

5-10 McDATA Sphereon 4400 Fabric Switch Installation and Service Manual

6

Illustrated Parts

Breakdown

This chapter provides an illustrated parts breakdown for Sphereon

4400 Fabric Switch field-replaceable units (FRUs). Exploded-view assembly drawings are provided for:

• Front-accessible FRUs.

• Rear-accessible FRUs.

• Miscellaneous parts.

• Power cords and receptacles.

Exploded-view illustrations portray the switch disassembly sequence for clarity. Illustrated FRUs are numerically keyed to associated tabular part lists. The lists also include part numbers, descriptions, and quantities.

RoHS Information

European Parliament Directive 2002/95/EC takes effect July 1, 2006 restricting the use of certain hazardous substances in electrical and electronic equipment (RoHS). Equipment placed on the market before that date is exempt from RoHS regulations. The use of non-RoHS parts for repair and replacement is permitted for non-RoHS equipment. Equipment placed on the market after that date must comply with RoHS regulations, including the requirement that all repairs and replacements must use parts that are RoHS compliant

RoHS Information 6-1

6

Illustrated Parts Breakdown

Front-Accessible FRUs

Figure 6-1 illustrates front-accessible FRUs. Table 6-1 is the associated

FRU parts list. The table includes reference numbers to Figure 6-1 ,

FRU part numbers, descriptions, and quantities.

Figure 6-1 Front-Accessible FRUs

Table 6-1

Ref.

6 - 1

-1

Front-Accessible FRU Parts List

ROHs Part Number

002-E02774

803-E00084

Non-ROHs Part

Number

002-002774-000

803-000084-386

-1

-1

803-E00085

803-E00086

N/A

N/A

Description

Switch, Sphereon 4400, base assembly

Transceiver, optical, SFP, 850 nm, 3.3 volt, LC connector, tri-rate (1.0625/2.1250/4.2500 Gbps), digital diagnostic

Transceiver, optical,LW 4 Gpbps 4km SPFP

Transceiver, optical,LW 4 Gpbps 10km SPFP

Qty.

Reference

0 to 16

0 to 16

0 to 16

6-2 McDATA Sphereon 4400 Fabric Switch Installation and Service Manual

Illustrated Parts Breakdown

6

Rear-Accessible FRUs

Figure 6-2 illustrates rear-accessible FRUs. Table 6-2 is the associated

FRU parts list. The table includes reference numbers to Figure 6-2 ,

FRU part numbers, descriptions, and quantities.

Figure 6-2 Rear-Accessible FRUs

Table 6-2

Ref.

6 - 2

-1

Rear-Accessible FRU Parts List

Part Number

002-002774-000

721-000105-000

Description

Switch, Sphereon 4400, base assembly

Power supply assembly, external, 60-watt rated, 12 VDC output

Qty.

Reference

2

Rear-Accessible FRUs 6-3

6

Illustrated Parts Breakdown

Miscellaneous Parts

Figure 6-3 illustrates miscellaneous parts. Table 6-3

is the associated

parts list. The table includes reference numbers to Figure 6-3

, part numbers, descriptions, and quantities.

Figure 6-3 Miscellaneous Parts

Table 6-3

Ref.

-1

-2

-3

Miscellaneous Parts List

Part Number

803-000057-000

801-000039-000

801-000035-010

Description

Plug, loopback, LC connector, multimode, 50/125 micron (#1148)

Cable, communication, null modem, DB9F-DB9F connectors, 10-foot

Cable, Ethernet, RJ-45 connectors, Category 5E, 10-foot

Qty.

1

1

1

6-4 McDATA Sphereon 4400 Fabric Switch Installation and Service Manual

Illustrated Parts Breakdown

6

Power Cords and Receptacles

Figure 6-4 illustrates optional power cords and receptacles. Table 6-4 is the associated parts list. The table includes reference numbers to

Figure 6-4 , feature numbers, and descriptions.

Figure 6-4 Power Cords and Receptacles

Power Cords and Receptacles 6-5

6

Illustrated Parts Breakdown

Table 6-4 Power Cord and Receptacle List

Ref.

Part Number

-1 806-000001-000

-2

-3

-4

-5

-6

-7

-8

-9

-10

-11

806-000004-001

806-000005-001

806-000006-001

806-000027-000

806-000029-000

806-000030-000

806-000033-000

806-000034-000

806-000037-000

806-000038-000

Description

Power cord, AC, North America

NEMA 5-15P straight, 125 volts, 10 amps, 3.0 meters

Receptacle: NEMA 5-15R

Power cord, AC, United Kingdom

BS 1363 right angle, 250 volts, 10 amps, 2.8 meters

Receptacle: BS 1363

Power cord, AC, European Union

CEE 7/7 straight, 250 volts, 10 amps, 2.8 meters

Receptacle: CEE 7

Power cord, AC, Australia

AS 3112 straight, 250 volts, 10 amps, 2.8 meters

Receptacle: AS 3112

Power cord, AC, Italy, Chile, Libya, and Ethiopia

CEI 23-16/VII straight, 250 volts, 10 amps, 2.8 meters

Receptacle: CEI 23-16/VII

Power cord, AC, Israel

SI-32 right angle, 250 volts, 15 amps, 2.8 meters

Receptacle: SI-32

Power cord, AC, Thailand, Philippines, Taiwan, Bolivia, and Peru

NEMA 6-15P straight, 250 volts, 15 amps, 2.8 meters

Receptacle: NEMA 6-15R

Power cord, AC, Denmark

Afsnit 107-2-D1 straight, 250 volts, 10 amps, 2.8 meters

Receptacle: Afsnit 107-2-D1

Power cord, AC, South Africa, Burma, Pakistan, India, and Bangladesh

BS 546 Type, right angle, 250 volts, 15 amps, 2.8 meters

Receptacle: BS 546

Power cord, AC, Switzerland and Liechtenstein

SEV 1011 straight, 250 volts, 10 amps, 2.8 meters

Receptacle: SEV 1011

Power cord, AC, United States (Chicago)

NEMA 6-15P straight, non-locking, 250 volts, 10 amps, 1.8 meters

Receptacle: NEMA 6-15R

6-6 McDATA Sphereon 4400 Fabric Switch Installation and Service Manual

Feature

1010

1012

1013

1014

1021

1022

1023

1024

1025

1026

1027

Illustrated Parts Breakdown

6

Table 6-4 Power Cord and Receptacle List (Continued)

Ref.

-12

-13

-14

-15

-17

-18

Part Number

806-000040-000

806-000042-000

806-000043-000

Description

Power cord, AC, United States (Chicago)

NEMA L6-15P straight, twist-lock, 250 volts, 10 amps, 1.8 meters

Receptacle: NEMA L6-15R

Power cord, AC, North America

NEMA L6-15P straight, twist-lock, 250 volts, 10 amps, 2.8 meters

Receptacle: NEMA L6-15R

Power cord, AC, Japan

NEMA 6-15P straight, 240 volts, 6 amps, 2.8 meters

Receptacle: NEMA 6-15R

Note: The power cord shipped is specifically intended for use with the associated product and cannot be used with any other electrical products.

Feature

1028

1016 and

1029

1030

None 806-000058-000 Power cord, AC, Japan

JIS 8303 straight, 125 volts, 12 amps, 2.5 meters

Receptacle: NEMA 5-15R

Note: The power cord shipped is specifically intended for use with the associated product and cannot be used with any other electrical products.

806-E00080-004 Power cord, North America

NEMA 6-20P, right angle, non-locking, 250 volts, 20 amps, 4.3 meters

Receptacle: NEMA 6-20R

806-E00081-004 Power cord. North America

NEMA L6-20P, right angle, twist-lock, 250 volts, 16 amps, 4.3 meters

Receptacle: NEMA L6-20R

1078

1078

Power Cords and Receptacles 6-7

6

Illustrated Parts Breakdown

Power Cords (Japan, Denan)

CAUTION

Never use the power cord packed with your equipment for other products.

6-8 McDATA Sphereon 4400 Fabric Switch Installation and Service Manual

A

Event Code Tables

An event is a state change, problem detection, or problem correction that requires attention or should be reported to service personnel. An event usually indicates an operational state transition, but may also indicate an impending state change (threshold violation) or provide information only. Events are reported as event codes. This appendix lists three-digit event codes. The codes are listed in numerical order and tabular format as follows:

• 000 through 199 - system events.

• 200 through 299 - power supply events.

• 300 through 399 - fan events.

• 400 through 499 - control processor (CTP) card events.

• 500 through 599 - port events.

• 800 through 899 - thermal sensor events.

Events are recorded in the Event Log at the Enterprise Fabric

Connectivity Manager (EFCM) Basic Edition interface or rack-mount management server (Element Manager application). An event illuminates the system error light-emitting diode (LED) at the product front panel.

Tables in this appendix also provide a:

• Message - a text string that describes the event.

• Severity - a severity level that indicates event criticality as follows:

A-1

A

Event Code Tables

— 0 - informational.

— 2 - minor.

— 3 - major.

— 4 - severe (not operational).

• Explanation - an explanation of what caused the event.

• Action - the recommended course of action (if any) to resolve the problem.

• Event data - supplementary event data (if any) that appears in the event log in hexadecimal format.

• Distribution - checks in associated fields indicate where the event code is reported (product, management server, or attached host).

System Events (000 through 199)

Event Code: 011

Message:

Severity:

Login Server database invalid.

Minor.

Explanation: Following an initial machine load (IML) or firmware download, the Login Server database failed cyclic redundancy check (CRC) validation. All fabric service databases initialize to an empty state, resulting in implicit fabric logout of all attached devices.

Action: Perform a data collection and return the CD to support personnel.

Event Data: No supplementary data included.

Distribution: Product

Event Log

Management Server

E-Mail Call-Home EFCM Basic

Event Log

✔

System

Error LED

✔ ✔ ✔ ✔

Host

Sense Info Link Incident

Log

A-2 McDATA Sphereon 4400 Fabric Switch Installation and Service Manual

Event Code Tables

A

Event Code: 021

Message: Name Server database invalid.

Severity: Minor.

Explanation: Following an IML or firmware download, the Name Server database failed CRC validation. All fabric service databases initialize to an empty state, resulting in implicit fabric logout of all attached devices.

Action: Perform a data collection and return the CD to support personnel.

Event Data: No supplementary data included.

Distribution: Product

EFCM Basic

Event Log

✔

System

Error LED

✔

Event Log

Management Server

E-Mail Call-Home

✔ ✔ ✔

Host

Sense Info Link Incident

Log

Event Code: 031

Message: SNMP request received from unauthorized community.

Severity: Informational.

Explanation: An SNMP request containing an unauthorized community name was rejected with an error. Only requests containing authorized SNMP community names configured through the Element Manager application are allowed.

Action: Add the community name to the SNMP configuration using the Element Manager application.

Event Data: No supplementary data included.

Distribution:

EFCM Basic

Event Log

✔

Product

System

Error LED

Event Log

Management Server

E-Mail Call-Home

✔

Host

Sense Info Link Incident

Log

System Events (000 through 199) A-3

A

Event Code Tables

Event Code: 051

Message: Management Server database invalid.

Severity: Minor.

Explanation: Following an IML or firmware download, the Management Server database failed CRC validation. All management service databases initialize to an empty state, resulting in implicit logout of all logged-in devices.

Action: Perform a data collection and return the CD to support personnel.

Event Data: No supplementary data included.

Distribution: Product

EFCM Basic

Event Log

✔

System

Error LED

✔

Event Log

Management Server

E-Mail Call-Home

✔ ✔ ✔

Host

Sense Info Link Incident

Log

Event Code: 061

Message: Fabric Controller database invalid.

Severity: Minor.

Explanation: Following an IML or firmware download, the fabric controller database failed CRC validation. All fabric controller databases initialize to an empty state, resulting in momentary loss of interswitch communication.

Action: Perform a data collection and return the CD to support personnel.

Event Data: No supplementary data included.

Distribution: Product

EFCM Basic

Event Log

✔

System

Error LED

✔

Event Log

Management Server

E-Mail Call-Home

✔ ✔ ✔

Host

Sense Info Link Incident

Log

A-4 McDATA Sphereon 4400 Fabric Switch Installation and Service Manual

Event Code Tables

A

Event Code: 062

Message: Maximum interswitch hop count exceeded.

Severity: Informational.

Explanation: Fabric controller software detected a path to a director or switch that traverses more than seven interswitch links

(hops). This may result in Fibre Channel frames persisting in the fabric longer than timeout values allow.

Action: Reconfigure the fabric so the path between any two switches traverses seven or less ISLs.

Event Data: Byte 0 = domain ID of the director or switch more than seven hops away.

Distribution:

EFCM Basic

Event Log

✔

Product

System

Error LED

Event Log

Management Server

E-Mail Call-Home

✔

Host

Sense Info Link Incident

Log

Event Code: 063

Message: Remote switch has too many ISLs.

Severity: Major.

Explanation: The director or switch with domain ID indicated in the event data has too many ISLs attached and is unreachable from this switch. SAN management application Version 3.2 and earlier supports up to 32 ISLs. SAN management application Version 3.3 and later supports up to 128 ISLs.

Action: Reduce the ISLs on the indicated director or switch to a number within limits specified.

Event Data: Byte 0 = domain ID of the director or switch with too many ISLs.

Distribution: Product

EFCM Basic

Event Log

✔

System

Error LED

✔

Event Log

Management Server

E-Mail Call-Home

✔ ✔

Host

Sense Info Link Incident

Log

System Events (000 through 199) A-5

A

Event Code Tables

Event Code: 064

Message: ESS response from indicated domain ID not received after maximum tries.

Severity: Informational.

Explanation: Fabric controller software detected an exchange switch support (ESS) response from the indicated domain ID was not received after the maximum attempts. The event is reported only in McDATA interop mode.

Action: No action required.

Event Data: Byte 0 = domain ID of the director or switch not receiving an ESS response.

Byte 1 = domain ID of the director or switch not responding.

Distribution:

EFCM Basic

Event Log

✔

Product

System

Error LED

Event Log

Management Server

E-Mail Call-Home

✔

Host

Sense Info Link Incident

Log

A-6 McDATA Sphereon 4400 Fabric Switch Installation and Service Manual

Event Code Tables

A

Event Code: 070

Message: E_Port is segmented.

Severity: Informational.

Explanation: An E_Port recognized an incompatibility with the attached director or switch, preventing fabric participation. A segmented port does not transmit Class 2 or Class 3 traffic, but transmits Class F traffic. Refer to event data for segmentation reason.

Action: Action depends on segmentation reason specified.

Event Data: The first byte of event data (byte 0) specifies the E_Port number. The fifth byte (byte 4) specifies the segmentation reason as follows:

1 = Incompatible operating parameters - Ether the resource allocation time out value (R_A_TOV) or error detect time out value (E_D_TOV) is inconsistent between the switch and another director or switch. Modify the

R_A_TOV and E_D_TOV to make the values consistent.

2 = Duplicate domain ID - The switch has the same preferred domain ID as another director or switch) Modify the Domain ID to make it unique.

Distribution:

3 = Incompatible zoning configurations - The same name is applied to a zone for the switch and another director or switch, but the zones contain different zone members. Modify the zone name to make it unique, or ensure zones with the same name contain identical zone members.

4 = Build fabric protocol error - A protocol error was detected during incorporation of the switch into the fabric.

Disconnect the E_Port link, then reconnect the link. If the condition persists, perform a data collection and return the CD to support personnel.

5 = No principal switch - No director or switch in the fabric can become the principal switch. Modify the switch priority to any value other than 255.

6 = No response from attached switch (hello timeout) - The switch periodically verifies operation of attached directors or switches. The E_Port at the operational switch times out and segments if the attached device does not respond. Check the status of the attached director or switch. If the condition persists, perform a data collection and return the CD to support personnel.

Product

EFCM Basic

Event Log

✔

System

Error LED

Event Log

Management Server

E-Mail Call-Home

✔ ✔

Host

Sense Info Link Incident

Log

System Events (000 through 199) A-7

A

Event Code Tables

Event Code: 071

Message: Switch is isolated.

Severity: Informational.

Explanation: The switch is isolated from other directors or switches. This event code is accompanied by one or more 070 event codes. Refer to event data for segmentation reason.

Action: Action depends on segmentation reason specified.

Event Data: The first byte of event data (byte 0) specifies the E_Port number. The fifth byte (byte 4) specifies the segmentation reason as follows:

1 = Incompatible operating parameters - Ether the resource allocation time out value (R_A_TOV) or error detect time out value (E_D_TOV) is inconsistent between the switch and another director or switch. Modify the

R_A_TOV and E_D_TOV to make the values consistent.

2 = Duplicate domain ID - The switch has the same preferred domain ID as another director or switch) Modify the Domain ID to make it unique.

Distribution:

3 = Incompatible zoning configurations - The same name is applied to a zone for the switch and another director or switch, but the zones contain different zone members. Modify the zone name to make it unique, or ensure zones with the same name contain identical zone members.

4 = Build fabric protocol error - A protocol error was detected during incorporation of the switch into the fabric.

Disconnect the E_Port link, then reconnect the link. If the condition persists, perform a data collection and return the CD to support personnel.

5 = No principal switch - No director or switch in the fabric can become the principal switch. Modify the switch priority to any value other than 255.

6 = No response from attached switch (hello timeout) - The switch periodically verifies operation of attached directors or switches. The E_Port at the operational switch times out and segments if the attached device does not respond. Check the status of the attached director or switch. If the condition persists, perform a data collection and return the CD to support personnel.

Product

EFCM Basic

Event Log

✔

System

Error LED

Event Log

Management Server

E-Mail Call-Home

✔

Host

Sense Info Link Incident

Log

A-8 McDATA Sphereon 4400 Fabric Switch Installation and Service Manual

Event Code Tables

A

Event Code: 072

Message: E_Port connected to unsupported switch.

Severity: Informational.

Explanation: The switch is attached (through an ISL) to an incompatible director or switch.

Action: Disconnect the ISL.

Event Data: No supplementary data included.

Distribution:

EFCM Basic

Event Log

✔

Product

System

Error LED

Event Log

Management Server

E-Mail Call-Home

✔

Host

Sense Info Link Incident

Log

Event Code: 073

Message: Fabric initialization error.

Severity: Informational.

Explanation: An error was detected during the fabric initialization sequence, probably caused by frame delivery errors. Event data is intended for engineering evaluation.

Action: Perform a data collection and return the CD to support personnel.

Event Data: Byte 0 = error reason code for engineering evaluation.

Bytes 4 - 9 = port numbers where problems were detected.

Distribution:

EFCM Basic

Event Log

✔

Product

System

Error LED

Event Log

Management Server

E-Mail Call-Home

✔

Host

Sense Info Link Incident

Log

System Events (000 through 199) A-9

A

Event Code Tables

Event Code: 074

Message: ILS frame delivery error threshold exceeded.

Severity: Informational.

Explanation: Fabric controller frame delivery errors exceeded an E_Port threshold and caused fabric initialization problems

(073 event code). Most problems are caused by control frame delivery errors, as indicated by this code. Event data is intended for engineering evaluation.

Action: Perform a data collection and return the CD to support personnel.

Event Data: Byte 0 = E_Port number reporting the problem.

Bytes 4 - 8 = Count of frame delivery timeouts.

Bytes 9 - 11 = Count of frame delivery aborts.

Distribution:

EFCM Basic

Event Log

✔

Product

System

Error LED

Event Log

Management Server

E-Mail Call-Home

✔

Host

Sense Info Link Incident

Log

Event Code: 075

Message: E_Port segmentation recovery.

Severity: Informational.

Explanation: A segmented E_Port (event code 070) recovered. This event is not generated if the port is manually recovered by blocking and unblocking, setting offline and online, or disconnecting the fiber-optic cable.

Action: No action required.

Event Data: The first byte of event data (byte 0) specifies the E_Port number. The fifth byte (byte 4) specifies the original segmentation reason as described in event code 070.

Distribution: Product

EFCM Basic

Event Log

✔

System

Error LED

Event Log

Management Server

E-Mail Call-Home

✔ ✔

Host

Sense Info Link Incident

Log

A-10 McDATA Sphereon 4400 Fabric Switch Installation and Service Manual

Event Code Tables

A

Event Code: 076

Message: Out of Range Domain ID detected.

Severity: Informational.

Explanation: Switch has detected a domain ID that is out of the supported range behind the attached ISL. This event may be followed by a segmentation event 070.

Action: Check that all McDATA switches in the fabric are configured with the same domain id offset. Check that all non-McDATA switches are configured with a domain id that is within the range of this switch (offset + 1 ' offset +

31).

Event Data: Byte 0 = E Port number.

Byte 1 = Out of Range Domain ID

Bytes 8 - 15 = WWNN of Switch with Out of Range Domain ID.

Distribution:

EFCM Basic

Event Log

✔

Product

System

Error LED

Event Log

Management Server

E-Mail Call-Home

✔ ✔

Host

Sense Info Link Incident

Log

Event Code: 080

Message: Unauthorized worldwide name.

Severity: Informational.

Explanation: The WWN of the connected device or fabric element is not authorized for the port number.

Action: Change the port binding definition or connect the proper device or fabric element to the indicated port.

Event Data: Byte 0 = Port number reporting the unauthorized connection.

Bytes 4 - 11 = WWN of the unauthorized device or fabric element.

Distribution:

EFCM Basic

Event Log

✔

Product

System

Error LED

Event Log

Management Server

E-Mail Call-Home

✔ ✔

Host

Sense Info Link Incident

Log

System Events (000 through 199) A-11

A

Event Code Tables

Event Code: 081

Message: Invalid attachment.

Severity: Informational.

Explanation: A switch port recognized an incompatibility with the attached fabric element or device and isolated the port. An isolated port does not transmit Class 2, Class 3, or Class F traffic. Refer to event data for the reason.

Action: Action depends on reason specified.

Event Data: The first byte of event data (byte 0) specifies the port number. The fifth byte (byte 4) specifies the isolation reason as follows:

1 = Unknown - Reason is unknown, but probably caused by failure of an E_Port connected device. Fault isolate the failed device or contact support personnel to report the problem.

2 = ISL connection not allowed - The port connection conflicts with the configured port type. Change the port type to F_Port if the port is cabled to a device, or E_Port if the port is cabled to a fabric element to form an ISL.

3 = Incompatible switch - The switch returned a Process ELP Reject - Unable to Process reason code because the attached fabric element is not compatible. Set the switch operating mode to McDATA Fabric 1.0 if connected to a McDATA product. Set the switch operating mode to Open Fabric 1.0 if connected to an open-fabric compliant product manufactured by a different vendor.

4 = Incompatible switch - The switch returned a Process ELP Reject - Invalid Revision Level reason code because the attached fabric element is not compatible. Set the switch operating mode to McDATA Fabric 1.0 if connected to a McDATA product. Set the switch operating mode to Open Fabric 1.0 if connected to an open-fabric compliant product manufactured by a different vendor.

5 = Loopback plug connected - A loopback plug is connected to the port with no diagnostic test running.

Remove the loopback plug.

6 = N_Port connection not allowed - The switch is connected to a fabric element through a misconfigured port.

Change the port type to E_Port.

7 = Non-McDATA switch at other end - The attached fabric element is not a McDATA product. Set the switch operating mode to Open Fabric 1.0 if connected to an open-fabric compliant product manufactured by a different vendor.

8 = E_Port capability disabled - The product does not have E_Port capability. Enable this functionality through the appropriate product feature enablement (PFE) key.

A-12 McDATA Sphereon 4400 Fabric Switch Installation and Service Manual

Event Code Tables

A

Event Code: 081 (continued)

Event Data

(continued):

A = Unauthorized port binding WWN - The device WWN or nickname used to configure port binding for this port is not valid. At the Configure Ports dialog box, reconfigure the port with the WWN or nickname authorized for the attached device, or disable the port binding feature.

B = Unresponsive node - The attached node did not respond, resulting in a G_Port ELP timeout. Check the status of the attached device and clean the link’s fiber-optic components (cable and connectors). If the problem persists, contact support personnel to report the problem.

C = ESA security mismatch - Processing of the Exchange Security Attribute (ESA) frame detected a security feature mismatch. The switch binding parameters for this switch and the attached fabric element must agree. At the Switch Binding - State Change dialog boxes, ensure the parameters for both fabric elements are compatible, or disable the fabric and switch binding features.

D = Fabric binding mismatch - Fabric binding is enabled and an attached fabric element has an incompatible fabric membership list. At the Fabric Binding dialog box, update the fabric membership list for both fabric elements to ensure compatibility, or disable the fabric binding feature.

E = Authorization failure reject - The fabric element connected to the switch through an ISL detected a security violation. As a result, the switch received a generic reason code and set the port to an invalid attachment state.

Check the port status of the attached fabric element and clean the link’s fiber-optic components (cable and connectors). If the problem persists, contact support personnel to report the problem.

F = Unauthorized switch binding WWN - Switch binding is enabled and an attached device or fabric element has an incompatible switch membership list. At the Switch Binding - Membership List dialog box, update the switch membership list for the switch and the attached device or fabric element to ensure compatibility, or disable the switch binding feature.

10 = Authentication failure - An ISL challenge handshake authentication protocol (CHAP) check failed. Update the authentication list or disable the authentication feature.

11 = Fabric mode mismatch - Based on the ELP revision level, a connection was not allowed because a

McDATA switch in legacy mode is attached to a McDATA switch in Open Fabric mode, or a McDATA switch in

Open Fabric mode is attached to an OEM switch at an incorrect ELP revision level. Update the fabric mode for one switch using the Interop Mode drop-down list at the Configure Fabric Parameters dialog box.

Distribution:

EFCM Basic

Event Log

✔

Product

System

Error LED

Event Log

✔

Management Server

E-Mail Call-Home

Host

Sense Info Link Incident

Log

✔

System Events (000 through 199) A-13

A

Event Code Tables

Event Code: 082

Message: Port fenced.

Severity: Informational.

Explanation: The port was blocked after exceeding threshold criteria defined by the port fencing policy. A hardware malfunction is indicated or the port fencing policy is too restrictive. The fence type is indicated in the event data.

Action: Identify and correct the hardware malfunction (port transceiver, fiber-optic cable, or attached fabric element), or change the port fencing threshold settings to more lenient values. After problem correction, unblock the port.

Event Data: The first byte of event data (byte 0) specifies the port number. The fifth byte (byte 4) specifies the fence type code as follows:

1 = Protocol error - Failure is associated with persistent incomplete operations or application-layer protocol errors (including port logins, fabric rebuilds, and management protocol errors).

2 = Link level hot I/O - Failure is hardware related and associated with an unstable link-state machine.

3 = Security violation - Failure is associated with persistent firmware-related security feature violations (port binding violations or authentication failures).

Distribution:

The ninth byte (byte 8) specifies the disabled reason code as follows:

1 = Unknown - The failure reason is unknown.

9 = ISL fencing - The E_Port (ISL) was fenced after the port exceeded a threshold value.

Product

EFCM Basic

Event Log

✔

System

Error LED

Event Log

Management Server

E-Mail Call-Home

✔

Host

Sense Info Link Incident

Log

✔

A-14 McDATA Sphereon 4400 Fabric Switch Installation and Service Manual

Event Code Tables

A

Event Code: 083

Message: Port set to inactive state.

Severity: Informational.

Explanation: A hardware or software problem prevented the port from coming online and set the port to an inactive state. Refer to event data for the inactive reason

Action: Action depends on inactive reason specified.

Event Data: The first byte of event data (byte 0) specifies the port number. The second byte (byte 1) specifies the inactive reason code as follows:

2 = Feature key not enabled - The optional flexport PFE key is not enabled.

3 = Switch speed conflict - The port cannot operated at the configured product (backplane or CTP Card) speed.

4 = Optics speed conflict - The port transceiver does not support the configured port speed.

5 = No SBAR - A serial crossbar (SBAR) is not installed. Not applicable to 4000-series fabric switches.

6 = Port swap conflict - The port swap configuration is invalid.

7=Sustained Mode User Configuration - The user has configured a neighboring port into sustained mode, thus preventing the use of this port

Distribution:

8=Virtualization engine initialization in progress-The virtualization engine is undergoing/awaiting initialization processing to conclude. Internal ports associated with the virtualization engine are inactive until initialization completes.

Product

EFCM Basic

Event Log

✔

System

Error LED

Event Log

Management Server

E-Mail Call-Home

✔

Sense Info Link Incident

Log

✔

Host

System Events (000 through 199) A-15

A

Event Code Tables

Event Code: 084

Message: Continuous Incident Detection and Reporting - threshold was exceeded for the port

Severity: Informational.

Explanation: CIDR threshold value exceeded for one of the following incidents

• Unroutable Frames Incident - Port has received unroutable frames

• Routable Good Frames Incident - Port has received frames with embedded port as destination

• Invalid Transmission words Incident - Port has received invalid transmission words

The CIDR reason code is indicated in the event data.

Action: Helps in identifying the misbehaving device, so that it could be corrected/fixed

Event Data: The first byte of event data (byte 0) specifies the port number. The second byte (byte 1) specifies the inactive reason code as follows:

1 = Unroutable Frames Incident - The port has received unroutable frames.

2 = Good Frames Incident - The port has received frames with embedded port as destination.

3 = Invalid Transmission Words Incident - The port has received invalid transmission words.

Distribution:

EFCM Basic

Event Log

✔

Product

System

Error LED

Event Log

✔

Management Server

E-Mail Call-Home

Host

Sense Info Link Incident

Log

A-16 McDATA Sphereon 4400 Fabric Switch Installation and Service Manual

Event Code Tables

A

Event Code: 085

Message: Continuous Incident Detection and Reporting with E-Mail - CIDR threshold was exceeded for the port and this event will trigger an E-Mail.

Severity: Informational.

Explanation: CIDR threshold value exceeded for one of the following incidents

• Unroutable Frames Incident - Port has received unroutable frames

• Routable Good Frames Incident - Port has received frames with embedded port as destination

• Invalid Transmission words Incident - Port has received invalid transmission words

The CIDR reason code is indicated in the event data.

Action: Identify the responsible device and fix

Event Data: The first byte of event data (byte 0) specifies the port number. The second byte (byte 1) specifies the inactive reason code as follows:

1 = Unroutable Frames Incident - The port has received unroutable frames.

2 = Good Frames Incident - The port has received frames with embedded port as destination.

3 = Invalid Transmission Words Incident - The port has received invalid transmission words.

Distribution:

EFCM Basic

Event Log

✔

Product

System

Error LED

Event Log

✔

Management Server

E-Mail

✔

Call-Home

Host

Sense Info Link Incident

Log

System Events (000 through 199) A-17

A

Event Code Tables

Event Code: 086

Message: Continuous Incident Detection and Reporting with Call Home - CIDR threshold was exceeded for the port and this event will trigger E-Mail as well as Call Home

Severity: Informational.

Explanation: CIDR threshold value exceeded for one of the following incidents

• Unroutable Frames Incident - Port has received unroutable frames

• Routable Good Frames Incident - Port has received frames with embedded port as destination

• Invalid Transmission words Incident - Port has received invalid transmission words

The CIDR reason code is indicated in the event data.

Action: Identify the responsible device and fix.

Event Data: The first byte of event data (byte 0) specifies the port number. The second byte (byte 1) specifies the inactive reason code as follows:

1 = Unroutable Frames Incident - The port has received unroutable frames.

2 = Good Frames Incident - The port has received frames with embedded port as destination.

3 = Invalid Transmission Words Incident - The port has received invalid transmission words.

Distribution:

EFCM Basic

Event Log

✔

Product

System

Error LED

Event Log

✔

Management Server

E-Mail

✔

Call-Home

✔

Host

Sense Info Link Incident

Log

A-18 McDATA Sphereon 4400 Fabric Switch Installation and Service Manual

Event Code Tables

A

Event Code: 120

Message: Error detected while processing system management command.

Severity: Informational.

Explanation: This event occurs when the switch receives a management command that violates specified boundary conditions, typically as a result of a network error. The switch rejects the command, drops the switch-to-server

Ethernet link, and forces error recovery processing. When the link recovers, the command can be retried.

Action: No action is required for an isolated event. If this event persists, perform a data collection and return the CD to support personnel.

Event Data: No supplementary data included.

Distribution: Product

EFCM Basic

Event Log

✔

System

Error LED

Event Log

Management Server

E-Mail Call-Home

✔

Host

Sense Info Link Incident

Log

Event Code: 121

Message: Zone set activation failed - zone set too large.

Severity: Informational.

Explanation: This event occurs when the switch receives a zone set activation command that exceeds the size supported by the switch. The switch rejects the command, drops the switch-to-server Ethernet link, and forces error recovery processing. When the link recovers, the command can be modified and retried.

Action: Reduce the size of the zone set to conform to the limit specified, then retry the activation command.

Event Data: No supplementary data included.

Distribution:

EFCM Basic

Event Log

✔

Product

System

Error LED

Event Log

Management Server

E-Mail Call-Home

✔

Host

Sense Info Link Incident

Log

System Events (000 through 199) A-19

A

Event Code Tables

Event Code: 140

Message: Congestion detected on an ISL.

Severity: Informational.

Explanation: OpenTrunking firmware detected an ISL with Fibre Channel traffic that exceeded the configured congestion threshold.

Action: No action is required for an isolated event. If this event persists, relieve the congestion by adding parallel ISLs, increasing the ISL link speed, or moving device connections to a less-congested region of the fabric.

Event Data: Byte 0 = Port number reporting congestion.

Distribution: Product

EFCM Basic

Event Log

✔

System

Error LED

Event Log

Management Server

E-Mail Call-Home

✔

Host

Sense Info Link Incident

Log

Event Code: 141

Message: Congestion relieved on an ISL.

Severity: Informational.

Explanation: OpenTrunking firmware detected an ISL with Fibre Channel traffic that previously exceeded the configured congestion threshold. The congestion is now relieved.

Action: No action required.

Event Data: Byte 0 = Port number reporting congestion relieved.

Distribution:

EFCM Basic

Event Log

✔

Product

System

Error LED

Event Log

Management Server

E-Mail Call-Home

✔

Host

Sense Info Link Incident

Log

A-20 McDATA Sphereon 4400 Fabric Switch Installation and Service Manual

Event Code Tables

A

Event Code: 142

Message: Low BB_Credit detected on an ISL.

Severity: Informational.

Explanation: OpenTrunking firmware detected an ISL with no transmission BB_Credit for a period of time that exceeded the configured low BB_Credit threshold. This indicates downstream fabric congestion.

Action: No action is required for an isolated event or if the reporting ISL approaches 100% throughput. If this event persists, relieve the low BB_Credit condition by adding parallel ISLs, increasing the ISL link speed, or moving device connections to a less-congested region of the fabric.

Event Data: Byte 0 = Port number reporting low BB_Credit.

Distribution:

EFCM Basic

Event Log

✔

Product

System

Error LED

Event Log

Management Server

E-Mail Call-Home

✔

Host

Sense Info Link Incident

Log

Event Code: 143

Message: Low BB_Credit relieved on an ISL.

Severity: Informational.

Explanation: OpenTrunking firmware detected an ISL with no transmission BB_Credit for a period of time that previously exceeded the configured low BB_Credit threshold. The low-credit condition is now relieved.

Action: No action required.

Event Data: Byte 0 = Port number reporting low BB_Credit relieved.

Distribution:

EFCM Basic

Event Log

✔

Product

System

Error LED

Event Log

Management Server

E-Mail Call-Home

✔

Host

Sense Info Link Incident

Log

System Events (000 through 199) A-21

A

Event Code Tables

Event Code: 150

Message: Fabric merge failure.

Severity: Informational.

Explanation: During ISL initialization, the fabric merge process failed. The fabric binding membership lists do not match, an incompatible zone set was detected, there is a problem with exchanging zoning parameters, or the zone set merge failed. This event code is always preceded by a 070 ISL segmentation event code, and represents the reply of an adjacent fabric element. Refer to the event data for the failure reason.

Action: Perform a data collection and return the CD to support personnel.

Event Data: Event data are mapped from the software implementation of the FC-SW2 protocol and are typically complicated.

Decoding the event data requires engineering support. Event data are as follows:

Distribution:

Bytes 0 - 3 = Affected E_Port number(s).

Bytes 4 - 7 = Request SW_ILS command codes.

Bytes 8 - 31 = Request response payloads.

Product

EFCM Basic

Event Log

✔

System

Error LED

✔

Event Log

Management Server

E-Mail Call-Home

✔

Host

Sense Info Link Incident

Log

A-22 McDATA Sphereon 4400 Fabric Switch Installation and Service Manual

Event Code Tables

A

Event Code: 151

Message: Fabric configuration failure.

Severity: Informational.

Explanation: A fabric-wide configuration activation process failed. An event code 151 is recorded only by the managing switch in the fabric. The event code is intended to help engineering support personnel fault isolate a fabric-wide configuration failures.

Action: Perform a data collection and return the CD to support personnel.

Event Data: Event data are mapped from the software implementation of the FC-SW2 protocol and are typically complicated.

Decoding the event data requires engineering support. Event data are as follows:

Distribution:

Bytes 0 - 3 = Managing switch domain ID in internal format (1-31).

Bytes 4 - 7 = Fabric configuration operation that failed.

Bytes 8 - 11 = Fabric configuration step that failed.

Bytes 12 - 15 = Managed switch domain ID in internal format (1-31).

Bytes 16 - 19 = Response command code received from the managed switch.

Bytes 20 - 23 = Response code received from the managed switch.

Bytes 24 - 27 = Reason code received from the managed switch.

Bytes 28 - 31 = Error code received from the managed switch.

Product

EFCM Basic

Event Log

✔

System

Error LED

✔

Event Log

Management Server

E-Mail Call-Home

✔

Host

Sense Info Link Incident

Log

System Events (000 through 199) A-23

A

Event Code Tables

Power Supply Events (200 through 299)

Event Code: 200

Message:

Severity:

Power supply AC voltage failure.

Major.

Explanation: AC input to the power supply is disconnected or AC circuitry in the power supply failed. The event only occurs when two power supplies are installed. The second power supply assumes the full operating load.

Action: Ensure the power supply is connected to facility AC power and verify operation of the facility power source. If the

AC voltage does not recover (indicated by event code 203), replace the failed power supply. Perform a data collection and return the CD and failed power supply to support personnel.

Event Data: No supplementary data included.

Distribution: Product

Event Log

Management Server

E-Mail Call-Home EFCM Basic

Event Log

✔

System

Error LED

✔ ✔ ✔ ✔

Sense Info Link Incident

Log

✔

Host

Event Code: 201

Message:

Severity:

Power supply DC voltage failure.

Major.

Explanation: DC circuitry in the power supply failed. The event only occurs when two power supplies are installed. The second power supply assumes the full operating load.

Action: Replace the failed power supply. Perform a data collection and return the CD and failed power supply to support personnel.

Event Data: No supplementary data included.

Distribution: Product

Event Log

Management Server

E-Mail Call-Home EFCM Basic

Event Log

✔

System

Error LED

✔ ✔ ✔ ✔

Sense Info Link Incident

Log

✔

Host

A-24 McDATA Sphereon 4400 Fabric Switch Installation and Service Manual

Event Code Tables

A

Event Code: 203

Message: Power supply AC voltage recovery.

Severity: Informational.

Explanation: AC voltage recovered for the power supply. Both power supplies adjust to share operating load.

Action: No action required.

Event Data: No supplementary data included.

Distribution:

EFCM Basic

Event Log

✔

Product

System

Error LED

Event Log

Management Server

E-Mail Call-Home

✔

Host

Sense Info Link Incident

Log

Event Code: 204

Message: Power supply DC voltage recovery.

Severity: Informational.

Explanation: DC voltage recovered for the power supply. Both power supplies adjust to share operating load.

Action: No action required.

Event Data: No supplementary data included.

Distribution:

EFCM Basic

Event Log

✔

Product

System

Error LED

Event Log

Management Server

E-Mail Call-Home

✔

Host

Sense Info Link Incident

Log

Power Supply Events (200 through 299) A-25

A

Event Code Tables

Event Code: 206

Message: Power supply removed.

Severity: Informational.

Explanation: A power supply was removed while the switch was powered on and operational. The second power supply assumes the full operating load.

Action: No action required or install an operational power supply.

Event Data: No supplementary data included.

Distribution:

EFCM Basic

Event Log

✔

Product

System

Error LED

Event Log

Management Server

E-Mail Call-Home

✔

Host

Sense Info Link Incident

Log

Event Code: 207

Message: Power supply installed.

Severity: Informational.

Explanation: A redundant power supply was installed with the switch powered on and operational. Both power supplies adjust to share operating load.

Action: No action required.

Event Data: No supplementary data included.

Distribution:

EFCM Basic

Event Log

✔

Product

System

Error LED

Event Log

Management Server

E-Mail Call-Home

✔

Host

Sense Info Link Incident

Log

A-26 McDATA Sphereon 4400 Fabric Switch Installation and Service Manual

Event Code Tables

A

Event Code: 208

Message: Power supply false shutdown.

Severity: Major.

Explanation: The power supply indicated that it was about to shutdown as a result of a power loss, but never did. The operational firmware prepared for the shutdown.

Action: Perform a data collection and return the CD to support personnel.

Event Data: No supplementary data included.

Distribution: Product

EFCM Basic

Event Log

✔

System

Error LED

✔

Event Log

Management Server

E-Mail Call-Home

✔ ✔ ✔

Sense Info Link Incident

Log

✔

Host

Power Supply Events (200 through 299) A-27

A

Event Code Tables

Fan Events (300 through 399)

Event Code: 300

Message:

Severity:

Cooling fan propeller failed.

Major.

Explanation: One cooling fan failed or is rotating at insufficient angular velocity.

Action: Replace the switch.

Event Data: The first byte of event data (byte 0) specifies the failed fan number.

Distribution: Product Management Server

EFCM Basic

Event Log

✔

System

Error LED

✔

Event Log

✔

E-Mail

✔

Call-Home

✔

Host

Sense Info Link Incident

Log

✔

Event Code: 301

Message:

Severity:

Cooling fan propeller failed.

Major.

Explanation: Two cooling fans failed or are rotating at insufficient angular velocity.

Action: Replace the switch.

Event Data: The first byte of event data (byte 0) specifies the failed fan number(s).

Distribution: Product Management Server

EFCM Basic

Event Log

✔

System

Error LED

✔

Event Log

✔

E-Mail

✔

Call-Home

✔

Host

Sense Info Link Incident

Log

✔

A-28 McDATA Sphereon 4400 Fabric Switch Installation and Service Manual

Event Code Tables

A

Event Code: 302

Message: Cooling fan propeller failed.

Severity: Major.

Explanation: Three cooling fans failed or are rotating at insufficient angular velocity.

Action: Replace the switch.

Event Data: The first byte of event data (byte 0) specifies the failed fan number(s).

Distribution: Product

EFCM Basic

Event Log

✔

System

Error LED

✔

Event Log

Management Server

E-Mail Call-Home

✔ ✔ ✔

Host

Sense Info Link Incident

Log

✔

Event Code: 303

Message: Cooling fan propeller failed.

Severity: Major.

Explanation: Fourth cooling fan failed or are rotating at insufficient angular velocity.

Action: Replace the switch.

Event Data: The first byte of event data (byte 0) specifies the failed fan number(s).

Distribution: Product

EFCM Basic

Event Log

✔

System

Error LED

✔

Event Log

Management Server

E-Mail Call-Home

✔ ✔ ✔

Host

Sense Info Link Incident

Log

✔

Fan Events (300 through 399) A-29

A

Event Code Tables

Event Code: 304

Message: Cooling fan propeller failed.

Severity: Major.

Explanation: Fifth cooling fan failed or are rotating at insufficient angular velocity.

Action: Replace the switch.

Event Data: The first byte of event data (byte 0) specifies the failed fan number(s).

Distribution: Product

EFCM Basic

Event Log

✔

System

Error LED

✔

Event Log

Management Server

E-Mail Call-Home

✔ ✔ ✔

Host

Sense Info Link Incident

Log

✔

Event Code: 305

Message: Cooling fan propeller failed.

Severity: Major.

Explanation: Sixth cooling fan failed or are rotating at insufficient angular velocity.

Action: Replace the switch.

Event Data: The first byte of event data (byte 0) specifies the failed fan number(s).

Distribution: Product

EFCM Basic

Event Log

✔

System

Error LED

✔

Event Log

Management Server

E-Mail Call-Home

✔ ✔ ✔

Host

Sense Info Link Incident

Log

✔

A-30 McDATA Sphereon 4400 Fabric Switch Installation and Service Manual

Event Code Tables

A

Event Code: 310

Message: Cooling fan propeller recovered.

Severity: Informational.

Explanation: One cooling fan recovered.

Action: No action required.

Event Data: The first byte of event data (byte 0) specifies the recovered fan number.

Distribution:

EFCM Basic

Event Log

✔

Product

System

Error LED

Event Log

Management Server

E-Mail Call-Home

✔

Host

Sense Info Link Incident

Log

Event Code: 311

Message: Cooling fan propeller recovered.

Severity: Informational.

Explanation: Two cooling fans recovered.

Action: No action required.

Event Data: The first byte of event data (byte 0) specifies the recovered fan number(s).

Distribution:

EFCM Basic

Event Log

✔

Product

System

Error LED

Event Log

Management Server

E-Mail Call-Home

✔

Host

Sense Info Link Incident

Log

Fan Events (300 through 399) A-31

A

Event Code Tables

Event Code: 312

Message: Cooling fan propeller recovered.

Severity: Informational.

Explanation: Three cooling fans recovered

Action: No action required.

Event Data: The first byte of event data (byte 0) specifies the recovered fan number(s).

Distribution:

EFCM Basic

Event Log

✔

Product

System

Error LED

Event Log

Management Server

E-Mail Call-Home

✔

Host

Sense Info Link Incident

Log

Event Code: 313

Message: Cooling fan propeller recovered.

Severity: Informational.

Explanation: Four cooling fans recovered

Action: No action required.

Event Data: The first byte of event data (byte 0) specifies the recovered fan number(s).

Distribution:

EFCM Basic

Event Log

✔

Product

System

Error LED

Event Log

Management Server

E-Mail Call-Home

✔

Host

Sense Info Link Incident

Log

A-32 McDATA Sphereon 4400 Fabric Switch Installation and Service Manual

Event Code Tables

A

Event Code: 314

Message: Cooling fan propeller recovered.

Severity: Informational.

Explanation: Five cooling fans recovered

Action: No action required.

Event Data: The first byte of event data (byte 0) specifies the recovered fan number(s).

Distribution:

EFCM Basic

Event Log

✔

Product

System

Error LED

Event Log

Management Server

E-Mail Call-Home

✔

Host

Sense Info Link Incident

Log

Event Code: 315

Message: Cooling fan propeller recovered.

Severity: Informational.

Explanation: Six cooling fans recovered

Action: No action required.

Event Data: The first byte of event data (byte 0) specifies the recovered fan number(s).

Distribution:

EFCM Basic

Event Log

✔

Product

System

Error LED

Event Log

Management Server

E-Mail Call-Home

✔

Host

Sense Info Link Incident

Log

Fan Events (300 through 399) A-33

A

Event Code Tables

Event Code: 370

Message: Cooling fan status polling temporarily disabled.

Severity: Minor.

Explanation: The failed or recovered status values for one or more cooling fans are exceeding a determined threshold. This indicates a possible fan failure. Fan status polling is enabled hourly or following an IML or reset.

Action: No immediate action required. Monitor cooling fan operation or additional event codes indicating a fan failure.

Event Data: No supplementary data included.

Distribution: Product

EFCM Basic

Event Log

✔

System

Error LED

✔

Event Log

Management Server

E-Mail Call-Home

✔ ✔ ✔

Host

Sense Info Link Incident

Log

A-34 McDATA Sphereon 4400 Fabric Switch Installation and Service Manual

Event Code Tables

A

CTP Card Events (400 through 499)

Event Code: 400

Message:

Severity:

Power-up diagnostics failure.

Major.

Explanation: Power-on self tests (POSTs) detected a failed FRU as indicated by the event data.

Action: If a CTP card or fan failure is indicated, replace the switch. If a power supply failure is indicated, replace the power supply. Perform a data collection and return the CD and faulty FRU to support personnel.

Event Data: Byte 0 = FRU code as follows: 02 = CTP card, 05 = cooling fan, 06 = power supply assembly.

Byte 1 = FRU slot number.

Distribution: Product Management Server Host

EFCM Basic

Event Log

✔

System

Error LED

✔

Event Log

✔

E-Mail

✔

Call-Home

✔

Sense Info Link Incident

Log

✔

Event Code: 410

Message:

Severity:

Switch reset.

Informational.

Explanation: The switch reset due to system power-up, IML, or manual reset. A software reset can occur automatically after a firmware fault (event code 411), or be user-initiated. Event data indicates the type of reset.

Action: No action required.

Event Data: Byte 0 = reset type as follows: 00 = power-on, 02 = IML, 04 = reset.

Distribution: Product Management Server

EFCM Basic

Event Log

✔

System

Error LED

Event Log

✔

E-Mail Call-Home

Host

Sense Info Link Incident

Log

CTP Card Events (400 through 499) A-35

A

Event Code Tables

Event Code: 411

Message: Firmware fault.

Severity: Major.

Explanation: Switch firmware encountered an unexpected condition and dumped operating state information to FLASH memory for retrieval and analysis. The dump file automatically transfers to the management server, where it is stored for retrieval through a data collection.

The switch performs a software reset, during which all attached Fibre Channel devices are momentarily disrupted, log out, and log back in.

Action: Perform a data collection and return the CD to support personnel.

Event Data: Bytes 0 - 3 = fault identifier, least significant byte first.

Distribution:

EFCM Basic

Event Log

✔

Product

System

Error LED

Event Log

Management Server

E-Mail Call-Home

✔

Sense Info Link Incident

Log

✔

Host

Event Code: 421

Message: Firmware download complete.

Severity: Informational.

Explanation: A new firmware version was downloaded from the management server or EFCM Basic interface. Event data contains the ASCII firmware version in hexadecimal format xx.yy.zz.bbbb.

Action: No action required.

Event Data: Bytes 0 and 1 = release level (xx).

Byte 2 = always a period.

Bytes 3 and 4 = maintenance level (yy).

Byte 5 = always a period.

Distribution:

EFCM Basic

Event Log

✔

Product

System

Error LED

Bytes 6 and 7 = interim release level (zz).

Byte 8 = always a space.

Bytes 9 - 12 = build ID (bbbb).

Event Log

Management Server

E-Mail Call-Home

✔

Host

Sense Info Link Incident

Log

A-36 McDATA Sphereon 4400 Fabric Switch Installation and Service Manual

Event Code Tables

A

Event Code: 423

Message: CTP firmware download initiated.

Severity: Informational.

Explanation: The management server or EFCM Basic Edition interface initiated download of a new firmware version.

Action: No action required.

Event Data: No supplementary data included.

Distribution:

EFCM Basic

Event Log

✔

Product

System

Error LED

Event Log

Management Server

E-Mail Call-Home

✔

Host

Sense Info Link Incident

Log

Event Code: 433

Message: Nonrecoverable Ethernet fault.

Severity: Major.

Explanation: A non-recoverable Ethernet interface failure was detected and the LAN connection to the management server or

Internet was terminated. No failure information or event codes are reported outside the switch. Although Fibre

Channel port functionality is not affected, the switch cannot be monitored or configured.

Action: Replace the switch.

Event Data: Byte 0 = LAN error type as follows: 01 = hard failure, 04 = registered fault.

Byte 1 = LAN error subtype (internally defined).

Byte 2 = LAN fault identifier (internally defined).

Distribution: Product

EFCM Basic

Event Log

✔

System

Error LED

✔

Event Log

Management Server

E-Mail Call-Home Sense Info Link Incident

Log

✔

Host

CTP Card Events (400 through 499) A-37

A

Event Code Tables

Event Code: 440

Message: Embedded port hardware failed.

Severity: Major.

Explanation: The embedded port hardware detected a fatal error.

Action: Replace the switch.

Event Data: Byte 0 = CTP slot position (00).

Byte 1 = engineering reason code

Bytes 4 - 7 = elapsed millisecond tick count.

Distribution: Product

EFCM Basic

Event Log

✔

System

Error LED

✔

Event Log

Management Server

E-Mail Call-Home

✔ ✔ ✔

Host

Sense Info Link Incident

Log

✔

Event Code: 442

Message: Embedded port anomaly detected.

Severity: Informational.

Explanation: The switch detected a deviation in the normal operating mode or status of the embedded port.

Action: No action required. An additional event code is generated if this incident exceeds an error threshold or results in a port failure.

Event Data: Byte 0 = embedded port number.

Byte 1 = anomaly reason code.

Bytes 4 - 7 = elapsed millisecond tick count.

Bytes 8 and 9 = HA error callout #1.

Bytes 10 and 11 = HA error callout #2.

Byte 12 = detecting port.

Byte 13 = connected port.

Bytes 16 and 17 = HA error callout #3.

Bytes 18 and 19 = HA error callout #4.

Distribution:

EFCM Basic

Event Log

✔

Product

System

Error LED

Event Log

Management Server

E-Mail Call-Home

✔

Host

Sense Info Link Incident

Log

A-38 McDATA Sphereon 4400 Fabric Switch Installation and Service Manual

Event Code Tables

A

Port Events (500 through 599)

Event Code: 506

Message:

Severity:

Fibre Channel port failure.

Major.

Explanation: A Fibre channel port failed. The amber LED corresponding to the port illuminates to indicate the failure. Ports with

LEDs extinguished remain operational.

Action: Perform a a data collection and return the CD to support personnel. Perform a switch reset. If the problem persists, replace the switch.

Event Data: Byte 0 = port number.

Byte 1 = engineering reason code.

Bytes 4 - 7 = elapsed millisecond tick count.

Bytes 8 - 11 = reason code specific.

Byte 16 = connector type.

Distribution: Product

Bytes 17 and 18 = transmitter technology.

Byte 19 = distance capability.

Byte 20 = supported transmission media.

Byte 21 and 22 = speed capability.

Management Server Host

EFCM Basic

Event Log

✔

System

Error LED

✔

Event Log

✔

E-Mail

✔

Call-Home

✔

Sense Info Link Incident

Log

✔

Event Code: 507

Message:

Severity:

Loopback diagnostics port failure.

Informational.

Explanation: A loopback diagnostic test detected a Fibre Channel port failure.

Action: No action required. An event code 506 is generated if this diagnostic failure results in a hard port failure.

Event Data: Byte 0 = port number.

Byte 1 = engineering reason code.

Bytes 4 - 7 = elapsed millisecond tick count.

Distribution: Product

Bytes 8 - 11 = reason code specific.

Byte 12 = test type.

Management Server Host

EFCM Basic

Event Log

✔

System

Error LED

Event Log

✔

E-Mail Call-Home Sense Info Link Incident

Log

Port Events (500 through 599) A-39

A

Event Code Tables

Event Code: 508

Message: Fibre Channel port anomaly detected.

Severity: Informational.

Explanation: The switch detected a deviation in the normal operating mode or status of the indicated Fibre Channel port.

Action: No action required. An event code 506 is generated if this anomaly results in a hard port failure.

Event Data: Byte 0 = port number.

Byte 1 = anomaly reason code.

Bytes 4 - 7 = elapsed millisecond tick count.

Bytes 8 and 9 = HA error callout #1.

Bytes 10 and 11 = HA error callout #2.

Byte 12 = detecting port.

Byte 13 = connected port.

Bytes 16 and 17 = HA error callout #3.

Bytes 18 and 19 = HA error callout #4.

Distribution:

EFCM Basic

Event Log

✔

Product

System

Error LED

Event Log

Management Server

E-Mail Call-Home

✔

Host

Sense Info Link Incident

Log

Event Code: 510

Message: Optical transceiver hot-insertion initiated.

Severity: Informational.

Explanation: Installation of an optical transceiver was initiated with the switch powered on and operational. The event indicates operational firmware detected the presence of the transceiver.

Action: No action required.

Event Data: Byte 0 = port number.

Byte 2 = optic type.

Bytes 4 - 7 = elapsed millisecond tick count.

Bytes 8 - 11 = optic serial number.

Distribution:

EFCM Basic

Event Log

✔

Product

System

Error LED

Event Log

Management Server

E-Mail Call-Home

✔

Host

Sense Info Link Incident

Log

A-40 McDATA Sphereon 4400 Fabric Switch Installation and Service Manual

Event Code Tables

A

Event Code: 512

Message: Optical transceiver nonfatal error.

Severity: Minor.

Explanation: Switch firmware detected an optical transceiver non-fatal error.

Action: Replace the failed transceiver with a functional transceiver of the same type.

Event Data: Byte 0 = port number.

Byte 1 = engineering reason code.

Byte 2 = optic type.

Bytes 4 - 7 = elapsed millisecond tick count.

Bytes 8 - 11 = optic serial number.

Distribution:

EFCM Basic

Event Log

✔

Product

System

Error LED

Event Log

Management Server

E-Mail Call-Home

✔

Host

Sense Info Link Incident

Log

Event Code: 513

Message: Optical transceiver hot-removal completed.

Severity: Informational.

Explanation: An optical transceiver was removed while the switch was powered on and operational.

Action: No action required.

Event Data: Byte 0 = port number.

Byte 2 = optic type.

Bytes 4 - 7 = elapsed millisecond tick count.

Bytes 8 - 11 = optic serial number.

Distribution:

EFCM Basic

Event Log

✔

Product

System

Error LED

Event Log

Management Server

E-Mail Call-Home

✔

Host

Sense Info Link Incident

Log

Port Events (500 through 599) A-41

A

Event Code Tables

Event Code: 514

Message: Optical transceiver failure.

Severity: Major.

Explanation: An optical transceiver failed. The amber LED corresponding to the port illuminates to indicate the failure. Ports with LEDs extinguished remain operational.

Action: Replace the failed transceiver.

Event Data: Byte 0 = port number.

Byte 1 = engineering reason code.

Byte 2 = optic type.

Bytes 4 - 7 = elapsed millisecond tick count.

Bytes 8 - 11 = optic serial number.

Distribution: Product

EFCM Basic

Event Log

✔

System

Error LED

✔

Event Log

Management Server

E-Mail Call-Home

✔ ✔ ✔

Sense Info Link Incident

Log

✔

Host

Event Code: 581

Message: Implicit incident.

Severity: Major.

Explanation: An attached server recognized a condition caused by an event that occurred at the server. The event caused an implicit Fibre Channel link incident.

Action: A link incident record (LIR) is generated and sent to the attached server using the reporting procedure defined in

T11/99-017v0 (OSI). If fault isolation at the server does not detect a failure, the problem may be due to a port failure. Go to

MAP 0000: Start MAP to perform fault isolation. In addition, perform a data collection and return the

CD to support personnel.

Event Data: Refer to the T11/99-017v0 document for the specific link incident record format.

Distribution: Product

EFCM Basic

Event Log

System

Error LED

Event Log

Management Server

E-Mail Call-Home

Host

Sense Info Link Incident

Log

✔

A-42 McDATA Sphereon 4400 Fabric Switch Installation and Service Manual

Event Code Tables

A

Event Code: 582

Message: Bit error threshold exceeded.

Severity: Major.

Explanation: An attached server determined the number of code violation errors recognized exceeded the bit error threshold.

Action: A LIR is generated and sent to the attached server using the reporting procedure defined in T11/99-017v0 (OSI).

If fault isolation at the server does not detect a failure, the problem may be due to a port failure. Go to

MAP 0000:

Start MAP to perform fault isolation. In addition, perform a data collection and return the CD to support personnel.

Event Data: Refer to the T11/99-017v0 document for the specific link incident record format.

Distribution: Product

EFCM Basic

Event Log

System

Error LED

Event Log

Management Server

E-Mail Call-Home

Host

Sense Info Link Incident

Log

✔

Event Code: 583

Message: Loss of signal or loss of synchronization.

Severity: Major.

Explanation: An attached server recognized a loss-of-signal condition or a loss-of-synchronization condition that persisted for more than the specified receiver-transmitter timeout value (R_T_TOV).

Action: A LIR is generated and sent to the attached server using the reporting procedure defined in T11/99-017v0 (OSI).

If fault isolation at the server does not detect a failure, the problem may be due to a port failure. Go to

MAP 0000:

Start MAP to perform fault isolation. In addition, perform a data collection and return the CD to support personnel.

Event Data: Refer to the T11/99-017v0 document for the specific link incident record format.

Distribution: Product

EFCM Basic

Event Log

System

Error LED

Event Log

Management Server

E-Mail Call-Home

Host

Sense Info Link Incident

Log

✔

Port Events (500 through 599) A-43

A

Event Code Tables

Event Code: 584

Message: Not operational primitive sequence received.

Severity: Major.

Explanation: An attached server received a not-operational primitive sequence (NOS).

Action: A LIR is generated and sent to the attached server using the reporting procedure defined in T11/99-017v0 (OSI).

If fault isolation at the server does not detect a failure, the problem may be due to a port failure. Go to

MAP 0000:

Start MAP to perform fault isolation. In addition, perform a data collection and return the CD to support personnel.

Event Data: Refer to the T11/99-017v0 document for the specific link incident record format.

Distribution: Product

EFCM Basic

Event Log

System

Error LED

Event Log

Management Server

E-Mail Call-Home

Host

Sense Info Link Incident

Log

✔

Event Code: 585

Message: Primitive sequence timeout.

Severity: Major.

Explanation: An attached server recognized either a link reset (LR) protocol timeout or a timeout while waiting for the appropriate response (while in a NOS receive state and after NOS was not longer recognized).

Action: A LIR is generated and sent to the attached server using the reporting procedure defined in T11/99-017v0 (OSI).

If fault isolation at the server does not detect a failure, the problem may be due to a port failure. Go to

MAP 0000:

Start MAP to perform fault isolation. In addition, perform a data collection and return the CD to support personnel.

Event Data: Refer to the T11/99-017v0 document for the specific link incident record format.

Distribution: Product

EFCM Basic

Event Log

System

Error LED

Event Log

Management Server

E-Mail Call-Home

Host

Sense Info Link Incident

Log

✔

A-44 McDATA Sphereon 4400 Fabric Switch Installation and Service Manual

Event Code Tables

A

Event Code: 586

Message: Invalid primitive sequence received for current link state.

Severity: Major.

Explanation: An attached server recognized either a link reset (LR) or a link-reset response (LRR) sequence while in the wait-for-online sequence (OLS) state.

Action: A LIR is generated and sent to the attached server using the reporting procedure defined in T11/99-017v0 (OSI).

If fault isolation at the server does not detect a failure, the problem may be due to a port failure. Go to

MAP 0000:

Start MAP to perform fault isolation. In addition, perform a data collection and return the CD to support personnel.

Event Data: Refer to the T11/99-017v0 document for the specific link incident record format.

Distribution: Product

EFCM Basic

Event Log

System

Error LED

Event Log

Management Server

E-Mail Call-Home

Host

Sense Info Link Incident

Log

✔

Event Code: 604

Message: EOS: SBAR module failure.

EOSN: SWM module failure

Severity: Major.

Explanation: A failure criterion associated with the SWM/serial crossbar hardware module has been met.

Action: Perform a data collection and return the CD to support personnel.

Event Data: Byte 0 =port number

Byte 1= BMAC link number

Distribution: Product

EFCM Basic

Event Log

✔

System

Error LED

✔

Event Log

Management Server

E-Mail Call-Home

✔ ✔ ✔

Host

Sense Info Link Incident

Log

✔

Port Events (500 through 599) A-45

A

Event Code Tables

A-46 McDATA Sphereon 4400 Fabric Switch Installation and Service Manual

B

Restore Management

Server

This appendix describes the procedure to restore a rack-mount management server after a hard drive failure. The procedure includes restoration of the:

• Windows operating system.

• Windows configuration information.

• Storage area network (SAN) management and Element Manager applications.

• SAN management data directory.

Requirements

The following are required:

• Management Server Restore CD-ROM - This CD-ROM is shipped with the management server and contains the:

— Disk operating system (DOS) files required to boot the server after a hard drive failure.

— Windows operating system.

• EFC Management Applications CD-ROM - This CD-ROM contains the SAN management and product Element Manager applications.

Requirements B-1

B

Restore Management Server

• SAN Management data directory backup on CD-ROM - The

SAN management data directory is automatically backed up to a

CD when the server is rebooted or when the data directory contents change. The data directory includes:

— Configuration data (product definitions, user names, passwords, user rights, nicknames, session options, simple network management protocol (SNMP) trap recipients,

E-mail recipients, and Ethernet event notifications).

— Log files (SAN management application logs and individual

Element Manager logs).

— Zoning library (all zone set and zone definitions).

— Firmware library.

— Call-home settings.

— Configuration data for each managed product (stored on the server and in NV-RAM on each product).

• Windows configuration information - Windows operating system network addresses, date and time information, user information, and product identification are recorded during installation of the server. Refer to

Task 14: Record or Verify Server

Restore Information for information.

Restore Management Server Procedure

To restore the server:

1. At the server, press the left edge (PUSH label) of the LCD panel to disengage the panel and expose the CD-RW drive.

2. Insert the Management Server Restore CD-ROM in the CD-RW drive and close the LCD panel.

ATTENTION ! This procedure deletes all data from the C: hard drive partition.

3. Press the power ( ) button. The server powers on and performs the restore process from the CD-ROM.

4. After the restore process completes, the server makes an audible series of beeps. Remove the Management Server Restore

CD-ROM from the CD-RW drive.

B-2 McDATA Sphereon 4400 Fabric Switch Installation and Service Manual

Restore Management Server

B

5. Power cycle the server. The server performs power-on self-tests

(POSTs). After successful POST completion, the LCD panel displays a Welcome!! message, then continuously cycles through and displays server operational information.

6. Configure the following parameters at the server’s LCD panel.

Refer to

Task 7: Configure Server Password and Network Addresses for

instructions.

• LCD panel password.

• IP address for private and public LAN connections.

• Subnet mask or private and public LAN connections.

7. Log on to the server’s Windows desktop through a LAN connection to a browser-capable PC. Refer to

Access the

Management Server Desktop for instructions.

8. Configure Windows operating system information as required by the customer:

• Configure computer and workgroup names for the server. If required, change the server’s gateway address and DNS server IP address to conform to the customer’s LAN addressing scheme. Refer to

Task 8: Configure Management

Server Information for instructions.

• Change the default Windows administrator password and configure password access for users. Refer to

Task 9: Configure

Windows Operating System Users for instructions.

• Set the server’s date and time. Refer to Task 10: Set Management

Server Date and Time

for instructions.

• Configure the call-home feature. Refer to

Task 11: Configure the

Call-Home Feature (Optional)

for instructions.

9. Insert the EFC Management Applications CD-ROM in the

CD-RW drive and close the LCD panel.

10. At the server’s Windows desktop, click Start at the left side of the task bar, then select the Run option. The Run dialog box displays.

11. At the Run dialog box, type D:\mcdataServerInstall.exe in the Open field.

12. Click OK. The InstallShield third-party application prepares to install the software version, and opens the InstallShield Wizard

dialog box ( Figure B-1 ).

Restore Management Server Procedure B-3

B

Restore Management Server

Figure B-1 InstallShield Wizard Dialog Box

13. Remove the EFC Management Applications CD-ROM from the

CD-RW drive.

14. Insert the SAN management data directory backup CD-ROM

(created while performing

Task 20: Back Up Configuration Data

) in the CD-RW drive and close the LCD panel.

15. Copy the contents of the CD-ROM to the server hard drive as follows:

• For the EFCM 8.7 application, copy the CD-ROM contents to the following directories:

— C:\Program Files\EFCM 8.7\CallHome

— C:\Program Files\EFCM 8.7\Client

— C:\Program Files\EFCM 8.7\Server.

16. Power off and reboot the server.

a. At the Windows desktop, click Start at the left side of the task bar (bottom of the desktop), then select Shut Down. The Shut

Down Windows dialog box displays.

B-4 McDATA Sphereon 4400 Fabric Switch Installation and Service Manual

Restore Management Server

B b. Select the Restart option from the list box and click OK. The server powers down and restarts. During the reboot process the LAN connection between the server and browser-capable

PC drops momentarily, and the TightVNC viewer displays a network error.

c. After the server reboots, click Login again. The VNC

Authentication screen displays.

d. Type the default password and click OK. The Welcome to

Windows dialog box displays.

NOTE: The default TightVNC viewer password is password. e. Click the Send Ctrl-Alt-Del button at the top of the window to log on to the server desktop. The Log On to Windows dialog box displays.

NOTE: Do not simultaneously press the Ctrl, Alt, and Delete keys.

This action logs the user on to the browser-capable PC, not the rack-mount management server.

f. Type the default Windows user name and password and click

OK . The server’s Windows desktop opens and the EFCM Log

In dialog box displays.

NOTE: The default Windows user name is Administrator and the default password is password. Both are case-sensitive.

g. Type the SAN management application default user ID and password and select a server or IP address from the Network

Address drop-down list.

NOTE: The default SAN management application user ID is

Administrator and the default password is password. Both are case-sensitive.

h. Click Login. The application opens and the main window appears.

Restore Management Server Procedure B-5

B

Restore Management Server

B-6 McDATA Sphereon 4400 Fabric Switch Installation and Service Manual

Index

A access control list configure

Element Manager

2-73 description 2-73

attention statements

xxiv

authentication

access control list 2-73

configure

EFCM Basic 2-29

Element Manager

2-73

SAN management application 2-73

RADIUS server support

2-30 ,

2-73

settings

2-29

, 2-73

authentication settings configure

EFCM Basic 2-29

Element Manager

2-73

description 2-29

,

2-73

B back up

SAN management application configuration

data 2-75

switch configuration file

EFCM Basic Edition 4-25

Element Manager

4-51

BB_Credit configure

EFCM Basic 2-22

Element Manager

2-65

description 2-22

,

2-65

binding fabric

configure through EFCM Basic 2-30

configure through SAN management

application 2-73

enable through EFCM Basic 2-30

enable through SAN management appli-

cation 2-73

Enterprise Fabric Mode 2-30

,

2-73

port

configure through EFCM Basic 2-30

configure through Element Manager

2-66

enable through EFCM Basic 2-30

enable through Element Manager

2-66

switch

configure through EFCM Basic 2-30

configure through Element Manager

2-74

enable through EFCM Basic 2-30

enable through Element Manager

2-74

block port

EFCM Basic Edition 4-22

Element Manager

4-47

C call-home support

configure at management server 2-48

, 2-72

enable at management server

2-72

chassis ground connector

description 1-6

location 1-3

clean fiber-optic components

4-5

clearances 1-7

Index I-1

Index

I-2 command line interface disable

2-24 enable 2-24

compliance statements

Argentinian UL Certification

xxi

Australia C-Tick Mark

xxi

Canadian EMC xix

CB Scheme xx

Chinese BSMI Statement xxii

Chinese CCC Mark xxii

Class 1 laser transceiver

xviii

European Union CE Mark xx

European Union N-Mark

xxi

Federal Communications Commission

xviii

German GS Mark xxii

Japanese VCCI Statement

xxii

Korean MIC Mark

xxiii

Mexican NOM Mark

xxiii

New Zealand C-Tick Mark xxi

recycling information xxiii

Russian GOST Certification

xxiii

South African SABS Certification xxiii

UL Certification

xx

configuration file back up

EFCM Basic Edition

4-25

Element Manager 4-51

restore

EFCM Basic Edition

4-26

configure

Element Manager 4-51

access control list

Element Manager 2-73

authentication settings

EFCM Basic

2-29

Element Manager 2-73

basic port information

EFCM Basic

2-21

Element Manager 2-64

call-home feature 2-48

call-home support

2-72

Element Manager application

2-59

e-mail notification

2-70

Enterprise Fabric Mode

EFCM Basic

2-30

SAN management application

2-73

Ethernet events 2-72

McDATA Sphereon 4400 Fabric Switch Installation and Service Manual fabric binding

EFCM Basic

2-30

SAN management application

2-73

fabric parameters

EFCM Basic

2-17

Element Manager 2-62

ISL performance features

EFCM Basic

2-30

Element Manager 2-74

SAN management application

2-74

management server date and time

2-46

DNS domain name

2-40

IP address

2-38

name 2-40

password

2-38

subnet mask

2-38

OpenTrunking

EFCM Basic

2-30

Element Manager 2-74

OSMS

EFCM Basic

2-25

Element Manager 2-56

passwords

2-38 ,

2-49

PFE keys

EFCM Basic

2-27

Element Manager 2-55

port BB_Credit

EFCM Basic

2-22

Element Manager 2-65

port binding

EFCM Basic

2-30

Element Manager 2-66

port fencing

EFCM Basic

2-31

SAN management application

2-74

port NPIV

EFCM Basic

2-22

Element Manager 2-66

preferred path

EFCM Basic

2-30

Element Manager 2-74

RADIUS server

EFCM Basic

2-30

Element Manager 2-73

SANtegrity authentication

EFCM Basic

2-29

Element Manager

2-73

SANtegrity binding

EFCM Basic

2-29

Element Manager

2-73

SAN management application 2-73

security features

EFCM Basic

2-29

Element Manager

2-73

SAN management application 2-73

SNMP

EFCM Basic

2-23

Element Manager

2-66

SSL encryption software

2-25 web 2-25

switch binding

EFCM Basic

2-30

Element Manager

2-74

switch date and time

EFCM Basic

2-15

Element Manager

2-57

switch identification

EFCM Basic

2-14

Element Manager

2-59

switch network information

EFCM Basic

2-19

maintenance port

2-32

switch operating parameters

EFCM Basic

2-16

Element Manager

2-61

switch to SAN management application

2-51

threshold alerts

2-68

user names

2-49

Windows users 2-44

zone sets

2-78

zones

2-78

cooling fan

description 1-4

events (300 - 399) A-28

fault isolation 3-24

illustrated parts breakdown 6-3

CTP card

events (400 - 499) A-35

fault isolation 3-24

firmware versions

4-23 ,

4-48

Index

D

danger statements xxiv

data collection procedure

EFCM Basic Edition 4-20

date

Element Manager 4-45

set at management server 2-46

set switch date

EFCM Basic 2-15

Element Manager 2-57

default

DNS server IP address

2-52

EFCM Basic Edition

password 2-12

user name

2-12

maintenance port password 2-34 ,

3-22

management server

gateway address 2-52

IP address 2-52

LCD panel password 2-38

subnet mask 2-52

SAN management application

password 2-49

,

2-77 ,

4-57

,

B-5

user name

2-49 ,

2-77

,

4-57 ,

B-5

switch

gateway address 2-1 ,

3-1

IP address 2-1 ,

3-1

passwords 2-1

,

3-1

subnet mask 2-1 ,

3-1

TightVNC password 2-41

,

2-76 ,

4-57

,

B-5

Windows

password 2-41

,

2-77 ,

4-57

,

B-5

user name

2-41 ,

2-77

,

4-57 ,

B-5

dimensions

1-7

door key

description 1-14

illustration

1-14

download firmware

EFCM Basic Edition 4-24

Element Manager 4-49

from filecenter

4-6

software from filecenter

4-6

E

E_D_TOV

2-18

Index I-3

Index

I-4

E_Port configure

2-21 ,

2-64

description

1-2

OpenTrunking

2-30 ,

2-74

performance features

2-30 ,

2-74

port fencing 2-31

,

2-74

preferred path 2-30

,

2-74

segmented 3-41

e_port segmentation

reasons for 4-38

EFCM Basic Edition

configure product 2-12

disable at management server

2-70

embedded port frame log

4-12

enable at management server 2-70

event log 4-10

fabric log

4-12

link incident log

4-11

open trunking re-route log

4-12

Element Manager application configure

2-59

configure PFE key

EFCM Basic

2-27

Element Manager 2-55

embedded port log

4-33

event log 4-31

hardware log

4-31

link incident log

4-31

open trunking log 4-33

port threshold alert log

4-32

switch fabric log

4-34

e-mail support

configure at management server 2-70 enable at management server 2-70

embedded port frame log

4-12

embedded port log

4-33

enable call-home support

2-72

command line interface

2-24

EFCM Basic Edition

2-70

e-mail notification

2-70

Enterprise Fabric Mode

EFCM Basic

2-30

SAN management application

2-73

Ethernet events 2-72

host control

EFCM Basic

2-25

McDATA Sphereon 4400 Fabric Switch Installation and Service Manual

Element Manager 2-56

port binding

EFCM Basic

2-30

Element Manager 2-66

SSL encryption

software 2-25

web

2-25

switch binding

EFCM Basic

2-30

Element Manager 2-74

Telnet access

2-70

Enterprise Fabric Mode configure

EFCM Basic

2-30

SAN management application

2-73

description

2-30 ,

2-73

enable

EFCM Basic

2-30

SAN management application

2-73

environment

operating 1-8

shipping 1-7

storage

1-7

ERR LED description

1-6

location 1-3

error detection description

1-12

event codes 3-2

error reporting description

1-12

ESD

event codes 3-2

precautions xxv

RRP precautions

5-2

Ethernet connector description

1-5

location 1-3

Ethernet events

configure at management server 2-72 enable at management server 2-72

Ethernet hub description

1-11

fault isolation

3-14

illustration 1-12

installation 2-5

event codes

cooling fan events (300 - 399) A-28

CTP card events (400 - 499) A-35

description A-1

port events (500 - 599)

A-39

power supply events (200 - 299) A-24

system events (000 - 199) A-2

event log

EFCM Basic Edition 4-10

Element Manager

4-31

SAN management

4-29

external loopback test

description 4-19

,

4-42

EFCM Basic Edition 4-19

Element Manager

4-42

F

F_Port configure

2-21

, 2-64

description 1-1

fabric binding configure

EFCM Basic

2-30

SAN management application 2-73

description 2-30

,

2-73

enable

EFCM Basic

2-30

SAN management application 2-73

Enterprise Fabric Mode 2-30

,

2-73

fabric log

EFCM Basic Edition 4-12

SAN management

4-29

fabric parameters (configure)

EFCM Basic

2-17

Element Manager

2-62

Fabricenter equipment cabinet

description 1-2

Ethernet hub installation

2-7

management server installation 2-36

switch installation 2-11

fault isolation

MAP 0000 - Start MAP

3-5

MAP 0100 - Power distribution analysis

3-10

MAP 0200 - POST failure analysis

3-13

MAP 0300 - Loss of server communication

3-14

MAP 0400 - FRU failure analysis

3-24

Index

MAP 0500 - Port failure or link incident

analysis 3-26

MAP 0600 - Fabric or ISL problem analysis

3-38

summary 3-2

fenced E_Port

description 3-46

fault isolation 3-38

fiber-optic protective plug

description 1-15

illustration

1-15

filecenter download firmware

4-6

download software

4-6

registration

2-80

firmware add version to management server library

4-49

determine version

EFCM Basic Edition 4-23

Element Manager 4-48

download

EFCM Basic Edition 4-24

Element Manager 4-49

version from filecenter 4-6

FL_Port configure

2-21

, 2-64

description 1-2

Flexport Technology configure PFE key

EFCM Basic 2-27

Element Manager 2-55

description 2-27

,

2-55

FRU removal

power supply 5-7

SFP transceiver

5-3 tools required 5-3 ,

5-7

FRU replacement

power supply 5-8

SFP transceiver

5-5

tools required 5-3 ,

5-7

FRUs

description 1-2

illustrated parts breakdown 6-1

power supply 1-4

SFP transceiver

1-3

status LEDs 1-6

Index I-5

Index full-volatility feature configure PFE key

EFCM Basic

2-27

Element Manager 2-55

description

4-20 ,

4-45

G gateway address

change switch address 2-19

,

2-32

management server default 2-52

switch default 2-1 ,

3-1

H hardware log

4-31

I identification (configure)

EFCM Basic

2-14

Element Manager 2-59

illustrated parts breakdown front-accessible FRUs

6-2

miscellaneous parts 6-4

power cords

6-5

rear-accessible FRUs 6-3

IML switch 4-4

installation tasks summary

2-2

Task 1 - Verify installation requirements 2-4

Task 10 - Set management server date and

time 2-46

Task 11 - Configure the call-home feature

(optional) 2-48

Task 12 - Assign user names and passwords

2-49

Task 13 - Configure the product to the management application

2-51

Task 14 - Record or verify server restore information

2-52

Task 15 - Verify product-to-server communication

2-53

Task 16 - Configure PFE key (optional) 2-55

Task 17 - Configure management server

(optional) 2-56

Task 18 - Set product date and time 2-57

Task 19 - Configure the Element Manager application

2-59

Task 2 - Unpack, inspect, and install the

Ethernet hub (optional) 2-5

Task 20 - Back up configuration data

2-75

Task 21 - Cable Fibre Channel ports

2-77

Task 22 - Configure zoning (optional)

2-78

Task 23 - Connect product to a fabric element

(optional) 2-79

Task 24 - Register with the McDATA filecenter

2-80

Task 3 - Unpack, inspect, and install the

product 2-9

Task 4 - Configure product at the EFCM

Basic Edition interface (optional)

2-12

Task 5 - Configure product network information (optional)

2-32

Task 6 - Unpack, inspect, and install the management server

2-35

Task 7 - Configure server password and network addresses

2-38

Task 8 - Configure management server information

2-40

Task 9 - Configure Windows operating system users

2-44

internal loopback test description

4-17 ,

4-41

EFCM Basic Edition

4-17

Element Manager 4-41

interop mode 2-18

,

2-64

interswitch link configure performance features

EFCM Basic

2-30

Element Manager 2-74

SAN management application

2-74

description

1-2

fault isolation

3-38

OpenTrunking

2-30 ,

2-74

port fencing 2-31

,

2-74

preferred path 2-30

,

2-74

IP address

change switch address 2-19

,

2-32

DNS server default 2-52 management server default 2-52

switch default 2-1 ,

3-1

I-6 McDATA Sphereon 4400 Fabric Switch Installation and Service Manual

L

LAN connection

connect management server 2-35

laser transceiver compliance statement

xviii

description 1-3

illustrated parts breakdown 6-2

removal 5-3

replacement 5-5

types available

1-3

LCD panel configure private server network addresses

2-39

configure public server network addresses

2-39

default password for management server

2-38

LEDs

ERR 1-6

port status

1-6

power supply status

1-6

PWR

1-6

link incident log

EFCM Basic Edition 4-11

Element Manager

4-31

logs embedded port

4-33

embedded port frame 4-12

event

EFCM Basic

4-10

Element Manager

4-31

SAN management

4-29

fabric

EFCM Basic

4-12

SAN management

4-29

hardware

4-31

link incident

EFCM Basic

4-11

Element Manager

4-31

open trunking

4-33

open trunking re-route

EFCM Basic

4-12

port threshold alert

4-32

product status

4-29

switch fabric 4-34

loopback plug

Index

description 1-14

illustration

1-14

loopback test external

EFCM Basic Edition 4-19

Element Manager 4-42

internal

EFCM Basic Edition 4-17

Element Manager 4-41

M

MAC address, switch 2-32

maintenance analysis procedures

MAP 0000 - Start MAP

3-5

MAP 0100 - Power distribution analysis

3-10

MAP 0200 - POST failure analysis

3-13

MAP 0300 - Loss of server communication

3-14

MAP 0400 - FRU failure analysis

3-24

MAP 0500 - Port failure or link incident

analysis 3-26

MAP 0600 - Fabric or ISL problem analysis

3-38

summary 3-2

maintenance approach

1-8

maintenance port configure switch network addresses

2-32

default password 2-34

,

3-22

description 1-6

location 1-3

manage configuration data

EFCM Basic Edition 4-25

Element Manager 4-51

management server

access through TightVNC 2-40

description 1-9

event code tables A-1

fault isolation 3-14

illustration

1-10

installation

2-35

LCD panel password 2-38

minimum specifications 1-10

recommended specifications

1-11

restore procedure

B-2

restore requirements

B-1

specifications

1-10

Index I-7

Index

I-8 multiswitch fabric e_port segmentation

reasons for 4-38

N

N_Port ID virtualization configure PFE key

EFCM Basic

2-27

Element Manager 2-56

description

2-22 ,

2-66

network information configure management server

2-38

configure switch

EFCM Basic

2-19

maintenance port 2-32

NPIV configure

EFCM Basic

2-22

Element Manager 2-66

description

2-22 ,

2-66

null modem cable description

1-15 illustration 1-15

O

open trunking log 4-33

open trunking re-route log

4-12

open-systems management server (configure)

EFCM Basic

2-25

Element Manager 2-56

OpenTrunking configure

EFCM Basic

2-30

Element Manager 2-74

configure PFE key

EFCM Basic

2-27

Element Manager 2-56

description

2-30 ,

2-74

operating environment

1-8

operating parameters (configure)

EFCM Basic

2-16

Element Manager 2-61

P password

configure at management server 2-49

customer-level switch 2-1

,

3-1

default management server LCD panel

2-38

default EFCM Basic Edition

2-12

default maintenance port

2-34 ,

3-22

default SAN management application

2-49 ,

2-77 ,

4-57

,

B-5

default server 2-38

default TightVNC

2-41 ,

2-76

,

4-57 ,

B-5

default Windows 2-41

,

2-77 ,

4-57

, B-5

maintenance-level switch

2-1

,

3-1

performance statistics

Class 2

EFCM Basic Edition

4-17

Class 3

EFCM Basic Edition

4-17

error

EFCM Basic Edition

4-17 open trunking 4-17

traffic

PFE keys

EFCM Basic Edition

4-17

configure

EFCM Basic

2-27

Element Manager 2-55

Element Manager application

2-27 ,

2-55

Flexport Technology

2-27 ,

2-55

full-volatility 2-27

,

2-55

N_Port ID virtualization 2-27

,

2-56

OpenTrunking

2-27 ,

2-56

SANtegrity (enhanced)

2-27 ,

2-56

port binding configure

EFCM Basic

2-30

Element Manager 2-66

description

2-30 ,

2-66

enable

EFCM Basic

2-30

Element Manager 2-66

port fencing configure

EFCM Basic

2-31

SAN management application

2-74

description

2-31 ,

2-74

port threshold alert log

4-32

ports

McDATA Sphereon 4400 Fabric Switch Installation and Service Manual

cabling 2-77

configurable types

1-1

configure basic information

EFCM Basic

2-21

Element Manager

2-64

configure BB_Credit

EFCM Basic

2-22

Element Manager

2-65

configure NPIV

EFCM Basic

2-22

Element Manager

2-66

E_Port fencing

2-31 ,

2-74

events (500 - 599) A-39

LED diagnostics

4-8

performance statistics

EFCM Basic Edition 4-17

Element Manager

4-36

port properties

4-37

port technology

4-39

SFP transceivers

1-3

status LEDs 1-6

swap ports

4-44

power cords

description 6-5 illustrated parts breakdown 6-5

power requirements 1-7

power supply

connector location 1-3

description 1-4

events (200 - 299) A-24

fault isolation 3-10

illustrated parts breakdown 6-3

removal 5-7

replacement 5-8

status LED 1-6

power-off procedure 4-3

power-on procedure

4-2

precautions

ESD

xxv general xxv

preferred domain ID

2-61

preferred path configure

EFCM Basic

2-30

Element Manager

2-74

description 2-30

,

2-74

procedural notes

4-2

Index procedures

EFCM Basic Edition

block or unblock port 4-22

data collection

4-20

manage configuration data

4-25

obtain log information 4-10

set online state 4-21

upgrade firmware 4-23

Element Manager

block or unblock port 4-47

data collection

4-45

manage configuration data

4-51

obtain switch log information

4-30

perform port diagnostics 4-35

set online state 4-46

swap ports

4-44

upgrade firmware 4-48

installation

2-2

power-off 4-3

power-on 4-2

repair

4-1

SAN management application

install or upgrade software 4-55

obtain fabric log information

4-29 product status log 4-29

publications, related

xvi

PWR LED

description 1-6

location 1-3

R

R_A_TOV

2-18

rack-mount installation

Ethernet hub

2-7

management server

2-36

switch 2-11

RADIUS server configure

EFCM Basic 2-30

Element Manager 2-73

description 2-30

,

2-73

recycling information

xxiii

remove and replace procedures

ESD precautions 5-2

FRU list 5-2

procedural notes

5-1

Index I-9

Index

I-10 repair procedures

clean fiber-optic components 4-5

download firmware or software 4-6

EFCM Basic Edition block or unblock port

4-22

collect maintenance data

4-20

manage configuration data 4-25

obtain log information

4-10

set online state

4-21

upgrade firmware

4-23

Element Manager block or unblock port

4-47

collect maintenance data

4-45

manage configuration data 4-51

obtain switch log information 4-30

perform port diagnostics

4-35

set online state

4-46

swap ports

4-44

upgrade firmware

4-48

IML or reset switch 4-3

overview

4-1

port LED diagnostics

4-8

power-off procedure

4-3

power-on procedure 4-2

SAN management application install or upgrade software

4-55

obtain fabric log information 4-29

rerouting delay 2-62

reset configuration data

EFCM Basic Edition

4-27

Element Manager 4-52

switch

4-4

RESET button

function 1-5

location 1-3

restore management server

B-2

switch configuration file

EFCM Basic Edition

4-26

Element Manager 4-51

S safety

attention statements xxiv

danger statements

xxiv

ESD precautions

xxv

,

5-2

general precautions xxv

SAN management application default password

2-49

, 2-77 ,

4-57 ,

B-5

user name 2-49 ,

2-77 ,

4-57

,

B-5

event log 4-29

fabric log

4-29

product status log

4-29

SANtegrity (enhanced) configure PFE key

EFCM Basic

2-27

Element Manager 2-56

SANtegrity authentication access control list

2-73

configure

EFCM Basic

2-29

Element Manager 2-73

RADIUS server support 2-30

,

2-73

settings 2-29 ,

2-73

SANtegrity binding configure

EFCM Basic

2-29

Element Manager 2-73

SAN management application

2-73

Enterprise Fabric Mode configure through EFCM basic

2-30

configure through SAN management application

2-73

fabric binding configure through EFCM basic

2-30

configure through SAN management application

2-73

port binding configure through EFCM basic

2-30

configure through Element Manager

2-66

switch binding configure through EFCM basic

2-30

configure through Element Manager

2-74

security features configure

EFCM Basic

2-29

Element Manager 2-73

SAN management application

2-73

Enterprise Fabric Mode

2-29 ,

2-73

McDATA Sphereon 4400 Fabric Switch Installation and Service Manual

SANtegrity authentication

2-29 ,

2-73

SANtegrity binding 2-29

,

2-73

segmented E_Port

description 3-41

fault isolation 3-38

serviceability features 1-12

set online state

EFCM Basic Edition 4-21

Element Manager

4-46

SFP transceiver

description 1-3

fault isolation 3-26

illustrated parts breakdown 6-2

removal 5-3

replacement 5-5

types available

1-3

shipping environment 1-7

SNMP configure

EFCM Basic

2-23

Element Manager

2-66

description 2-23

,

2-66

software download version from filecenter

4-6

install 4-55 upgrade 4-55

specifications management server

1-10

switch clearances

1-7 switch dimensions 1-7

switch power requirements

1-7

Sphereon 4400 Fabric Switch

description 1-1

FRU removal and replacement

5-1

FRUs

1-2

illustrated parts breakdown 6-1

installation

2-9

maintenance approach

1-8

management

1-9

repair procedures 4-1

specifications

1-6

SSL encryption

configure software encryption 2-25

configure web encryption

2-25

storage environment

1-7

subnet mask

change switch value 2-19

,

2-32

Index management server default

2-52

switch default

2-1

, 3-1

swap ports 4-44

switch binding configure

EFCM Basic 2-30

Element Manager 2-74

description 2-30

,

2-74

enable

EFCM Basic 2-30

Element Manager 2-74

switch fabric log

4-34

switch priority 2-18

,

2-63

system events (000 - 199)

A-2

T technical support

filecenter registration 2-80

technical support center

e-mail address xvii

fax number

xvii phone number xvii

technical support center

e-mail address xvii

fax number

xvii phone number xvii

Telnet access

disable at management server 2-70

enable at management server

2-70

test

call-home support 2-72

e-mail notification 2-70

threshold alert

port properties dialog box 4-38

reasons for

4-38

threshold alerts configure

2-68 description 2-68 types 2-68

TightVNC access management server

2-40

time

default password 2-41

,

2-76 ,

4-57

,

B-5

set at management server 2-46

set switch time

EFCM Basic 2-15

Index I-11

Index

Element Manager 2-57

tools and test equipment

FRU removal and replacement 5-3 ,

5-7

supplied by service personnel

1-15

supplied with product

1-14

trademarks

xviii

U unblock port

EFCM Basic Edition

4-22

Element Managerapplication

4-47

user name

configure at management server 2-49

default EFCM Basic Edition

2-12

default SAN management application

2-49 ,

2-77 ,

4-57

,

B-5

default Windows 2-41

,

2-77 ,

4-57

, B-5

V verify

management server restore information 2-52

power supply replacement

5-9

SFP transceiver replacement 5-5

switch-to-server communication

2-53

W

Windows

configure users 2-44

default password

2-41

, 2-77

,

4-57 ,

B-5

user name 2-41 ,

2-77 ,

4-57

,

B-5

WWN

port properties dialog box 4-37

Z zone sets configure

EFCM Basic

2-78

Element Manager 2-78

description

2-78 naming conventions 2-78

zones configure

EFCM Basic

2-78

Element Manager 2-78

description

2-78

naming conventions

2-78

I-12 McDATA Sphereon 4400 Fabric Switch Installation and Service Manual